1L13 CORNELL UNIVERSITY LIBRARY Cornell University Library PC 1109.U73 1868 15 -"924 026 638 324 Cornell University Library The original of this book is in the Cornell University Library. There are no known copyright restrictions in the United States on the use of the text. http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924026638324 LEYPOLDT & HOLT'S CATALOGUE THE STUDY OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES; Including the booh published by them/or S. B. Urbino. Jtnirij. Otto's French Conversation Grammar. Thoroughly revised by Feb dinand BdCHEB, Instructor in French at Harvard. College. 12mo, cloth «1.75. Key to tho above, 65 cts. Ii Instructeur de IVEnfance. (A First Book for Children to etudj French.) By L. Boxcceur. 12ido, cloth. 90 cts. Elementary French Reader. By Mad. II. Gibert. 12mo, boards. 40 cts. Lucie : Familiar Conversations In French and English. 12mo, cloth. 90 cts. Hew Guide to Modern Conversation, In French and English. By Witcomb and Bellencer. lOmo, cloth. 75 cts. Sadler ) Cours de Versions ; or, Exercises for Translating English into French. Annotated and revised by Frof. C. F. Gillette. lOmo. $1.25. Ie Roman d'un Jeune Homme Pauvre. Par O. FEUILLET. $1.25. 'elite Fadette. Far G. Sand. 12mo, cloth. $1.25. t sir nne Kpingle. Par J. T. DB Saint Gkemain. Aveo vocabulain. 12mo, cloth. $1.00. >tes Blographlqnes. Par E. Foa. Avec Vocabulalre. 12mo, cloth. $1.25 The Grammars, and various other works, in this list, are used in Harvard Uni- versity. Michigan TiuTvirasiTT w«w Yomr nam academy, Vabsar Femalb STANDARD EDUCATIONAL WORKS iBooern iFtenrij Camefcfos. Le Village. Par O. Feuillet. 25 cts. La Cagnotte. Par MM. Eugexe LABICHE ct A. DELACOCR. 40 eta.. Lea Fenimes qui Pleurent. Par Mil. SlRAUDIN et Lambert Thi- BOUST. 25 eta. Leg Pctltes Sllseres de la Tie Humalne. Par M. CLAIRVILLE. 25 o. La Nlaise de Saint Flour. Par BAYAED et LEMOISH. 25 eta. WITH VOCABULAKIE.. Trois Proverbes. Par Th. Lecleeq. SOcts Valerie. Par Sckibe. 30 eta. Le Collier de Perlcs. Far Mazekes. 80 eta. Pags for CT^fltirm, foutfj Focaumartea. La Petite Maman i par Mme de M. Le Bracelet i par Mme de Oauijc, 12mo, paper. 25 eta. La Viellle Cousine ) par E. Souvestre. Leg Ricochets. 12mo, paper. 25 eta. Le Testament de Madame Patural j par E. Souvestre. T.a De- moiselle de St. Cyr j par LA Comtesse Drohoyowskla. 12mo, paper. 25 eta. La Loterle de Franc! ort % par E. Souvestre. La Jeune Savante ; par Mme Cuko. 12mo, paper. 25 eta. College Series of jUJooern iFrenrfj Plage, With English Notes. By Professor Ferdinand Bocher. 12mo, paper. I. La Jole Fait Peur. Par Mme de GiRARDDf. 30 eta. II. La Batallle de Dames. Par Scribe et Leqouve. 40 eta. III. Le Maison de Penarvan. Par Jules Sandeau. 40 eta. IV. La Poudre aux Xeux. Par MM. Labiche ct Martin. 40 cts. V. Lea Petltg Olseaux. Par MM. Labictie et Delacoue. 40 cts. VI. Mademoiselle de la Selgliere. Par J. SANDEAU. 40 eta. VII. Le Roman d'un Jeune Homme Pauvre. Par O. Feulllet. 40 cts. VIII. Leg Dolgtg de Pee. Par E. Scribe. 40 eta. COLLEGE SERIES. VOL. I. LA Joie Fait Peur; La Bataille de Dames ; La Maison de Penarvan; La Poudre aux Yeux. Wmo, cloth. $1.50. vol. n. Les Petits Oiseaux; Mademoiselle de la Seiglibbe: Le Roman d'ub Jbuke Homme Fauvrb ; Lbs Doigts de Fee. 12mo, cloth. 81.76. IN FOREIGN LANGUAGES. ©erman. Otto's German Conversation Grammar. By Eev. Dr. E. OTTO. Eighth revised edition.. 1 vol., 12mo, cloth. $2.00. Key to Otto's German Grammar. 90cts. Introductory Grammar. By E. C. F. Krauss. 12mo, cloth. 90 eta. Pollen's German Reader: Selections in Trose and Verse from eminent Ger- man Authors. Explanatory Notes by Citarles Pollen, late Professor at Harvard. New revised edition. Cloth SI. 25. (In Press.) Die Irrlichter. Ein Marchon. 12mo. 60 cts. Vergissmeinnicht You Futlitz. With English Notes. 12mo. 10 cts. Immensee , Novello von Ta. Storm. With English Notes. 12mo. 40 ctB. Undine. Ein Marchen von De La Moite Fouque. With Vocabulary, 50 cts. Goetlie. FAUST. With English Notes. Paper, $1.00; Cloth, $1.25. Goethe. Iphigenle auf Tauris. With English Notes by E.C.F. Krauss 50 cts. . Goethe. Herrman and Dorothea. With English Notes by Krauss. 60 cts. Schiller. Maria Stuart. With English Notes by Krauss. 60 cts. Schiller. Wilhelm Tell. With English Notes by E. C. F. Kbauss. Paper , 60 cts. ; Cloth, 90 cts. < Schiller. Dm Piccolomini (Wallenstein). With English Notes by E. C. F. Krauss. Paper, 60 cts. ; Cloth, 90 cts. Schiller. Wallensteln's Tod. With English Notes by E. C. F. Krauss. Paper, 60 cts. j Cloth, 90 cts. Schiller. Wallenstein. Complete. Cloth, $1.50. Einer Muss Helrathen, von Wilhelmi; and Eigenslnn, von Benedix. 40 cts. Kotzebue. Der Gerade Weo deb Beste. With English Notes by E. C. F. Krauss. 30 cts. Goerner. Englisch, ein Lustspiel. With English Notes by E. C. F. Krausb. 40 cts. Italian. Ii. B. Cuore. ITALIAN GRAMMAR. With English Notes. 12mo, cloth. $1.75 Kkt to Cuore's Italian Grammar. 65 cts. ffliattlltmiana. Landmarks of Ancient History. By Miss YONGE. 16mo>, cloth. $1.00. Dictation Exercises. By Hiss Sewell, enlarged by L. B. Urblno. lCmo board. 90 cts. ]>r. Simmer's Elements of Design. With 36 Plates. $3.00. Just Published, Gouttes de Roses. Boos <>;' French Poetry. Cloth, 75 ots. Beginning French. Exercises in Pronouncing, Spelling, and Translating. Arranged from the 140th edition of Ahm's French Course, and the 10th Paris edition of Bklezk's SyUabaire. 50 cts LEYP0LDT & HOLT, Publishers, 451, Bkoomk Street, New Iobx. Notice. The reader is invited to send for our complete cata- logue, which will be sent, postpaid, to any one who applies. It contains titles and descriptions of many valuable works, on topics kindred to those treated in this volume, and will be found valuable by students of French, German, Ital- ian, Spanish, Portuguese, Early English, Saxon, Hebrew, the Classics, or General Philology, and also by persons seeking miscellaneous books for public or private Libraries. LEYPOLDT & HOLT, Publishers. 451 Broome Si., New York. ITALIAN CONVERSATION-GRAMMAR. By L. B. CUORE. THIED EDITION. Boston: S. E. Uebiko. NEW YORK: LEYPOLDT & HOLT, 1 451 BKOOME STREET. I. W. CHRISTEEN. 863 BROADWAY. 1868. hXlHZSt* Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1864, by S. E. URBINO, in the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the District of Massachusetts. THIRD EDITON. Presswork by John Wilson and Son. PREFACE. This Grammar, based on that of Robello and others , claims to be all that is necessary for the study of the elements of the Italian language. Great pains have been taken to present the verbs in a clear, concise manner ; and though, for the sake of easy comparison, they are placed at the end of the book, the student is requested to study a part of them with every lesson. It is hoped that this little work will fill the place for which it is intended. THE AUTHOR. TABLE OF CONTENTS. PAQB Italian Grammar ' 1 CHAPTER I. Pronunciation 1 Etymology 15 CHAPTER H. The Article ...16 CHAPTER m. Union of the Articles and Prepositions 21 CHAPTER TV. The Noun 26 CHAPTER V. ' The Plural of Nouns and Adjectives ....... 32 CHAPTER VL The Cases of Nouns 40 CHAPTER VH. Faonouns 46 CHAPTER VHL Pronouns: Personal and Conjunctive 55 M VI TABLE OF CONTENTS. CHAPTER IX. *"»* The Adjective CHAPTER X. Adjectives : their Comparatives °' CHAPTER XI. The Adjectives : Superlatives 72 CHAPTER XIL Augmentatives and Diminutives 76 CHAPTER XHL The Numeral Adjectives 82 CHAPTER XIV. Relative Pronouns • • 89 CHAPTER XV. Possessive Adjective Pronouns 96 CHAPTER XVI. Demonstrative Adjective Pronouns 103 CHAPTER XYH. Indefinite Adjective Pronouns 109 CHAPTER XVHL Indefinite Adjective Pronouns (continued) 115 CHAPTER XEX. Tiie Prepositions, Di, A, Da 121 TABLE OF CONTENTS. VU CHAPTER XX. P A0B The Prepositions Con, In, Per 129 CHAPTER XXI. The Prepositions (continued) 135 CHAPTER XXH. The Verbs Essere and Avere 141 CHAPTER XXm. The Verbs and their Syntax 146 CHAPTER XXIV. The Verb: The Subjunctive Mood 153 CHAPTER XXV. The I nfiniti ve, Gerund, Present and Past Participles 159 CHAPTER XXVI. The Verbs Anddre, Ddre, F&re, and Stdre 166 CHAPTER XXVn. Adverbs 171 CHAPTER XXVUL Conjunctions and Interjections 179 VERBS. Auxiliary Verbs 186 Regular Verbs 188 Irregular Verbs 214 Defective Verbs 246 Proverbs 259 Idioms 263 Vocabulary 266 Index 275 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. Italian Grammar teaches the principles of the Italian language. These relate, — 1. To its written characters ; 2. To its pronunciation ; 3. To the classification and derivation of its words ; 4. To the construction of its sentences ; 5. To its versification. The first part is called Orthography; the second, Orthoepy ; the third, Etymology ; the fourth, Syntax ; and the fifth, Prosody. CHAPTEE I. PEONUNCIATION. The Italian alphabet consists of twenty-two letters : — A,a; B,b; C,c; D,d; E,e; F, f ; G,g; H,h;I,i; J,j; L, 1; M, m; N, n; 0, o; P, p; Q, q; E, r; S, s; T, t; U, u; V,v; Z,z. The letters k, w, x, and Vj sometimes occur, but only in words derived from foreign sources. SOUNDS OF THE ITALIAN LETTERS. In Italian, every vowel must be distinctly sounded. The five vowels, a, e, i, o, u, are thus pronounced : — l ITALIAN GRAMMAR. SOUNDS OF THE VOWELS. A, as E, as I, as 0, as U, as a . ee . o . ou . in father ; in made ; in eel ; in 'Rome ; in soup. REMARKS. E has two different sounds, — open and close : E open, as in mate, name : Tenia, subject. / Venti, winds. Avena, oats. E close, as in grey, pain : Tenia, fear. Venti, twenty. Mela, apple. O has likewise two sounds, — open and close : open, as in cord : Botta, blow. Rosa, rose. close, as in bone : Bbtte, cask. Ora, hour. To become thoroughly acquainted with the open and close sounds of E and O, three things are especially necessary: 1. Practice; 2. Practice; 3. PRACTICE. SOUNDS OF THE CONSONANTS. The greater portion of the consonants in the Italian language are pronounced as in English. The following are the exceptions : — C, which takes the sound of ch before i or e: otherwise it sounds like k. H, which is used only to harden the sound of c and g before e and i, and to distinguish different parts of speech. It is never sounded. J sounds like ee. Q is never used without «, and is sounded like q in the English word quire. R, which is sounded as if rolled on the point of the tongue. Z, which is sounded like fs and ds. L, M, N, and R are liquids, or semivowels. PKONTOTOIATION. COMPOUND SOUNDS. Ch sounds . . like k in English. Gh „ . . hard as in English. Gn „ . like n in the word onion. Gli „ . like U in the word William:. Sci „ . like she. SCE „ . like sha. SCH „ . like sk. Cc, followed hy the vowels e, i, is pronounced like tch in the English word match. Gg, followed by e, i, sounds like dg in the word lodge. The exact sound of the letters can be obtained only by hearing good pronunciation, and by repeating after the teacher, as almost every language has some sounds which can only be learned by practising with an experienced teacher. But, as an Italian teacher is not always to be found, we shall endeavor to give a few concise and practical rules, by which the student may make himself familiar with the language of Dante, Alneri, Boccaccio, Ariosto, Tasso, Petrarca, MaffSi, Manz6ni, and a host of other writers, whose works will never cease to form part of the belles lettres of every country. Diphthongs, as we understand them in English, do not exist in Italian. Dr. Bachi, in his excellent Grammar, speaks of diphthongs and triphthongs, by which he means such a blending of the vowels that each is but faintly heard. The apostrophe (') indicates that a vowel is omitted ; as, I'dro, instead of lo 6ro, the gold ; dell' dnima, instead of dSlla dnima, of the soul ; &c. The grave accent ( v ) is used on the last vowels of some words ; as, cittd (formerly cittade) : or as a termina- tion which must be pronounced sharply; as, avrd, amd, cessd ITALIAN GEAMMAB. EXERCISE IN PRONUNCIATION. A Casa, musica, danza. A Felicita, dark, sara. E (close) Bene, pedone. E (open) T&na, pena, eVba. J Principj, prov^rbj, compendj. I Inimico, cibo, ripieno. (close) Corso, amore, fonte. O (open) P6vero, tolto, p6polo. U Dtio, tuo, suo. Ce Cento, cece, felice. Ci Pacifico, dieci, cibo. Ch Chiodo, chi, che. Ga, Go, Gu . . . . Gamba, pago, gusto. Ge, Gi Germano, digito, legi6ne. Gn Campdgna, magnetico. Gli (liquid) .... Figlio, figlia, gli, meglio. S (strong) Santo, studio, senso. S (soft) Guisa, casa, cosa. Sca, Sco, Scu . . . Scabro, scolare, scuola. Sce, Sci Scena, scinto, fascia. Zz (z like ts) ... Nozze, fazzoMtto. Zz (z like ds) . . . Azzurro, mezzo. REMARKS. Double consonants must be very distinctly pronounced, thus: immenso, ira-min-so; innocSnte, in-no-cSnte ; &c. Every syllable must contain a vowel, and cannot receive more than one consonant after it in the same syllable, but may be preceded by one, two, or three. The last syllable of all Italian words ends with a vowel. The exceptions are il, the ; con, with ; non, no ; per, by ; and a few abbreviations. READING EXERCISE IN PRONUNCIATION. To impress the following exercise on the memory of the pupil, many English words are omitted. The pupil is required to fill them up : this can be done with the help of the dictionary. PRONUNCIATION. 5 LA FANCIULLA DI BUON INDOLE. THE LITTLE GIKL AMIABLE. La Marchesa Giulia andava in carrettella a far visita alia The went little carriage to make to the sorella che st&va in villa, e aveva con se solamente una sister who was country, and had with her only a cameriera e uno staffiere. Una ruota della carrettella si rdppe, chambermaid and a footman. wheel of the broke, e benche per biiona s6rte non rimanesse ferito nessuno, although by good fortune remained wounded no one, bisogno scendere, e adattarsi di andare a piedi ad un it was necessary to descend (adapt) prepare to go on foot villaggio lontano di li quasi, tre miglia. La Marchesa distant from there almost three miles. mando innanzi il servitore per fare avvisare un carrozziere sent before the servant for to make to give notice carriage-maker che venisse ad accomodate la carrettella ; il cocchiere rimase which should come mend coachman stayed con i cavalli, e la signora prese a braccio la cameriera, e si with the horses lady took arm avvio. set forward. Era sul mezzogi6rno, e il soledava 16ro molta n6ja; It was mid-day sun gave to them much inconvenience ; dimodoche la sign6ra, non awezza a camminare a piedi, presto so that accustomed walk on foot very soon presto si stracco, e per riposarsi ebbe ad uscir. di str4da, ed was tired for to repose had leave street entraredn un pr&to d6ve erano delle querce. La si mise a enter' meadow where there were of the oaks. There she put herself sedere all' 6mbra sotto uno di quegli alberi, e guardo con sit to the shade under one of those trees observed piacere il bel prospetto che le era dinanzi. A un tratto 611a pleasure fine prospect which her was before. all at once she vide pass&r pel prato una ragazzina con un fastello di legna saw to pass through little girl faggot of wood in capo, on head. 1» 6 ITALIAN GKAMMAK. Eagazzina piu beTla di qu&la non era mai passata sott' Girl more beautiful than that was ever before 6cchio alia Marchesa. Le sue carni par&Vano latte e rdse, i su<5i eye her cheeks appeared milk roses her grand' 6cchi celesti erano pieni di dolcezza, e s6tto una pezzu61a great eyes blue were full sweetness under handkerchief di cotone giallo, annodata intorno al capo, venivan fuori le cambric yellow, tied about the head, came out ci6cche de' su6i biondi capelli, e davan grazia vieppiu a quella tufts fair hair gave grace much more that beUla flsonomia. La sign6ra non aveva figli, e se ne had children herself of it addolorava. A veder diinque quella cara fanciullina, non potd grieved. see then dear girl was able a meno d'invidiarelamaclresua; e disse alia cameriera di andare at least to envy said go a chiamdr la bambina e condtirgliela. Questa si avvicino con un call child conduct her to her. advanced contegno mod^sto ma frdnco, pos6 il stio fast^llo, fece un countenance but put down made inchino alia Marchesa, le domando se avea qualc6sa da bow to her asked if she had something to comandarle. Niente, risp6se la dama ; v6glio soltanto parlare command of her. Nothing, answered lady; I wish only to speak un po' con te : mettiti a sedere qui sull' erba, prima di tiitto little thee: put thyself sit here grass before all dimmi c6me tu ti cbiami ? E6sa Luci, al comdndo suo. tell me how thou thyself callest? at vour. H babbo e la mamma gli hai vivi ? II mio babbo e m6rto ch' e papa them hast thou alive? my is dead un p&izo ; la mia mamma ha me sola e si sta qui in un villaggio has alone is here vicino. M' immagino che non siate m61to felici. Oh, perche ? near. I imagine maybe very happy. why? N<5i ci vogliamo bene, e siamo cont&te. Ma mi pare We ourselves wish well are to me it seems che vdi siete m61to povere ! you are very poor! Ndi ci guadagniamo il pane con le n6stre fatiche: We to ourselves gain the bread the our labors: " PKONTJNCIATION. 7 abbiarao delle galline che ci fanno le uova ; e la mia mamma we have some liens -which make eggs 6ggi e andata aljgagse a venderle, ed i quattrini si serbano to-day is gone to the country to sell them the money serves per la pigi6ne di casa. E in che lavorate voi per guadagnarvi rent house. work you gain da mangiare ? Nell' estate noi andiamo a sarchiare, e dopo la to eat? In the summer we go to weed after mietitura andiamo a spigolare. Ma se durate tanta fatica, harvest _ glean. But if endure so much fatigue, .mangiate male e andate mal vestite, c6me potete voi essere . ^jrou eat badly go ill dressed, how can you be 'HMtf&ite? Noi a ttitte qiieste cose non ci pensiama """■ - We (of all these things not ourselves think nemmeno; quando s' ha fame si ringrazia Iddio di avere di at all ; when one has hunger one thanks God to have of che satollarsi, e ogni cosa par buona. Se ndi non abbiamo what satisfy every thing seems good. If we not have vestiti b^lli, siamo pure coperte e decenti; sdno solam^nte i clothes fine we are yet covered are only pigri che vanno s^mpre strappati e siidici ; la mamma pdnsa a lazy who go always ragged jjirty thinks rassettare le n6stre robicciole, ed io gia, comincio ad aiutarla. to repair our clothes ' I already begin to help her. Rosa, vuoi venir m^co a quel villaggio ? Volontidri : tanto la wilt come with me to that Willingly whilst mia mamma fino a staissera non torna; ma bis6gna che until this evening returns it is necessary intanto io porti a casa mia questo fastello. E se lo comprassi meanwhile carry house my if it should buy io ? A116ra poi ! ma costa s£i s61di, veh ! Eccoti sei s61di I? Then but costs six cents, hum! Behold (rispose la Marchesa alzandosi), pdsa l\ il tiio fastello, e vWni rising, put there cqmo con ndi. Ma s' ella 1' ha comprato, biso'gna ch' io glielo porti But if you have it bought, it is necessary that I it carry (e voleVa ripigliarlo), ma la Marchesa glielo impedi, e prese she wished to take it again prevented took la via del villaggio, d6ve arrivata, entro in un albergo (hotel) way where entered d' appar^nza assai dec^nte. appearance enough 8 ITALIAN GKAMMAR. Lo staffiere v^nne a dirle che per accomodate la sua The footman came to tell her mend carr6zza gli bisognavano cinque ore. La Marchesa ordino il needed five hours. ordered pranzo, 1' ostessa la condusse in tina stanza pulita ove essa entro dinner hostess conducted room clean where she entered insieme con le altre due; diede p6i segretamente degli ordini together other two ; - gave then secretly of the orders ahV cameriera che uscJ per eseguirli. In qu^sto frattempo la went out execute. meanwhile Marchesa continuo a parlare con Rosina, e si trovo contenta to speak found sempre piu del cand6re delle sue risp6ste, e sopratutto della ^ua always more candor her answers above all tenerezza per la pr6pria madre. tenderness own La cameriera torno carica de' vestiti che aveVa comprati nel returned laden clothes she had bought villaggio; spoglio, per 6rdine della padr6na, la piccina, e le undressed, by order mistress little one mise indosso una camicia di cotone, un sottanino ricamato, e put upon her shirt cambric petticoat embroidered una vestina di s6ta color verde chiaro, con un ornamento di govm silk green lfght ornament merletti col6r di rosa ; poi le acconcid i capelli, colle trecce lo lace then dressed hair braids formo una specie di cor6na sul capo, e vi pose una ghirlanda di formed sort crown head put garland fiori. Rosa dapprima faceva la ritrosa, e si vergognava a flowers. at first made shy was ashamed vedersi vestire da sign6ra ; ma p6i, siccome £ra di naturale to see to dress then, as she was by m61to compiacente, si sottomise a tutto. Quando fu assettata very complaisant submitted all. When she was fitted out per bene, la Marchesa la condusse davanti alio specchio, e le fully y her conducted before her mirror and to her disse che si guardasse. La piccina si guardd sott' 6cchio said that herself she should look at. little one regarded neilo specchio, sorrise ed arrosi. smiled and blushed. PRONUNCIATION. 9 Che ne dici eh! disse la Marchesa; non ci avresti What to it sayest thou would have gusto di star sempre vestita in questo modo? Si; ma come si taste to be always dressed manner? Yes how pud con questi abiti andar a tagliar 1' erba e sarchiare? Vedi, se can clothes to go cut grass to weed? See if tu fossi la mia figliuola, com' io lo desidererei, tu non faticheresti thou wert daughter as I it should desire fatigue thyself piu in que"sto m6do ; tu imparerdsti a leggere, scrivere, e more s shouldst learn to read write cantare ; e ti rimarrebbe anche tempo per divertirti ; io ti to sing to thee would remain even time to amuse menerei a spasso in carrozza, e ti farel giocare in tante would lead would make to amuse so many maniere. A me, la mia mamma ha detto sempre che Dio sa manners (ways). To me has said always that God knows quel che fa. Dio ha volute che ella fosse Marchesa, ed io what he does. wished you should be una contadina, ma io preghero Dio di darle una figliolina, ed will pray to give you ella e tanto bu6na che il signore la fara. contenta. you are so lord you will make La signora Giulia non si saziava di accarezzare Rosina: satisfied to caress faceva ammirare alia cameriera la gentilezza del sudi modi, le she made admire gentleness grazie della persona ; e questa, per far la corte Alia padrona la she to please the her lodava anche piu di lei, e la Rosina ascoltava queste 16di tutta praise than she heard ' confiisa. Vennero ad avvisare che il pranzo era all' ordine : They came inform dinner was ready la Marchesa passo in una piccola sala con Rosa per mano, e la passed into a little parlor hand he fece mdttere a sedere a tavola accanto a se. La povera caused to put sit table at the side fanciullina si vergognava talm^nte, che quasi piangeva ma bashful so almost to weep vedendosi trattatta con tanta bonta, comincio a rassicurarsi un seeing herself treated kindness began re-assure poco. 10 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. La min^stra le parve si buona, che ne mangio assai; soup to her seemed of it she eat enough eilxlesso che venne d6po, le parve una vivanda squisita ; e si boiled meat came after to her seemed food exquisite sazid affatto; dimodoche, quando vennero in tavola gli altri satiated so that when came the other piatti per quanto la Sign6ra la pregasse, non pote piu mangiare. dishes begged was able to eat. 11 vino pdi non vi fu m6do di farglielo beYe ; . app^na 1' 6bbe wine then there was to make to drink ; . hardly had ella assaggiato si riscosse, e chiese che per carita le dessero she tasted shuddered asked for charity her should give dell' acqua. Allorche 611a vide venire le frutta e i dolci, mando When saw to come fruit sweets uttered un grido di sorpresa. Un altro pranzo ! eh I Ella poteva cry surprise. dinner could chiam&re tutti i ragazzi del villaggio, v' era da sfamarli tiitti call children there was to satisfy Ebbene Rosa, se tu vuoi venire a star con me, tu sarai Well if thou wishest to come to be shalt be trattata tutti i giorni c6me <5ggi, e anche meglio. Per me, treated days as to-day even better. Signora mia, farel tiitto per compiacerla; ma egli 6 I would do to please you impossible ch' io lasci la mia mamma, che non ha altro che should leave has other than me per ajutarla e vegliarla quand' e malata. Io pagherd una to help her to care for her when sick. will pay donna perche la seVva. Si, ma qu^sta donna non le vorra woman for her serve (that she may serve her). would wish bene c6me io gliene v6glio e la servira solam^nte per well as to her wish her would serve only guadagnare. La mia mamma ha pr6so cura di me quand 'io to gain. taken care era piccina; 6ra ch' io s6no grande, non vdglio abbandonarla ; I wish quando ella sara vtScchia, io lavorero per darle da mangiare will be old will work to give her to eat come 611a faceVa per me quando io non mi poteva guadagnare il as did was able to gain the PEONinSTCIATION. 11 pane. La Marchesa era intenerita dai sentimenti di questa bread. affected by the fanciulla, e non 6bbe piu il coraggio d' insistere: le permise di had permitted riprenddre la sua vesticci61a, e tornar dalla mamma, che doveva to take again dress return ' ought cominciare ad essere in pensiero per le'i. Innanzi di lasciarla to begin to be thought for her. Before allowing her partire, 1' abbraccid, ed empi le sue tasche di quei pasticcini to depart, she embraced her filled pockets cakes e di quelle pastine che dssa non aveVa neppure assaggiate. that pastry had not even tasted. La Rosina pareva un uccelletto scapp&to dalle mani di un appeared like a bird escaped hands ragazzo che lo volesse ingabbiare : aveva prfeo i siioi z6ccoli boy who it wished to cage : she had taken wooden shoes in niano, e cosi sc&lza correva tanto lesta, che la cameriera, a hand so barefooted ran so quickly to cui la marchesa aveVa comandato di teneYle dietro, dur6 fatica whom keep found it difficult a non la perder di vista. Essa nonostante arrivo al casolare her to lose from sight. notwithstanding arrived house quasi subito dopo Rosa, la trovd nelle braccie deHa sua soon after her she found in the arms mamma, alia quale clla raccontava che una bella signora la related voleva condurre con se, promettendole vestiti belli e tre wished to take her with her, promising her clothes fine three pranzi ogni giorno. Io nondimeno son venuta via (aggiungeva dinners every day. nevertheless am come added ella), perche sebbene io v6glia bene a quella signora, la * non e although wish well poi la mia mamma, then La cameriera disse a quella contadina che alia sua padrona told eVa piaciuto tanto il buon cudre della Rosina, che voleva pleased wished * jlo for ella, she. 12 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. assicurarle una pensione di dugento franchi, e al suo rit6rno to secure to her two hundred francs return alia citta ne avrel>be segn&to il contratto : le lascio 1* indirizzo, would have to sign she left her direction e le raccomando di venirla a vedere la domenica prdssima, e advised to come to see Sunday next menar con se la Rosina. La d6nna glielo promise, to bring with her it to her promised. La Marchesa Giulia, benche non fdsse avvezza a sentirsi although accustomed to hear herself contradire, siccdme d' dltra parte ella era generosa e di cu6r contradicted, on other hand heart bu6no riconobbe che non avda potestk di disp6rre di R6sa contro recognized power dispose against il suo volere, ne di obbligarla a preferir lei alia propria madre ; will, nor oblige her to prefer her to her own percio si determino a farle in altro mddo tiitto quel bene ch' therefore determined another manner all the good ella poteva. Accolse dunque le contadine con mdlta affabilita, she could. She approached then e d<5po ch' ella el>be parlato con la madre, non si maraviglid piu after had spoken was astonished delle qualita budne della figliudla. Quella donna in fatti era daughter. That lady fact was tutta probita e delicatezza : contenta del suo stato, non invidiava all delicacy state envy niente i ricchi, i quali diceva dssa, son pur sottopdsti, c6me tdtti any one rich who said she are exposed gli altri u6mini, alle malattie ed ai dispiaceri, e dovranno rendere diseases and to misfortunes ought to render un gran c6nto delle 16ro ricchezze, ddve non se ne servano in account riches where serve (use) for bene. good. La Marchesa fece alia Rosina il regalo che le aveva made present for her she had destinato, ed drano tre vaccherelle, le quali ella fece consegnare three young cows which she made to consign alia madre perche le conducesse con se : ed aggiunse, essere should conduct added to be (it was) PRONUNCIATION. 13 suo desiderio che la piccina non andasse piu a lavorare alia her desire should go work campdgna, ma badasse soltanto a v^ndere il latte e le u6va. country should care only to sell milk eggs. Siccome p6i, diss' ella, non deve Rosina st&r mai disoccupata, But lien, said ought to be ever unoccupied, andra alia scudla del vostro villaggio, il restante della giomata shall go school day lo passera da una maestra che le insegnera a far la trina : alle pass teacher her -will teach to make lace spese che occorreranno per la sua istruzione pensero io. Rosa expense shall incur I will think. e la sua madre volevano ringraziare la Signora, ma vinte dalle wished to thank lacrime non poterono articolare par61a. tears were able word. Questo benefizio non poteva e^sere fatto a persone piu degne : was able made any one more worthy 1' educazione sviluppd nella fanciullina tutte le bu6ne qualita developed che tralucevano in lei fin dall' infanzia. Un anno dopo 611a shone her from A year after ' porto in regalo alia Marchesa una trina lavorata con sdmma carried present lace made finezza ed era tanta da guarnire un vestito. La Marchesa seppe enough to trim dress. knew che queila famiglia, resa da lei agiata, risparmidva per rendered saved soccdrrere i bisogndsi, e spiava tutte le occasioni per beneficdre. succor needy spied (watched) Rosa era entrata appena ne' quindici anni, quando la entered scarcely fifteenth year Marchesa cddde in una gravissima malattia: suo marito era fell in very serious sickness husband in viaggio : e non aveva dltro che la sua gente di servizio che absent she had no others than people service who 1* assistesse. Lo seppe Rosina, e sdbito, lasciando una sua vidua her could assist. knew left neighbor a guardia della casa e delle vaccherelle, parti per la cittk guard cows, she set out 2 14 ITALIAN GBAMMAR. insi^me colla mamma. Arrivdte che furono, andarono alia together with Arrived they were, they went. camera della Marche'sa. $ssa era fu&ri di , se, ne riconosceVa chamber She was out of her mind, neither recognized alcuno ; e da quello stato di delirio, cadeva poi in un profondo no one fell letargo che pareVa morta. Tiitta la gdnte di casa dra costern&ta, appeared dead. people confounded la cameridra, sommamente affezionata alia sua padrdna, non greatly attached sapeva far altro che piangere, e non era buona a nulla. La knew to do than to weep she was for nothing. buona Luci fece rizzare accanto al ldtto della signora un made to be placed by the side bed letticciuolo : ed 611a e Rosina vegliavano la signora una n6tte little bed watched per una. I medici s' intendeVano con ldro per la oura dell' ammalata ; depended upon them care sick (lady) e tutto 6ra adempito con la massima puntualita. In capo a nove . fulfilled greatest At the end of nine gi6rni la malattia piglio bu6na pi^ga : la Marchesa ritorno in se e days took turn recovered lonobbe. qudnto doveva alio zelo e all' affetto dellc sue amor6se knew owed loving issistdnti. La pdvera Rosina era scolorita dalle inquiet^zze e pale lalle nottate perdute ; ma i suoi 6cchi abbattuti ripigliarono ' nights lost (sleepless nights) languid took again «a 16ro vivacita appena 611a comincio a sperare nella guarigione as soon as began hope cure tfella sua benefattrice. Ella con le sue premure r£se meno cares rendered wpiaceVole alia sign6ra il tempo della convalescdnza ; ora le disagreeable now WggeVa un bel libro, ora le raccontava qualche fatto interessante read then related fact nccaduto nel suo villaggio : voleva auche pensare a vegli&rla, happened wished also to take care of her ETYMOLOGY. 15 ne permetteva che altri le facesse i brodi e prepardsse le others should make broths : medicine. In questo tempo il marito della Marchesa torno, returned ed essa, ritorndta in perf&ta salute, gli mostrd qudnto doveva a returned health showed she owed Rosin a ed alia madre di lei, e gli disse che oramrii non le dava now gave (had) piu il cuore di separdrsi da loro. Concertdrono dunque di heart They agreed then m&tere la Liici alia direzi6ne della casa, sicuri che non put sure potevano affidarla meglio : la figlia p6i non doveva aver altro were able should have titolo che di compagna ed arnica d&la Marchesa. Voi vi potete can figurdre, figlitioli miei, qudnto volontieri accettdrono £sse tale children they accepted proposizione. ETYMOLOGY. PARTS OF SPEECH. There are nine parts of speech in the Italian language : — 1. The Article; 2. The Noun; 3. The Adjec- tive; 4. The Pronoun ; 5. The Verb ; 6. The Ad- verb ; 7. The Preposition; 8. The Conjunction; 9. The Interjection. The first five are variable ; the four last, invariable. The change which the first four undergo by means of terminations is called declension : it refers to gender, number, and case. There are two genders in Italian, — the masculine and the feminine. There are also two numbers, — the singular and the plural : and five cases, expressing the different relations of words to each other ; namely, the nominative, genitive, dative, accusative, and ablative. 16* ITALIAN GRAMMAR. The nominative case, or the subject, answers to the question who ? or what? as, Who is reading? Tfie boy. The genitive or possessive case answers to the question whose? or of which? as, Whose book? The boy's book. The dative answers to the question to whom ? as, To whom shall I give it ? To the boy. The accusative or objective case marks the objeqt of an action, and answers to the question whom ? or what ? as, Whom or what do you see? I see the boy, the The ablative answers to the question from or by whom? as, From whom did you receive it? From my father? CHAPTER II. THE ARTICLE— L' ARTICOLO. MNEMONIC EXERCISE. La dommicasento la m'essa . On Sunday I attend (the) mass.* Il hmeSSCspendo il danaro . On Monday I spend the money. Il martedi viene la serva . The servant comes on Tuesday. Il mercoledl stiro la tela . . On Wednesday I iron the linen. Il giovedi pdffb~iL cameriere . On Thursday I pay the domestic. Il verierdi riscuoto l' entrdte . On Friday I receive the rent. Il sabato aspetio il sdrto . . I expect the tailor on (the) Sat- urday.f The article is used much more frequently in Italian than in English. There are two articles, — Definite and Indefinite. | The Definite has several variations for the sake of euphony. * In the translation of the Italian examples, words which cannot be expressed are inserted within marks of parenthesis. t The pupil is requested to commit to memory the Italian words occurring in Rules or Examples, as their meaning will be seldom repeated. The conjugation of the verbs will be found at the end of the book. t The indefinite article, im, uno, una, a or an, will be treated of in a subsequent chapter. (See chapter on Numeral Adjectives.) ' THE ARTICLE. 17 DEFINITE ARTICLE. Singular, il, lo,* masculine ; la, feminine. Plukal, i, gli (&'),f masculine ; le, feminine. REMARKS. I. The article il, plural i, is most generally used; as »— , ., , .'. H temperino, i temperini ; il sigiUo, i sigilli. The penknife, the penknives ; the seal, the seals.J II. The article lo, plural gli, is placed, — 1st, Before nouns beginning with s followed by another consonant; as, — Lo specchio, gli specchi ; lo spirito, gli spiriti. The mirror, the mirrors ; the spirit, the spirits. 2d, Before nouns commencing with a vowel, eliding the o, and replacing it by an apostrophe ; as, — s U oechio, gli occhi ; V Umico, gli amid. The eye, the eyes ; the friend, the friends. HI. The word dSi,- gods, takes the article gli. We say, II Dio di Abrdmo, gli dei del paganesimo; the God of Abraham, the gods of the heathen. IV. Lo, or il, is written before masculine nouns com- mencing with z; as, Lo zio, or il zio, the uncle ; and after the preposition per : Per lo cudre, or per il cudre, for the heart. But, in speaking, il is generally used, except in the phrases per lojpn^L, at most ; per lo m£no, at least. V. La before a feminine noun takes le in the plural ; . *>» — La penna, le penne ; la stanza, le stanze. The pen, the pens ; the room, the rooms. * The Italians have taken the articles il and lo from the first and last syllable of the ablative Latin iUo. In their use, euphony alone -is consulted : lo libro^ lo pctdre, il libra, Up&dre. t We find li, plural of z7, in classical works, especially in poetry ; hut modern writers use i in preference. t The article is given with every noun, so that the pupil may learn the gender of the noun. 2» 18 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. The a of la is elided before a vowel, and replaced by an apostrophe. It, however, takes le in the plural ; as, — L' isola, le isole ; V dnima, le dnime. The island, the islands ; the soul, . the souls. "VI. The article il loses the i when it is preceded by the words che, tra, fra, e; as, Tra'l si e'l no, between yes and no. Such elision is used only in poetry. VII. The article gli loses the i before a noun commenc- ing with i; as, GV infirmi, the infirm. VIII. The article le loses the e before a noun begin- ning with e; as, V elemdsine, the alms ; I' 4rbe, the herbs. The above rules are purely euphonic. IX. As there are only two genders in Italian, English neuter nouns take the gender of the noun into which they are translated ; and the article naturally takes the gender of the noun to which it belongs. X. They say in Italian, Vddo in chiSsa, in strdda, etc., I go to church, into the street, etc. ; and do not use the article, because the church or street is not designated. But, in Vddo nSlla chiisa di San Cdrlo, vddo nilla strdda d6ve stdle di casa, — I go into St. Charles' Church, I am going into the street where you dwell, — the article is used because the church and street are defined. XI. So, likewise, they say, Vddo in cdsa, in cdmera, a ISlto, in cucina ; because it is understood that the person speaks of his own house, room, bed, kitchen; which nouns are defined by the circumstances. XII. It is necessary to use the article in such sentences as the following, where the signification of the noun is limited : — Vddo — I am going — n'ella cdsa di mm mddre . . . into my mother's house. nella cdmera di mio pddre . . into my father's chamber. nel letto di suo fratello ... in his brother's bed. nella cucina del vicino ... in the neighbor's kitchen. THE ARTICLE. 19 XIII. There are cases in which the article may be used or not ; as, — Auddcia, fortuna, e virtv, gli Boldness, fortune, and merit dettero tr'ono e potenza ; or, gave him the sceptre and U auddcia, la fortuna, e la the power. virtu, gli dettero il trbno e la •potenza. In the first case, the nouns are considered independently, without any subsequent idea : in the second case, the article limits the signification of the noun by something relative to each noun understood ; thus : — L' auddcia che spiegd in bgni The boldness which he mani- impresa, la fortuna che lo fested in all his enterprises, secondo, la virtib che lo dis- the fortune which favored time, gli dettero il trbno della him, the merit which dis- nazibne e la potenza sovrdna.* tinguished him, gave him the throne of the nation and the sovereign power. XIV. The nouns Mr., Mrs., Miss, take the article, thus : il Signdre, il Signdr dottdre, la Signdra, la Sig- ndra principessa, la Signorina. These words do not take an article when they are addressed to the person to whom we are speaking. The word Signdre loses the final e before a masculine noun. XV. Proper nouns do not take the article ; f as, * WheD several nouns come together before or after the verb; and the article is used or omitted before the first of them, this article must be repeated or omitted before every other noun in the sentence. t Names of kingdoms, provinces, mountains, and rivers, take the article or not, according to the extent of their signification ; as, V Italia e b&Ua, Italy is beautiful ; Ha varcato il Po, he has crossed the Po; Stava in Italia, he was in Italy; Ho visto V Etna, I have seen Etna. Names of islands, cities, lakes, and seas, are generally used without the article ; as, Malta, Garda. The names of abstract substances, and those of gems, metals, etc., when used in a ge- neric sense, require the article before them ; as , L' 6to e le p&rle, e i fidr vermigli e bianchi, the gold and the pearls, and the red and white flowers. A noun preceded by an adjective takes the article before the adjective J as, II gran male, the great evil ; II gran peccato, the great sin. All words used as nouns require the article before them ; as, II beUo x il buono, the beautiful, the good : Son certa del sri, I am certain of the affirmative ; Ciascimo rispdss del no, every one answered in the negative ; II silo parlare mi piace, his conversation pleases me. When a noun is used in an indeterminate sense, the article is omitted ; as, Non udm, udmo gi&fid, now I am not a man, formerly I was a man. 20 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. Mkheldngelo, RaffaSllo. But it is generally placed before family names, particularly of illustrious or renowned per- sons, both male and female ; as, II Buonardtti, il Sdnzio, la Mardtti (the poetess) . XVI. Possessive adjective pronouns often take the article ; as, II mio, il tCuo, il stio, la ndstra, la vdslra, etc., my, thy, his, our, your,, etc. XVII. Verbs in the infinitive mood, and adverbs, take the article when they are used substantively ; as, — II baMare mi secca ; Non so ne il quando ne il come. It tires me to dance ; I know neither when nor how. READING LESSON. L' amore e la morte fanno eguali i re ed i past6ri. Love and death make "etJfiaT kings and shepherds. La gloria e il solo bene che possa tent^re gli uomini. Glory is only good which is able (can) to tempt men. II tempo, che fortifica 1' amicizia, indebolisce 1' am6re. Time fortifies friendship, weakens Le caMnnie sono c6me le ferite che lasciano sempre la margine. Calumnies are liKT wounds leave always scar. La paura goveYna il mondo. Fear governs world. La prudenza e la gdida e la padr<5na della vita umana. Prudence guide mistress life 2 human. 1 EXEECISE UPON THE ARTICLES. (The) fortune loves (the) youth. fortuna(f.) ama gioventii (f.). The scholar cultivates (the) memory. scolare(m.) coltfva memoria (f.). The servant (f.) puts out the light. serva smorza liiinc (m.). The evening I study the lesson. st''ra(f.) studio leziono . Plural : Agi, ardnci, bdci, cenci, etc. XV. The termination io, in the syllable quio, change* into j ; as, — quio, Deliquio, respect ; fainting-fit ; ossequj, deliquj, respects, fainting-fits. XVI. If, however, the accent falls on the i of the sylla- ble io, then io is changed into ii for the plural, and the sound is- a little longer than j ; as, — Pio, zio, natio, Pii, zu, natii >, r'to, ) '» rti, ) pious, uncle, native, brook. XVH. Proper nouns ending in io likewise take ii in the plural;* as, — Dario, Tiberio, Claudio, ) -r-. . m-t • rn j- IDdrii ITiberii I Glaudii f Darlus > Tiberius, Claudius. * In Italian, as in other languages, some nouns are used only in the singular number ; aa proper names ; and the words prole , offspring ; mane, morning ; rdba,, luggage ; rosolia, 36 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. XVIII. The terminations cia and gia drop the i of the plural in the words in which this letter is but slightly pro- nounced; as, — La coscia, the thigh ;*"" le cosce, the thighs. La spiaggia, the shore ;— le spiagge, the shores. La cdccia, the chase ; le cdcce, the chases. XIX. But in the words prq^icia^ciriegia, franchigia, province, cherries, immunities, and some others, the i is retained in the plural, because, being distinctly pronounced in the singular, it is necessary that it should be heard in the plural ; as, Provincie, ciriegie, franchigie, etc. XX. We must also preserve the i of cia and of gia when it is accented, and the accent must be strongly marked by -the voice; as, — La bugia, the lie ;» le bugie, the lies. La f armada, the pharmacy ; le farmacie, the pharmacies. IRREGULAR PLURALS. XXI. The few nouns which have irregular plurals are : Uomo, man; ubmini, men. JBue, ox; buoi, oxen. Moglie, wife; mogli, wives. MiUe, thousand; mUa, thousands. Dio, God; dei, gods. XXII. The possessive adjective pronouns mio, tHo, siio, ™y, thy, his, make miii, tudi, su6i, in the plural ; and the adjectives tdle or cotdle, such, and qudle, which, are in the plural tdli or tdi, cotdli or cotdi, qudli or qudi. XXm. The following nouns form their plural in a, and become feminine : — measles. And some are used only in the plural; as, Icahdni, the trowsers; le rent the kidneys ; i ddlci, the sweetmeats ; It fdrbici, the Bcissors ; i irirm, the -victuals : le tcnebre darkness. Some nouns have a different signification in the plural ; as, II ceppo the trunk of a tree ; t cippi, the fetters : il ferro, the iron ; i ferri, the fetters : la geiite, the people • le gtotii, the nations : la gr&ria, the fayor ; le griizie, the thanks. ' PLURAL OP NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. 37 Un migliaia, a thousand. Le migliaia. Un centinaio, a hundred. Le centinaia Un uovo, an egg. Le uova. Un miglio, a mile. Le miglia. Un pdio, a pair. Le paia. Una staio, a bushel. Le staia. Un mdggio, a bushel. Le moggia. XXIV. The following masculine nouns have a mascu- line plural in i, and a feminine plural in a. The last is more frequently used. L' anello, the ring. II braccio, the arm. II budetto, the intestine. II calcagno, the heel. II castello, the castle. II ciglio, the eyebrow. H eolteUo, the knife. II cor no, the horn. H dito, the finger, i II filo, the thread. U membr o, the member. U ttiwro, the wall. L' osso, the bone. II porno, the apple. U quadrello, the dart. ***■«• tHtd.0) , ^ o Remark. — Cdrna, in the plural, signifies horns; c6r- ni, instruments : gesta, exploits ; gesti, gestures : gt$rnj,ta, elbows ; gdmiti, cubits : mirnbra, members of the body ; membri, members of an assembly : mtira, ramparts ; mtiri, walls. ' II fondamento, the base. II Jriitto, II fuso, II gesto, II gmocchio, II gomito, H gndo, U labbra, II legno, II lenzuolo, II r'iso, H sacco, Lo strido, II vestigio, U vestimento, the fruit, the spindle, the gesture, the knee, the elbow, the cry. the lip. the wood, the sheet, the laugh, the sack, the cry. the vestige, the garment. J READING LESSON. Presso i Romani, i soldati erano agricolt6ri, e le cas4te Among houses 2 ilMstri conservavano sempre i cogn6mi dei frdtti e del legAmi illustrious 1 preserved always surnames ' pulse che venivano, a preferenza, coltivati dai loro antenati; tali came (were) ancestors « 38 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. furono i Lentuli, i Fabii, i Pisoni. I regali placano noil solo gli presents appease only uomini ma pur anco gli d.6i. I pittoii antichi non usavano n£lle even painters 2 ancient 1 used l<5ro pitture che quattro colori. Le donne sono fatte per essere pictures four colors. women made to be le compagne e non le schiave degli u6mini. Un parroco disse companions slaves curate said alia prddica, la Domdnica delle palme : Io vi avverto, fratelli, chs sermon Palm: I you 2 inform 1 per isfuggire la calca, confesserd Lunedi i bugidrdi, Martedi to avoid confusion, I shall confess liars gli avari, Mercoledi i mormorat6ri, Giovedi i ladri, Venerdl avaricious slanderers thieves i discoli, e Sabato gli ubbriachi. Non si sa s'^gli ebbe mdlti libertines drunkards. We do not know had penit^nti. I fanciulli ed i p&zzi si figurano che venti frahchi e fools imagine francs venti anni abbiano a durar sempre. Ho vedtito le dssa di tre years have last always. giovani elefanti. EXERCISE ON THE FORMATION OP THE PLTJEAL OP NOUNS. [The singular only is given.'] The face comprehends the forehead, the eyebrows, the eyelids v<51to comprende palpgbre the nose, the lips, the mouth, the cheeks, the chin, and the ears. mento (The) children ought to obey their parents, scholars their fanciullo d^bbono ubbidfre genitcre teachers, and citizens (to) the laws. When we read certain maestro cittadino legge. Quando si leggono certi historians, we may say that the human species is composed stcrico, si dinibbe umana specie (consists of) consfcte of only two or three hundreds of individuals decorated with soltanto di due o tre individuo decorato the title of emperors, kings, popes, generals, and ministers. Men tftolo imperatore ministro. PLUBAL OF NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. 39 are generally idle in countries where the soil is very rertile. Bono per lo piu in^rte pa&e d(5ve sudlo mdlto fertile. (The) stars, (the) animals, and even plants were (enumerated) astro animate anche furono annoverate among the Egyptian divinities. The walls of Thebes were fra le egiziane T£be raised by the simple sound of the harp ; the walls of the city fabbricate semplice suono c^tra of Jericho fell down, on the contrary, at the sound of (the) Jenco caddero, in vice trumpet. The large sacks are filled with grain. My sisters cdrno. empjuto grano. have some silver spoons. alciino argento Noi sidmo, we are. Voi siete, you are. Eglino sono, they are. CONVERSATION. CM e questa donna 1 } Ayete veduto il re ? E egli Francese ? S6no i poSti feVici (happy) ? Che hdnno i ciechi? Dove nascono ifunghi? Qudnti anelli avete ? Mangidte frutti ? Qudnti (how many) gibrni fa una settimdna? Come si chidmano ? (How are they called ?) Ed i mesi qudnti sbno ? Come si chidmano ? E le stagioni (seasons) ? _Z5 la mddre del poeta celebre. Abbidmo veduto il re. No, e Tedesco (German). Generalmente non sonofelwi. I ciechi hdnno buone orecchie Ifunghi nascono nei b'oschi. Ne ho due. Si, qudndo sono tnaturi. Sette. Dominica, Lunedl, Martedi, Mercoledi, Giovedl, Venerdi, Sdbalo. Dodici. Genndjo, Febbrdjo, Mdrzo, AprUe, Mdggio, Giugno, Luglio, Agosto, Settembre, Ottobre, Novembre, Dec'em- bre. Sono qudttro : Primavera, Es- tate o (or) State, Autunno, Inverno o Verno. 40 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. CHAPTEE 71. THE CASES OE NOUS'S. MNEMONIC EXERCISE UPON THE USE OP DI, A, DA. Vi pia.ce la citta di Parigi 1 Does the city of Paris please you ? H fjM^ delle case e ca.ro, The rent of the houses is dear. V% dico che non ho dqnari, I tell you that I have no money. Spoleto non e lonta.no da Roma, Spoleto is not far from Rome. Vbglio scrivere delle lettere, I wish to write some letters. Jo non voglio brighe, I do not wish cares. Voi non avete fratelli, You have no brothers. L' uomo vive delle sue faticke, Man lives by (of) his labors. 10 non temo pwnto dijv'oi, I do not fear you at all. Ecco un dizionario da t<]£ca, Here is a pocket dictionary. L'Ariosto e ilpittore della na- Ariosto is the painter of nature. tura, 11 occhio del padrone ingrassa The eye of the master fattens il cavodlo, the horse. Mi e sorellu dal lato del padre, She is a sister on my father's e non dal canto della ma- side, but not on the side of dre, my mother. JEgli ha posto della polvere da He has put (some) gunpowder schioppo in una scdtola da in a tobacco-box. taS&cco, The several relations of the Italian nouns are expressed by the prepositions di, of; a, to ; da, from, or by. The nominative and objective are distinguished by the place they occupy in the sentence. 1. The nominative denotes the relation of a subject to a finite verb ; as, Maria dma, Mary loves. 2. The genitive denotes origin, possession, and other re- lations, which in English are expressed by the preposition of, or by the possessive case ; as, Ilibri di mio fratello, my brother's books. THE OASES OP NOUNS. 41 3. The dative denotes that to or for which any thing is, or is done ; as, Jfigli mi ddva il libro, he gave me the book. 4. The accusative is either the object of an active verb or of certain prepositions, or the subject of an infinitive. 5. The vocative is the form applied to the name of any object addressed. 6. The ablative denotes privation and other relations, expressed in English by the prepositions with, from, in, or by. Proper nouns are varied with the prepositions only; common nouns, with the preposition and article. Variation of the proper noun Boston : — Nominative Boston, Boston. Relation of Possession . Di Boston, of Boston. „ „ Attribution . A Boston, to Boston. „ „ Derivation . Da Boston, from (or by) Boston. Accusative Boston, Boston. Variation of a common noun in the plural : — Nominative Ilibri, the books. Relation of Possession . Dei libri, of the books. „ „ Attribution . Ai libri, to the books. „ „ Derivation . Dai libri, from (or by) the books. Accusative . . . . . Ilibri, the books. I. Di, the sign of the genitive, is used, — 1st, When it denotes possession ; as, La cdsa di mio pddre, my father's house ; di chi £ quisto cappSllo ? whose. hat is this? £ del serviiiSre", it is the servant's. 2d, When the noun or verb that follows di expresses a quality, limitation, or modification of the noun that pre- cedes it; as, Oucchidio'd' argSnto, a silver spoon; £ tSmpo di pranzdre, it is dinner-time. II. The preposition di, with or without the definite article, translates the words some and any when they do not -express a determinate quantity of a certain thing; as, — 4* 42 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. Ddtemi del pane, Give me some bread. Non bevete di quel vino, Do not drink any of that wine. III. If some and any have the signification of a few, various, certain, a little, &c, they are rendered in Italian by. qualche before a singular noun ; by un poco ^ di, or un po' di, before a collective noun; and by cSrti, divSrsi, alcHni, and vdrii, or their feminine form, before plural nouns, according to their gender; as, — Ho pranzdto con qualche amico, I have dined with some friend or con alciini amid, or friends. Prendete un p<5co di vino, Take some wine. IV- When there is only a simple designation of the object, without any idea of quantity, — that is to say, when the word some or any is omitted in English, — generally no article is used in Italian. Bevete vino o birra ? Do you drink wine or beer ? Chi ha dandri ha amici, He who has money has friends. V- The preposition di is often used after words requir- ing a different preposition, and after verbs requiring a direct object. In such cases, the word that governs di is understood, and the phrase is elliptical, as may be seen in the following sentences : — Temere del pdpoh, for temere To fear the anger of the peo- lo SDEGNo del popolo, pie. Saper di musica, di algebra, etc., To know a little music, alge- Ibr sapere un p6co di, etc. bra, etc. VI. Sometimes, especially in familiar conversation, the preposition di takes the place of the article il or lo before an infinitive, which, being the subject of a sentence, does not come at the beginning of it ; as, — E facile di studidre, di parldre, It is easy to study, to speak, for e facile lo studidre, il parldre, When the preposition di is thus substituted for the arti- cle, the phrase is elliptical, and stands for il fdcile l'azione di studidre. THE OASES OP NOUNS. 43 VII. It is very common in Italian to use di instead of da whenever euphony requires it, particularly if the defi- nite article can be omitted after the preposition. This, however, is never done unless fu6ri, via, or some such word requiring di, is easily understood. Thus they say : — Venire di or della cdsa; that To come out of the house, is, fudri or via di cdsa for ddlla cdsa, ViLL. The preposition di is also frequently translated after verbs by for, meaning on account of; by in, when it does not signify within ; by with, not expressing the idea of company or union ; and occasionally by on. EUa veste di nero } She dresses in black. Non tnTbiasimate di questo, Do notblame me for this. Furono provveduti di tiutto, or They were provided with every d' ogni cdsa, thing. 17 bambino fa nutrito di latte, The child was fed on milk. IX. A, or ad, the sign of the dative, expresses direc- tion or aspiration towards some object, and corresponds to the preposition to. Andidmo a NdpeM, Let us go to Naples. Scrivete ad un amico, Write to a friend. X. The preposition A is also translated in, for, from, and of after a^ verbj when it represents an action done against, towards, or to the damage of a person ; the direct object of such a verb being easily, understood ; * as,— - JSim pdsso credere a quel che I cannot believe in what you dite, say. Pensdte a lui e provvedete ai suoi Think of him, and provide for bisogni, his wants. XI. Da, the sign of the ablative, expresses derivation, separation, or dependence, and corresponds principally to the preposition from, which in most cases is translated ; as, — * Remark. — The expressions, little by little, two by two, etc., are rendered in Ital- ian, poco JLpoeo, due A due y etc. 44 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. Da un giorno aW dltro, From one day to another. Non dipendo da nessuno, I do not depend on any one. XII. Da is used before a noun which indicates use, employment, or the destination of a thing; as, — Cavallo da sella, saddle-horse. Carta da Uttere, letter-paper. XIII. The English prepositions at and with, meaning "at the_hpuse of j" and by, either expressing the relation between a passive verb and its subject, or conveying the idea of solitude and exclusion, — are translated by da. , Sta da mio padre, He lives at my father's. Lo fara da se, He will do it by himself. XIV. Like and as, when they signify " in the manner of," "as it becomes," and followed by a noun used in an indefinite sense, are generally rendered by da; as, — Portdtevi da uomo, Bear yourself like a man. Fdtela da padrone, Act as a master. Lik&, followed by the pronouns himself, herself, our- selves, etc. , is thus translated in Italian : Like himself, DA quel che i, or da quell' udnto ch' Sgli i, etc. BEADING LESSON. M61te commedidle, compdste dall' Aridsto che le recitava in Many little comedies, composed them recited compagnia de' sudi fratelli e delle sde sorelle, fiirono il prehidio brothers his sisters, were prelude d&le immortali sue <5pere. Finalmente 1' elegante orazitfne, che • his works. . pronunci6 intorno alle rdgole che si deggi&no seguire, ed he pronounced concerning rules one ought to follow intdrno alio sc6po che ogniin proporre si d£bbte nei prdpri studi, &- scope every one proposes ought % own fece conoscere alia cittk, di Ferr&ra, siia patrfa, ch' essa allevava made to know country reared THE CASES OF NOTXNS. 45 un genio, il quale avrdbbela illustrata ; ed il padre suo godeVa genius who would have (her) enjoyed in segreto della consolazi(5ne d' udire da' sudi concittadini hearing fellow-citizens prop6rre il pr6prio figliiiolo aiJ6ro, cdme un modello o^.imi£&rsi. to propose own son as model imitate. EXERCISE. 1. In Italy there are immense plains, majestic rivers, very high mountains, lakes, cascades, forests, volcanoes, and beauty in all varieties. 2. A lady, speaking of a preacher whom she had heard from a great distance, said, " He spoke to me with* his hand, and 1 listened with* my eyes." 3. It is difficult to satisfy every one's desire in (the) great enterprises. 4. May God send us good princes, and may the devil not give then the fancy of -wishing to be heroes ! 5. (The) hypocrites cover themselves with the mask of (the) devotion. 6. Never leave flowers in a sleeping-chamber. 7. The greater part of (the) men live like crazy people, and die like fools. 8. One of the miseries of the rich is to be always deceived. VOCABULARY. 1. There are, vi sono ; immense plains, pianwra sterminata; majestic rivers, fiume maestoso. 2. A lady, una Signora; speaking, pdrlando ; a preacher whom she had heard, un predicatore ch' klla av'ea inteso ; far off, rnolio- distante ; said, disse ; he has spoken to me, egli mi ha parlato (with the hands) ; I have listened to him, io V ho as- coUato (with the eyes). 3. Great enterprises, grand? impresa; it is difficult, e cbsa difficile ; Jo satisfy, secondare ; desire, desiderio ; all, tutti. 4. May God send us, Dio ci mandi; good prince, huono principe ; devil, diavolo ; not give them, non dia I'oro. 5. Cover themselves, si coprono. . 6. Never leave, -non lascidte mai. 7. Live, vivono ; die, mubiono. 8. Always deceived, sempre inganndte. 46 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. Dove ? where ? Che? what? Chi? who? Sovente, often. CONVERSATION. Dove era la Signbra ? Con che si cbprono gl' ipbcriti ? Qudnti sensi avete ? Come si chidmano ? Abbidmo del vino ? E tempo di pranzdre ? Che cane e questo ? Che recitdva Aribsto in com- Mblto distjmte del predicatore. Colla mdschera della divozione. Cinque. UdUo,msta, odordto, gusto, tatto. Avete una bbtte di vino. Jo ho vranzdtocon alcwni amici. jK un canejlajigccia. Mblte commedible, che furono il preludio delle immortdli sue bpere. pagnia de' suoi fratelli e delle sue sorelle? Dove sbno maraviglie in bgni In Italia. g'enere ? Che sbno esse (they) ? Fiumi maestbsi, cascdte, selve, volcdni, etc. Che disse una Signbra <£ un Egli mi ha parldto coUa mono. predicatore ? Qudli persbne sbno sovente in- Le persbne ricche. Qudli ubmini vivono come La maggior parte degli ubmini. pdzzi ? CHAPTEE VH. PRONOUNS. PERSONAL PRONOUNS IN THE NOMINATIVE. MNEMONIC EXERCISE. Chi bdtte * Son 10, Who knocks ? It is I. Se non volete cantdr v6i, can- If you do not wish to sing, I tero 10, will sing. Non dubitdte : penseremo n<5i ad Do not fe.ar : we will think of ogni cosa, every thing. PRONOUNS. 47 Cosi diceva ancor 10, V<5i f arete quel die vorro IO, Io voglio fare come fate v6i, Non ci va egli, enon ci andrete nemmeno voi, Avete voi roba? Avete quat- trini? Che beUa com il poter dire, Comdndo IO ! Gli f arete conoscere chi sdno io e chi siete voi, Siete voi il padrone, di questo albergo ? Poiche volete che dica io, diro IO ' Vol avete miglior vista che non ho io, / also said so. You will do what 7" wish. /wish to do as you do. He will not go ; and you -will not go either. Have you property ? Have you money ? HowHbeautiful it is to say, / command ! Let him know who I am, and who you are. Are you the master of this ho- tel? .„-'-, As you "wish that I say it, I will say it. You have better sight than Z PRONOUNS IN THE OBJECTIVE (CLASS I.). Me, te, se,* Mi, lei, noi, voi, loro. Me, thee, one, him, her, us, yon, them. MNEMONIC EXERCISE. Che cosa volete da me? EUa e fuorijQj^ ddtta rdbbia, Or q ra sono a voi, Jf'dtemi la fi nezz a di pranzdr MECO, lb dmo il mio amico qudnto me «TESSO, Si, fate voi, io mi rimetto in voi, mi confido in voi, lEgli non sa far nulla da se, Lascidte fare a me, non dubi- tdte, Degndte far colazione con n<5i, What do you wish of me t She is beside herself with anger. I am with you injynoment. Do me the pleasure to dine with me. I love my friend as much as myself. Yes, do what you will, I agree with you, I confide in you. He does not know how to do any thing by himself. Let me do it: never fear (d 1 not doubt). Have the kindness to breakfast with us. * Rekark. — Se is Indefinite, < — one's Self, themselves, etc. 48 ITALIAN GEAMMAE. Jagli non domanda vol, Non dico a voi, Signor mio, Verro con vor se volete, Io non voglio partire da vol, Qudnto avete speso per lei, He does not ask for you. I do not speak to you, dear sir. I will go with you, if you wish. I do not wish to leave you. How much have you spent for her. PEONOTJNS* EST THE OBJECTIVE (CLASS II.). Mi, ti, si, ci, vi, gli, le, loro. MNEMONIC EXERCISE. Voi VI siete dimenticato di me, Non Ml dimenticherd di VOI, Gli e nato un figlio, Che male vi ho fdtto io ? Davvero, io non vi cqpisco, Ml pia.ce la mia liberta,^ Fate imr quel che vi pare, La fortuna CI vudl bene, Vi raccomdndo di far questo, Che cosa vi ha egli ditto di me ? Potete dir l<5ro che entrino, Io vi lascio, perche ho fretta, Ho scritto una. letter a che mi comanda il Signor prgme, Che mi Tisio ? Dio dice: Aiutchi che ti aiu- terd, Domdni gli dard da prdnzo, Mi ricdrdo do che mi avete detto, Amico, Ci rivedremo stasera, Ti accerto che non le dirb nulla, Tou have forgotten me. I will not forget you. A son is born to him. What ill have I done you ? Truly, I do not understand' you. I love my liberty. Do as seems good to you. Fortune wishes us well. I recommend you to do this. What has he said to you of met You can tell them to come in. I leave you, for I am in a hurry. I have written a letter which is important to me. What does Mr. Tisio wish of me? God says, Help thyself, and I will help thee. I will give him dinner to-mor- row. I remember what you have said to me. Friend, we shall see each other this evening. I assure you that I shall say nothing to him. * The conjunctive pronouns axe employed only in the dative and accusative case. t Mi pidce, it pleases me. PRONOUNS. 49 PERSONAL PRONOUNS IN THE NOMINATIVE. I. lb, I ; Io ddrmo, I sleep. Tu, thou ; Tu prdnzi, thou dinest. Egli, ei, e'^ esso, he ; Egli bdlla, he dances. Ella, essa, she ; Ella ride, she laughs. N6i, we ; Noi cantidmo, we sing. Vdi, you ; Voi pensdte, you think. Eglino, essi, they, m. ; Eglino scrivono, they write. Elleno, esse, they, f. ; Elleno pdrlano, they speak. Remark. — Mgli, ella, iglino, illeno, are used for per- sons only; 6sso, essa, essi, esse, for persons and things. II. In Italian, the pronoun is not used before an imper- sonal verb ; as, Pi6ve, it rains ; nevica, it snows ; tudna,, it thunders. m. When the pronoun in the nominative is before a verb, the termination of which expresses clearly the per- son, it is generally suppressed, and is only used when more emphasis is required, or to avoid ambiguity ; as, Ctfnto, I sing ; cantd, he sang ; canterete, you will sing ; ch' io cdnti, that I may sing ; the tu cdnti, that thou mayest sing ; ch' egli cdnti, that he may sing ; io lo dico, I say it. IV. When two or three pronouns, subjects in a phrase, are in apposition, they are expressed, and sometimes are placed after the verb ; but the stress of the voice must be carefully laid upon the prosodic accent of the pronoun, because euphony must always be considered ; as, — Dite quel che pensdte voi ; diro Say what you think ; then i" ^?6i quel che penso io, will say what /think. Se non volete bailor voi, ballerd If you do not wish to dance, 2" io, shall dance. V. The exclusive meaning expressed in English by self, as " I shall go myself," may be translated thus : A.n- drd io, with a marked accent; or, andrd io stisso, or io medSsimo. Thus we say, — 6 50 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. Andrdi tu stesso or .medesimo, Thou wilt go thyself. Andra egli medesimo, He will go himself. Andrd ella medesima, She will go herself. Andrdnno eglino medesimi, They will go themselves. Kemaek. — Observe that the pronoun is suppressed before the verb . * In such phrases as " History itself proves it, his father has seen it himself," the Italians suppress the pronoun before stisso or medesimo, self, and say, La stdria medesima ne fa fede, stio padre stesso V ha ved&to. VI. In interrogative phrases, the pronoun may be placed after the verb, or the interrogation marked by the inflection of the voice. PERSONAL PRONOUNS IN THE OBJECTIVE. Class I. VII. These pronouns may be used in the direct or indi- rect regimen, — that is, they may be governed by the verb, or by a preposition ; as, — Me, me; Pensdte a (to) me, Think of me. Te (thyself), thee; Pensa per te t Think for thyself. Se (himself), him; E continto di se t He is contented with him (self). Liii, esso, him ; Anddte con lui, Go with him. Lei, cssa t her; Non pensdte pi-A a (to) Zei, Think no more of her. N6i, us; Jtgli pdrla di twSi, He speaks of us. Y6i, you; Oid dipende da •udi, That depends on you. L6r0j 6s$i) them, m. ;. Ho bisdgno di l6ro, I have need of them. L6ro t issej them, f, ; Vdnno con Uro or issc, They go with them. VIII. When the adjective stSsso or medesimo, self, follows these pronouns, it must agree with them in gender and number ; as, Per lei stessa, per Mi stesso, per Idro stessi, for herself, for himself, for themselves. * 1. Himself, herself, after to be, to appear, etc., are translated by desso, dissa; as, Egli & d^so, it jgjhe himself; mi par v dessa, it seems that it is she herself. TZriolso, thou also, etc., are expressed by dncA' io ; or, ancdrio, ancdr tu, etc. ; or, io pure, titpurt, etc. V"-~* PRONOUNS. 51 IX. The student will be able to analyze the construc- tion of the following phrases without difficulty : — Io vi aspetto, I await you. Io aspetto voi, It is you that I await. Voi mi aspettdte, You await me. Voi aspettdte me ? Is it me that you await ? Egli non inganndva me, It is not me that he deceived. X. The pronouns me and thee, after an imperative, are mi and ti, which are joined to the verb ; as, Ditemi, tell me ; allontandti, go away. <"» *\ • > XI. The pronouns him, her, them, as regimen, are translated t into Italian by** sis, when they represent the same person as the subject, whilst persons different from the subject are expressed by lui, IH; as, jfcgli non pdrla se non di Mi, he speaks only of him, — if the word lid does not signify egli; but, if it means the same person, then say, 4 gli n6n pdrla che di se. — JEgli rende Gdnto a se stisso, ella rSnde c6nto a se stessa or medesima, he is accountable to himself, she is accountable to herself. XH. To express with me, with thee, with him, one can gay, con me, con te, con se; or, mSco, teco, sSco. For with us, with you, some poets say, %6sco, vdsco. Class IT. XHI. These pronouns are employed either as the direct or indirect regimen of a verb ; but they can never be accompanied by a preposition. They serve to conjugate the pronominal verbs. Mi, me ; Jo mi ricordo, I remember. Ti, thee ; Tu ti penti, Thou repentest. *Si', him ; j&gli si arrdbbia, He is enraged. Oi or we,* us ; N6i ci divertidmo, We amuse ourselves. Vi, you ; Voi vi st upij e, You astonish yourself. Si, them ; JEglino si spogliano, They undress themselves. Gli, him; Io gli scrivero, I write to him. Le, tx her ; Voi le parlerete, You will speak to her. Low, to them ; Noi aprir'emo loko, "We will open to them. * S, nominative, is not translated, or it is rendered by (gli ; as, £gli i un p&zzo, it is Ions line* 52 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. XTV. To him is gli, and to her is le; thus, 8e gli scrivo, Sgli mi risponderd, if I write to him, he will answer me; Slla pidnge qudndo tino le pdrla, she weeps when one speaks to her. XV. The pronoun Idro is ordinarily placed after the verb ; as, Vdi manderete Idro quisto libro, you will send this book to them. XVI. The i in the pronouns mi, ti,^si, etc., may or may not be dropped before a vowel ; as, Egli mi ondra, or m' ondra, he honors me. Oi never loses the i except before e or i. These rules are, however, euphonic. We repeat, that we and you are ndi and v6i when sub- jects of the verb, or when preceded by a preposition ; as, Ndi rididmo, vdi ridSte, we laugh, you laugh ; parldte per ndi, e ndi parleremo per vdi, speak for us, and we will speak for you. And, finally, they are expressed by ci and vi when they are in the objective, without a preposition expressed; as, Egli ci gudrda, io vi scrivero, it-regards ais, I will write to you. XVII. Obs. — We see that the pronouns in the objec- tive, me, thee, him, etc., are divided into two classes, — me, te, se, Idi, lei, etc., for the first class ; and mi, ti, si, ci, vi, for the second. This arrangement is not, however, strictly followed in Italian, as the first class is often used in preference to the second, because the pronunciation is more striking. This is particularly the case in phrases where there is an apposition of pronouns ; as, for example, Io dmo vdi piu che vdi amdte me, I love you more than you love me ; io do a vdi quista spilla perchd vdi avite ddto a me un anello, I give you this pin because you have given me a ring. BEADING LESSON. L' u6mo scioperato e 1' uomo piu affaccendato. ISgli ha idle most occupied. cinquanta amici che si crede in obbligo di eoltivare. fifty friends whose (friendship) believes obliged pronouns. 53 Vi dirk il n6me di tutti i ricamat6ri, di tiitti gli spezidli della will give (tell) embroiderers apothecaries citta. Egli vi provvedera il sarto, il calzokiio, la lavand&ia ; se will procure 7!^-:'.-,.J. siete ammalato, condurra da v6i un medico; siete addolorato, sick, will conduct *""** afflicted egli non vi lascia, finlantoche non vi dbbia veduto ridere. leaves, ' until have seen to laugh. S' incarichera di tutte le vostre compre, e finira coll' andare a will take charge purchases will finish going letto stracco di aver lavorato tanto. L' allegrezza ci consola e bed tired worked so much. , joy ci tidne in sanita ; le cure vane ci opprimono, distdrbano 1' animo keeps health cares oppress nostra e ci traggono tosto nella t6mba. , drag quickly EXERCISE FOE TRANSLATION. 1. When Paulus Emilius repudiated Papiria, his wife, some persons were astonished that he should separate himself from so modest and so handsome a woman ; but Emilius, showing them his shoe, said, " You see that it is well made, but none of you know where it hurts me." 2. It was reported to Frederick the Great, that some one had spoken ill of him. He< asked if this person had a hundred thousand "men. He was answered, "No." — "Ah! well," added the king, " I can do nothing with him : if he had a hundred thousand men, I would declare war against him." 3. A young man who passed for rich, but who was laden with debts, sat very pensive, the evening before his betrothal, in his fu- ture mother-in-law's parlor. Several times she said to him, " Ghe cosa avete ? " " What have you ? " (meaning, " What is the matter with you ? ") To which he continually answered, " Mm ho niente," " I have nothing, " (meaning, " Nothing is the matter with me.") Eight days after his marriage, his mother-in-law, seeing a crowd of creditors, said to him, " Sir, you have deceived me." — " Mad- am," added he, " I well informed you that I had nothing ; and I repeated the same thing to you more than ten times in your parlor before my betrothal." 6* 54 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. VOCABULARY. 1. Repudiated, ripudib ; wife, mbglie ; some persons, alcuni; astonished, maraviglidvano ; should (be) separated, si fosse separa- te ; so pretty a woman, una donna cost vezzdsa ; modest, modesta; showing, mostrando ; his, la sua ; said, disse ; you see, vedete ; well made, ben fdtta ; however, perb ; no one, nessuno ; knows where, sa dove; hurts, offenda. 2. It was reported, fu riferito ; Frederick the Great, Federico il Grande; had spoken ill, sparldto ; if this person, se costui ; a hundred thousand, cento mila ; answered, rispdsto ; no, di no ; well, bene ; added, soggiunse ; I cannot, non pdsso ; nothing, nulla ; had, avesse ; would declare war, muoverei guerra. 3. A young man, un giovinotto ; passed for rich, tenuto per ricco; laden, cdrico ; debt, debito ; was pensive, stdva tutto pensieroso ; evening before, vigilia ; of his betrothal, dei subi sponsdli ; par- lor, saldtto; of his future mother-in-law, delta suafutura suocera; many times, parecchie volte ; sir, signbre ; always, sempre ; eight days after, otto gidrni ddpo ; seeing arrive, vedendo capitdre ; a crowd, una turba; deceived, inganndta; I well informed you, vi feci pur avvertita; repeated, ripetuta; more than, piu di; ten, died; in your, nel vbstro ; before, prima. CONVERSAZIONE. Chi batte ? Son io. Che cdsa volete da me ? Vbglio far colazibne con vdi. Che cbsa mi avete detto ? Non me ne ricdrdo. Pagdte v'oi il prdnzo ? Si, lo pdgo io. Mi aspettate ? JVbra vi aspetto. Di chi parla egli ? j&gli pdrla di ndi. Come si chidma questa ragdzza ? Ella si chidma Carolina. A chi scrivero io ? Al padre di Maria. Ti penti tu? Io mi pento. Ci divertidmo noi ? Jfoi non ci divertidmo. Chi vi dira il ndme di tiitti gli L' ubmo scioperdto vi dira il spezidli della cittd ? ndme di tutti. Siete vbi il padrone di questa Sdno il padrone di questo al- cdsa ? bergo. Avete il bastone di mio fratel- Io non ho il siio bastbne, vdi lo ? I' avete. Volete ddrmi un anello ? Non vbglio ddrvi un anello, vi daro (will give) un libra. PRONOUNS, PERSONAL AND CONJUNCTIVE. 55 CHAPTEE Vm. PRONOUNS, PERSONAL AND CONJUNCTIVE. [ Continuation of Preceding Lesson.'] To avoid several monosyllables, and for the sake of euphony, the Italians unite several words together. This union constitutes one of the chief beauties of the language. For example : the imperative ddtemelo is composed of date me lo, give it to me ; and, because the accent falls on the first syllable, the word has all the strength of the imperative, the desire of prompt obedience. MNEMONIC EXERCISE. Le reverisco divotamente, I have the honor to sahite you. Jmche posso servirLA ? How can I serve you ? Com&jjzjLApass&te? How do you do? ( << lo me la passo~behone, I am very well. Vi do la buona nbtte, I wish you good night. Non vi voglio incomoddre, I do not wish to trouble you. TornatevEHE indietro, Turn back. Glielo posso dir 10, I can tell it to him myself. AndateGLimo a dir_voi, Go tell it to him yourself. Levaum dinanzi, temerario, Go out of my sight, insolent one. Non mi comparite piu dinanzi, Never appear before me again. Che ve ne pare ? How does it seem to you ? RagioniamoLA. gut fra di noi, Let us reason here together. Facciamo'Lk. da buoni amid, Let us act like good friends. Vdi non me la darete ad in- You will not make me believe it. tendere, I. A pronoun stands for a person or thing : — Lo or il, him, it; lo LO vedo, I see it. La, her, it ; Tu la conosci, Thou knowest it. Li or gli, m. , them; Noi li vediamo, We see them. Le, f., her; ; lo le asp'etto, I expect them. Ne, of it; Voi ne riderete, You will laugh at it. Gi or vi, ■rfit;u lo ci or vi penso , I think of it. 56 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. i II. It with the negative is expressed by nol or non lo; as, JSfol nego, I do not deny it. In affirmative phrases, we can employ il when we wish to soften the pronunciation, and lo to express a graver tone ; for such are the proper- ties of the sound of the i and the o; as, II salutdi, or lo salutdi, I saluted him. III. The pronouns lo, il, la, are placed before those verbs which commence with a consonant. Lo and la drop the vowel before a verb beginning with a vowel : le and li are placed both before consonants and vowels. IV. There are a great number of Italian phrases in which the pronoun la refers to some noun understood; as, — : i lo ve la dico schietta, I tell you the truth frankly. j V&ive •LKgod$e?~~ You lead a joyous life. \ lo me la babto, I run away. V. The pronoun gli signifies to him; and le, to her: but, when they are joined with lo, la, li, le, ne,* gli is used for both masculine and feminine genders, and the letter e is interposed, as in the following examples : — Gli&la, it to her ; Voi gliila darete, You will give it to her or him. Glitli, them to him ; lo glicli manderd, I will send them to him or her. Glidle, them to her ; Gltile venderd, He will sell them to her. ; Gliene, it of him j Voi gliene comprerete, You will buy it of him. > yf Besides gliine for the feminine, the ancients also said lene. * The pronouns il, lo, li, la, ie, are the same words as the articles, and derived from the eame source ; as in the phrase, To v6do il re ed il salitto, or lo salitto, I see the king, and salute him. The last form is the best. Egli £ facile, it is easy. Its objective is generally lo, — lo lo so, I know it. The third person singular of the feminine {611a or vosignor'ia) is used instead of the Second person plural {voi), in polite address ; as, Come sta ft/a 7 , how are you? In poetry, in familiar conversation, tu (thou) is used. Speaking to equals, they say voi, you. When the third person singular feminine, 6Ua, and its inflexions le, la, or the title Vosignoria ( V. S,), are employed, the verb is used in the singular, and the words agreeing with them take the feminine gender, whether the person addressed be masculine or femi- nine. When more than one individual is addressed in the third person feminine, eHeno, and its inflexion loro, or the title Vostre Signoiie, are used, and the words agreeing with them are put in the feminine plural. Me lo, it to me ; Tela, it to thee ; Seli, them to him ; Ce ne, us of it ; Ve ne, them to you ; PRONOUNS, PERSONAL AJNL> CONJUNCTIVE. 57 VI. Euphony requires that the i of the pronouns mi, ti, si, vi, ci, should change the i into e when they are followed by the pronouns lo, la, li, ne; as, — Tumelodai, Thou givestitto me. Jo te la do, I give it to thee. Egli se li ford dare, He will cause them to he given to himself. Noi ce ne occupidmo, We occupy ourselves with it. To ve le presto, I lend them to you. VII. ■Mel x Jel 3 _.s£l l j;el x vel, are written before a word which commences with a consonant, instead of me lo, te lo, etc. ; as, JSgli s&L-fy^ra, or se lo figfora, he figures it fo himself; io vel diceva, or ve lo diceva, I said it to you. VIII . Some ancient authors have often placed the pro- nouns lo, la, li, le, before mi, ti, si, ci, vi, when euphony permitted. Thus, instead of saying, Dio te lo perddni, may God pardon you ; they have said, Dio il ti perddni. IX. All the pronouns mi, ti, si, ci, vi, lo, la, gli, le, ne, me lo, te lo, se lo, etc., whether simple or compound, are generally placed before the verb, except when used with an infinitive, a gerund, the second person singular, and the first and second plural of the imperative ; in which cases they are placed after the verb to which they are joined; so as to make one word ; thus, — Parldrui, To speak to me. ParfdrMEME, To speak to me of it. ScriveTELE, Write to her. RicordiamoCI, Let us remember. \ ComprateauELO, Buy it o Lo dieo, to express a grave sentiment. 11 dico, to give a mild form to the phrase. Dicolo, to impress with the rapidity of the thought. Dicol, to join rapidity with sweetness. The learner should, however, be careful not to' place the pronoun after any other than the imperative, infinitive, and gerund. XIV. The first consonant of the pronoun should be doubled whenever it is joined to a verb of one syllable, or one which has the grave accent upon the final vowel; as, Dlllo, ddmmi, fdllo, tell it, give me, do it. XV. The position of the pronoun can be changed for the sake of euphony ; as, — lo lo voglio vedere, or io voglio I wish to see him. vederlo, Io gliene posso parlwre, or io I can speak to him of it. posso parlargli&ne, PKONOUNS, PERSONAL AND CONJUNCTIVE. 59 XVI. In certain cases, the personal pronoun is changed into the possessive ; as, Mio malgrddo, in spite of me : and, on the contrary, the possessive is sometimes changed into the personal; as, Cavdtegi il vesttto, take off your coat. READING LESSON. Tra le varie nazioni del mondo la pulitezza ha introd6tto politeness introduced infiniti lisi di salutare. Plauto parla di pdpoli che si salutavano modes salutation. Plato speaks tirandosi forte 1' orecchia. I Franchi si strappavano. un pulling strong (hard) ear. pulled out capello, e lo presentavano alia persona che volevano salutare. hair presented they wished Al Giappone un conoscente vi saluta toglienddsi dal piede lina Japan acquaintance taking *•- foot pantofola ; e nelle Indie, egli viene a prendervi per la barba ; slipper comes to take beard ; altri si salutano voltandosi la schiena. Gl' isoldni del grande others turning dUcTST islanders oceano fregano il l(5ro ndso con quello della persdna salutata, \ rub nose that « oppure gli sdffiano nell' orecchio. Gli abitanti di Horn si or blow * inhabitants c 6ricano col ventre a terra, e la maggior parte dei negri si lie down belly greater negroes prendono a vicenda le dita e le fanno sdmcchiolare. L' IngMse take turn make crack. Englishman in un eccesso d' amiuizia vi afferra per la mano e ve la scudte fit friendship seizes shakes vigorosamente c• two hundred. Dugento, ) Trecento, three hundred. Quattrocento, four hundred. MiHe,f thousand. I Duemila, or ) . , , , n ,-. ' y two thousand. JJumila, ) Tremila, three thousand. MiUecento, or Mille e cento, ',} eleven hundred. Diecimila, ten thousand. Centomila, hundred thousand million. % * When a noun follows the numbers twenty-one, thirty-one, forty-one, etc., it remains In the singular ; as, VenV imo Kbro, twenty-one books- But, when the noun precedes the number, it is put in the plural; as, Libri trenf imo. t The numerals ednio and mi lie. are never accompanied by the indefinite article as in English, — a hundred, or a thousand. Chi to is invariable. t When the numerals are used to indicate the hour of the day, they are preceded by the feminine article /a, le : but then the word ora, hour, dre, hours, is either expressed or understood; as, Le due(6re) 9 tvia o'clock ; le qUattro (6re) t four o'clock. ITALIANISMS. Verso le sci, at about six o'clock. Sudna un? dra, it has struck one. £ V una, or t im 6ra f it is one o'clock. Ad «n' ora, or altdcco, at one o'clock. D idtie g^sdJL v>n o ■, every other day. Q&tMZgifrnifa, or j fortni ht ^ S6no quindici giorni, ) s ^ Bom.fj.ni a quindicij to-morrow fortnight* 84 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. II, — ORDINAL NUMBERS. Primo firs*- Secondo second. Terzo third. Quarto fourth. Qumto fifth. Sesto sixth. Settimo seventh. Ottdvo eighth. Nono ninth. Decimo tenth. Undjicimo, or decimo primo . . eleventh. Duodecimo, or decimo secondo . twelfth. Tredecimo, or decimo terzo . . thirteenth. Decimo quarto fourteenth. Decimo qumto fifteenth. Decimo sesto sixteenth. Dicimo settimo seventeenth. Decimo ottdvo eighteenth. Decimo nono nineteenth. Ventesimo, or viqesim o . . . twentieth. Ventesimo primo, etc twenty-first. Trentesimo thirtieth. Quarantesimo fortieth. Ctinquantesimo fiftieth. Sessantesimo sixtieth. Settantesimo seventieth. Ottantesimo eightieth. Nbvantesimo ninetieth. Centesimo one hundredth. Millesimo one thousandth. These adjectives agree with their nouns. (See Chap- ter IX.) HI. Fractional and collective numbers are — Mezzo, half. t?na meta, a half (moiety). Un terzo, a third. Un quarto, a fourth. Una decinn.a, a ten (half-score). Una dozzina, Una quindicina, una ventina, Un centindio, Un migliaio, a dozen. a fifteenth, a score. a hundred, a thousand. THE NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 85 IV. Uno, numeral adjective, like the indefinite article un, agrees with its noun ; but the final o is suppressed, unless the noun begins with s followed by another conso- nant; as, Tin gdllo, one or a cock; un autdre, one or an author ; uno spillo, a pin. The feminine is una; as, Una ddnna, a woman. We write un' before a feminine noun beginning with a vowel ; as, Tin' dnitra, a duck. V. There are a great many phrases in Italian in which the noun after uno is suppressed; as, $} uno che dice mdle di tutti, he is a man (one) who speaks ill of everybody. VI. On the contrary, Uno is often suppressed before nouns which express an indefinite sense ; as, J5 u6mo di budna fdma, he is a man of good repute. VII. JRszJmo signifies perjiead ; as, II prdnzo ci £ costdto cinque frdnchi per uno, the dinner cost us five francs per head. YHI. The expression in un , often employed by the poets, is an abridgment, signifying in un sdlo momSnto, in un medesimo tempo, in a single moment, in an even time ; and the expression ad una v6ce, signifies u'nani- mously. IX. To translate " one by one," " two by two," " three by three," etc., the preposition is repeated; and we say, ad tino ad uno, a dtie a due, a tre a tre. "Both," " all three," etc., are translated tutti e due, tutti e tre. X. "Firstly" and "secondly" are expressed hypremiera- mSnte, secondariaminte : afterwards we say, in terzo ludgo, in qudrto lu6go, for "in the third place," "in the fourth place," etc. XI. In multiplication, via expresses times; as, Twice or two times two are four, due via due fan qudttro; or, by abbreviation, due via d-Oe qudttro. t' 86 . ITALIAN GBAMMAR. XIL In dating letters, the article may be used either in the singular or plural ; as, The 21st May, li_ 21 Mdg- gio, or ai 21 diMdggio, or il 21° Mdggio, etc. "XTTT. In speaking of years,* in Italian we use in the; as, Wei 1500, nel 1862. XIV. For the knowledge of epochs, it is important to know that the Italians sometimes call the thirteenth cen- tury il 200, because it goes from 1200 to 1299 ; and, for the same reason, they say il 300, il 400, il 500, etc., for the fourteenth, fifteenth, sixteenth centuries : hence the words un trecentista, cinquecentista, un seicentista, etc. , for " an author of the fourteenth, sixteenth, seven- teenth centuries." Generally, however, they say, as in English, il dicimo tSrzo sScolo, il decimo ndno secolo, the thirteenth century, the nineteenth century. XV. "Both" is translated by dmbo or ambedue; as, Ambo i piSdi, dmbe le gdmbe, ambedtie le famiglie, Both feet, both legs, both families. XVI. In speaking of sovereigns, the ordinal number is used, as in English ; as, Enrico qudrto, Henry the Fourth ; Gregdrio decimo sSsto, Gregory the Sixteenth. READING LESSON. Ludovico Aridsto nacque addi 6tto di Settembre, dell' anno mille quattrocento settanta qudHro. Dante nacque in Firenze nel Marzo dell' anno mille ducento sessanta cinque da Alighiero e da Bella. II suo primiero n6me di Durante fu cangiato per vdzzo in quello di Dante. Nell' anno mille trecento ventuno, nel me"se di Settembre, mori il grande e valente poeta Dante Alighieri nella citta di Ravdnna. Petrarca nacque addi venti di Mglio ndlT anno mille trecento quattro nella citta d'^fezzo. Mori d' apoplessia nella n6tte del dici(5tto di Luglio dell' anno mille trecento settanta tre. * I am twenty, thirty, fifty years old, cannot be rendered literally : but is expressed thus : I haTe twenty, thirty, fifty years, lo ho vdnf inni, trdnt' imni, cinqttant' dnm. THE NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 87 Torquatq Tasso nacque in Sorrento agli undid Marzo dell' anno mille cinquecento quaranta quattro. Spiro ai venticinque d'Aprile mille cinquecento novdnta cinque. Gjovanni Boccaccio ndcque nelT anno 1313 ; e mori addi 21 di Dicembre, 1374. Machiavello venne alia liice in Firenze ai 3 di Maggio dell' anno 1467, e mori ai 22 di Giugno 1527. Leonardo Salviati il piu illustre grammdtico di Firenze vide il giorno nel 1540. Leonardo da Vinci ndcque nel 1452. Michelagnolo Buonarroti £bbe vita nel 1475 ; e mori in eta di quasi 89 anni. Benveniito Cellini venne al mdndo il di d' ognissdnti 1500. Nacque il Galileo nel 1564, nello st^sso giorno e quasi alia stessa ora, in cui mori Micheldngelo. Francesco Sodve, autore d611e " Nov^lle Morali," vide la Idee nel 1743 e mori in eta di 63. EXERCISE FOK TRANSLATION. 1. It is more difficult to make five francs with six sous than to gain a million with ten thousand francs. 2. An inhabitant of Padua invented paper in the twelfth cen- tury, and a Florentine invented spectacles at the commence- ment of the fourteenth. 3. Man has commonly but twenty-two years to live : during these twenty-two years, he is subject to twenty-two sicknesses, of which many are incurable. In this horrible state, man still struts: he loves (makes love), he wars (makes war), he forms projects, as if he would live a thousand centuries in his delights. 4. A regimen to be followed by every man who wishes to live a hundred years : first repast, — a glass of pure water at nine o'clock in the morning ; second repast, — soup, roast meat stewed fruit, a glass of old wine, at two o'clock in the afternoon third repast, — a walk, without fatigue, at four o'clock; fourtl repast, — a glass of sugared water at nine o'clock at night, a going to bed. 5. A very brave soldier had lost both his arms in battle. Hi , colonel offered him a crown. " You think, without doubt," aai«J the grenadier, with .vivacity, " that I have lost only a pair of gloves " 88 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. VOCABULARY. 1. Sou, soldo ; franc, franco. 2. Padua, Pddova; Florentine, Fiorentmo ; at the com- mencement, nel pri,ncipio. 3. During these, nel decdrso di questi ; is subject, va soggetto; ought, dovesse. 4. To follow by every one who would wish, da tenersi da chiunque vorrd ; stewed fruits, conserva ; afternoon, dbpo mezzo- gibrno ; walk, passaggidta ; fatigue, stanedre ; sugared, zucche- rato ; going to bed, nelV anddre a letto. 5. Lost, perduto ; offered him, ojferse ; you think, eredete. C ON VERS AZI&NE. Qudnti dnni avete ? E vbstro fratello ? Avete danaro nella vdsira tdsca f In che cldsse e Luigi ? In che anno ndcque Galileo ? Qudnti dnni visse Addmo ? Che ora e ? A che ora pranzidmo dggi ? Qudnti ne abbidmo del mese ? Qudnti occEi hdi ? Qudnte dita (fingers) abbidmo a ciascuna mdno? E le ditadei piedi (feet) qudnte sbnoi E le^dita delle mdni e dei piedi qudnte sbno ? Qudnti abitanti ha la citta di Lbndra ? Che eta ha il Signbr S ? Qudnti sensi avete ? Qudndo mon Napoledne ? Jk che pdsso servirvi ? Adesso (now) ho trentbtto dnni. Dicibtto dnni. Si, ho cento cinqudnta scudi. E nella, secbnda cldsse. Ml 1564. Egli visse nove cento trenta. E un quarto ddpo mezzodl. Pranzeremo dlle due. Ne abbidmo venticinque. Due. ' We abbidmo cinque. Died. Sbno venti. Lbndra ha tre millibni 6! abi- tdnti. E nel suo sessantesimo secbndo anno. Cinque : udito, vista, odordto, gusto, tdtto. Nel mdggio del miUe ottocento ventuno. Nel prestdrmi cinquemila frdn- chi. RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 89 CHAPTEK XTV. RELATIVE PRONOUNS. MNEMONIC EXERCISE. Chi e che bdtte ? or chi bdtte ? Chi e ? Chi chidma ? Che cosa e success^ ? Ohe nuove abbidmo ? Sapete vbi chi sono ? Che rdzza di pensdre ? Non so che dire, davvero, Che male vi liofdtto io? Che giorno e oggi ? Di chi e la colpa ? Che eta avete ? Che cosa siete venvio g^fdre ? Che vale\avere ricchezze ^senza Che bella cosa e il gircye il mondo ! Che cosa mi darete da man- gidre f Who knocks ? Who is it? Who calls? What has happened ? What news have we ? Do you Know wlwl am ? What manner of thinking ? Truly, I know not what to say. What harm have I done you ? What day is it to-day ? Whose fault is it ? How old are you ? What are you come to do ? What are, riches worth without health? What a pleasure to travel over the world ! What will you give me to eat ? Qudl e la minestra che piu vi What sgup do you like best ? piace ! One cosa sento ? che cosa vedo ? Che cosa fate di betto, amico ? Chef Come? Che dite? In quad concetto mai mi tenete ? Sapete qudl sia V anlfinp suo ? Qudnti pazzi vi sono nel mondo ! E un uomo cm nivmo piace, What do I hear? what do I see? What good thing are you do- ing, friend ? . What? How? What dH. you « say? What opinion have you, then, of me? Do you know wnat is his in- tention ? How many fools there are in the world ! He is a man whom no one likes. 8» 90 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. RELATIVE PRONOUNS. I. These pronouns are chi, che, qudle, ciii, who, which, what.* II. "Who," chi, when it has no antecedent expressed; as, — Who loves, fears, Chi dma, time. Of whom do you speak ? Di chi parldte ? See who knocks, Guardate chi picchia. ILL "He who," "some one who," "no one who," "those who," or "the one," "the other," may be trans- lated by chi, whenever they do not relate to an antecedent; as, — Distrust those who natter you, Diffidatevi di chi vi adula. Those' who live on hope will Chi vive di speranza morrd di die of hunger, fame. In the world, some are_ rich, Nel mondo, chi \_ricco, chi e others poor, pbvero. The word chi,f used only for persons,' and representing an individual in the singular, requires the verb of which it is the subject to agre'e with it in the singular. IV. "Who," relating to an antecedent expressed, is trans- lated by che when it is the subject, and by cki when it is the object ; % as, — The woman to whom I speak, La donna a citiparlo. The master for whom I labor, II padrone § per cui lavdro. Man is the only animal who L' uomo e il solo animale che weeps and who laughs, piange e che ride. * Chi, who, is used always in the singular;' che, c&i, which, singular and plural; quale, who. which, singular; i/wafr, plural. t Clii refers to persons only : che, ciii, quale^ refer both to persons and things. $ Che is chiefly used in the nominative ; eia, in all other relations ; chi, quale, are used in all then' relations. Che, when it relates to a person, must be translated in English by who or whom ; when it relates to an animal, by which. In English, the relative pronouns, though understood, are often left out after the noun. In Italian, they must always be expressed ; as, Chi si umilia, si esdlta, who humbles himself, etc. ; quei gi&vani che voi ve- ddte, those young men whom you see ; il cane che veciete, the dog which you see ; la lettera che avete scr'itta, the letter you have written ; il ragazzo ch> io ho vcduto, the boy I have seen. § The master who teaches is maestro ; the master who commands is padrdne. RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 91 V. The preposition a, to, can be understood before cut; and we may say, La d6nna ctii pdrlo. VI. "I who write," "thou who writest," etc., are translated, Io che scrivo, tu che scrivi, etc. In similar phrases, the verb agrees with the personal pronoun, as in English. VII. "Which," as the regimen of a verb, is translated by che or by cui; as, — • The bread which you eat, H pane che mangi&te. The wall which the house con- II mitro cui nasconde la cdsa. ceals, In the last phrase, cui (nascSnde) is better than che, because che serves either for subject or object. Petrarch says, Quilla ddnna gentil cui pidnge amdre. VEIL Che, or qudle (qudli, qudi, in the plural) , is used in exclamatory phrases ; as, — What a misfortune ! Che disgrazia ! What sin ! Che peccato ! What beauties ! Qudi (or che) bellezze ! IX. Qudle is used in doubtful phrases, or when fol- lowed by a verb ; as, Which of these two books do you wish? qudi volSte di quSsti dtie Itbri? X. Che is generally used in interrogative phrases; as, — What book is this ? Che Ubro e ? What man is that ? Che uomo e 1 What house is that ? Che cdsa e ? What business have you ? Che affari avete ? XI. " Which " in the genitive, signifying " of which," "for which," is rendered in Italian by di cdi, or del qudle, etc. ; as, It is a favor for which I thank you, $ un fav6re di ciii, or del qudle io vi ringrdzio. 02 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. XLT. "When the noun following which designates some- thing belonging to that which precedes it, then cfii (whose) is used with the article ; as, The hero whose exploits have astonished the world, V er6e le ctii gSsta hdnno fdtto rnaraviglidre il mdndo. "* XLTI. The word "which" in the ablative case, signify-* ing "by which," "from which," indicating the origin, the derivation, the point of departure of an action or thing, is rendered in Italian by da ctii, or dal qudle, etc. ; as, — There is no evil from which Non ra, e qudl su V 6nde," some (flowers) war* on the earth, others upon the waves. These words all require the verb in the singular. INDEFINITE ADJECTIVE PBONOTJNS. 11? VII. The word " nothing," employed negatively, may sometimes be translated by che; the verb being preceded by non, and sometimes by cdsa. The idle have nothing to do, Ipigri non hdnno che fare. He who is innocent has nothing Chi e innocente non ha che to fear, temere. Will. Nulla and niinte are sometimes used with an article; as, Sempronio rose from nothing, 8empr6nio £ s6rto dal nUlla. The following phrases are thus trans- lated : — He is a man of nothing, E un udmo di niente. A man good for nothing, Un udmo da niente. He has quarrelled with us for a S'e corritccidto con ndi per una trifle, inezia, or per una bagatteUa. This man is nothing to me, Non ho alcuna affinita, or re- lazidne con lui. IX. Si is generally considered as an indefinite pro- noun, and is used both for the masculine and feminine gender, singular and plural : it is equivalent to the Eng- lish words " one," " we," " people," " they ; " as, — Gome si e detto, As we have said. Si parldva di guerra, People talked of war. Si loderd molto il suo cordggio, They will praise his courage very much. Si vide che siete un galantuomo, One sees that you are a gentle- man. But, in these and similar phrases, si holds the place of a passive proposition, and may be equally well rendered in English by " it is," " it was," " it will be ; " as, — Si credeva cosl generalmente, It was generally so believed. Si dice che la pace e gia fer- It is said that the peace i mdta, already concluded. X. Non, when ueed in a sentence expressing an in, definite meaning, is always placed at the commencement as, Non si pud fdr nUlla, one can do nothing. 118 ITALIAN GRAMMAK, XI. "To us," "to you," is rendered by ci, vi, and is placed before the indefinite pronoun si; but "of it," "of him," "of her," "of them," is translated by we, and is placed aftei 1 si, which is changed into se; as, — They do not speak to you, Non vi si pdrla. They do not speak of it, Non se ne pdrla. XII. The indefinite pronoun cannot be translated by si when it is followed by the reflective pronoun si, as si si would not be euphonious. It is then necessary to adopt another form, according to the sense of the phrase. Thus, to translate "Man believes himself happy when he lives in opulence, but he deceives himself," we can say, tfno or idle or dltri or V u6mo si crSde felice qudndo vive nSlV opulSnza, ma s' ingdnna ; or gli u6mini, or ale&ni si crSdono felici qudndo Sssi vivono nelV opulSnza; or ndi ci credidmo felici qudndo vividmo nelV opulenza, ma c' ingannidmo. BEADING LESSON. O v6i, chidnque siate, poveri o ricchi, pdpoli o principi, you may be ricordatevi ehe la falce deTla m6rte miete neTT umile capanna remember harvests come nei superbi pal&gi. Un gentiludmo era travagliato dalla podagra. Tutti gli tormented . consigliavano di lasciar 1' uso delle edmi salate, ma egli rispon- advised leave off salted deva che nei dol6ri della sua malattia era assai contento di potersela pigliare con qualche c6sa, e che arrabbiandosi qudndo to be able to blame getting angry col presciutto e qudndo col saldme si sentiva bello e confortato. felt Nei pa^si disp6tici si s6ffre mdlto e si grida p6co ; n& pa&i suffers complains liberi, si sdffre poco e si grida raolto. INDEFINITE ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. H9 I grandi s6no cdme quel mulini er^tti sulle montagne, i quali erected non danno farina se non quando si da 16ro del vento. give gives Alcuni si divertivano in casa di una sign6ra a trovare delle differ^nze ingegnose da un oggetto ad un altro. " Qua! differ- enza," disse la Signora, "si potrdbbe f&re fra me ed un oriu61o." — could make " Signora," egli le risp6se, " un oriuolo indica le 6re, e appre'sso near di v6i, si dimenticano.'' EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION. 1. There is not a man who can say, I have need of no one. 2. There is nothing more dangerous than to have for enemies those whom we have laden with benefits. 3. Every man may presume with reason, that no one can ever succeed to a perfect knowledge of all the secrets and all the riches of nature. 4. The same deed, the same word, awakens remembrances agreeable to some, and sad to others. Whosoever looked at Ca- ligula's forehead, excited in him sudden anger, because this action reminded him of his baldness, which he wished to conceal from everybody ; but he who looked at the forehead of Scipio Afri- canus, gave him great pleasure, because he had a warlike wound there, — a witness of his valor and his glory. 5. Some one, in speaking of a tyrant who enjoyed the reputa- tion of liberality, said, " Judge how much liberality dominates in this man ; who gives n'ot only his own spoils, but even those of others." 6. Envy is certainly the basest and the most cruel of all the passions, since there is hardly any person who may not have in himself something to excite the passion of the envious. 7. Never do to others that which you would not wish others should do to you. 8. One day a lady wrote to her husband this letter, which may serve for a perfect model of laconism : " Having nothing to do, I write to you : having nothing to say to you, I finish." 120 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. VOCABULARY. 1. There is not, non tf e; can,pdssa; need, bisdgna. 2. Laden with benefits, beneficdto. 3. May, pud; presume, presumere; succeed, pervenire. 4. Same deed, stesso fdtto ; awakens, sveglia ; looked at, guar- ddva ; excited in him sudden anger, sicscitdva in lui subito sde- gno ; reminded, rammentdva ; baldness, calvezza ; to conceal, nas- cdndere ; Scipidne V Africdno ; great pleasure, magndnimo pia- cere ; warlike, marziah. 5. Judge, pensdte ; dominates, regna ; not only, non solamente; gives, dona ; his own spoils, la roba sua ; even, ancdra. 6. There is hardly, v' e quasi ; to excite, da suscitdre ; envious, invidioso. 7. Never do, non fate; wish, vorreste. 8. "Wrote, scrisse ; may serve, pud servire ; I write, scrivo. conveesazi6ne. Con chi siete venuto ? Avete dltre amiche? Chi ha^detto do ? Sdno le vdstre due sorette ricche ? Come sdno i commanddnti? Volete (will you) aver qudlche cdsa? Qualcwno picchia, anddte a ve- dere chi e ? Non credesi che avremo (shall have) la pace? Avete ritrovdto Is lettere perdicte ? SdnofrateUi questi due ubmini ? Che si dice (say) di nudvo ? Dove V avete inteso ? Con nessuno. Non ne ho dltre. Ognuno lo dice. L' una e ricca, V dltra e pdvera, Geldsi gli uni degli akri. No, vi ringrdzio (thank you), non vdglio niente. E la Signora K. Non e probdbile. Ne ho ritrovdte alcune, ma la maggidr parte sdno perdicte. Non so (I do not know); si rassomigliano (resemble) V uno aW dliro. Non ho letto (read) nessun giorndle dggi, ma si dice che ci sdno cattive nuove. In cdsa d un amico e per via cC una Utter a privdta. PREPOSITIONS. 121 CHAPTEE XIX. THE PREPOSITIONS DI, A, DA. A thorough acquaintance with these prepositions is abso- lutely necessary, and therefore requires the attention of the pupil : first, because the English and Italians differ some- what in the use of them ; and, second, because they are the signs which establish the connection between our ideas, and the slightest error in their interpretation would en- tirely change the sense of a phrase.* MNEMONIC EXERCISE. 10 son del vostro parere, Vdi mipagate di cattiva monetaf 11 mdndo va da se stesso, Si e caccidto a ridere* / Le Alpi sepdrano V Italia Dii>- la Frdncia, Iiapblvere da eannonefu inven- tdta da un frdte, Voi non avete ragidne da far valere, Anddte A vedere che cosa c' e, Voi mi trattdte per da piu che sdno, lo ho ditto DA scherzo e voi fate davvero, Ddtemi la mia veste da camera e il berrettino da notte, Dall' opera si condsce il maes- tro, Siete voi maritata o da mari- tare ? E venuto nessuno a domanddre di me ? I am of your opinion. You pay me with ingratitude. The world goes by itself. He burst out laughing. The Alps separate Italy from France. Gunpowder was invented by a friar. Tou have no good reason to give. Go, see what it is. You do me more honor than I deserve. I said it in joke, and you took it for earnest. Give me my night-gown and night-cap. We know the master by the work. Are you married, or single? Has no one come to ask for me? * Observe that some of the prepositions govern one, two, or three cases. 11 122 ITALIAN GBAMMAR. PKEPOSITIONS IN COMMON USB. Bi* Of. A,\ to, in, at. Ba,% from, by, on, at. In, § in, on, upon. Con, with. Per, through, by, on ac- count of, in order to, for. on, upon. » » under, amongst, within. n » in, in about. Su, Sopra, Sotto, Fra, Tra, Infra, Intra, Prima, before. JDopoi, after. Anzi, before, in presence of. Inndnzi, „ „ „ „ Dindnzi, „ „ „ ,, Avdnti, „ „ „ ,, Davdnti, „ „ „ „ Dietro, behind. Didietro, „ Emtro, in, within. Dentro, „ „ Fuora, out of, without, besides. Fudri, _ „ „ „ „ Infudri, except, excepted. Accdnto, Alldto, Attdrno, Dattdrno, Adddsso, Presso, Appresso, Vicino, Lungi, Lontdno, Appo, || aside, about, near, by. » n » JJ about, around. n » on, upon, about. near, almost. far, from. » n at, with, in compari son with, fowards. beyond, besides. along. till, until, as far as. » » n » » » » » » » Versoft Oltra, Oltre, IAngo, Fino, Sino, Infino, Insino, Contra,** against. Gontro, „ A-fronte,\\ opposite. ffimpetto, „ Dirimpetto, „ Senza, f| without. Salvo, except, excepted, Eccetto, „ „ Trdnne, „ „ The pupil is requested to commit to memory the phrases given under the various prepositions. * Prom the Celtic de, a sign of qualification. t From the Celtic a, near, joining with. X From the Celtic da, at. § From the Celtic en, in. || From the Latin apud, Celtic ap, joint, attached. U From the Latin versus, Celtic gwero, to turn. ** From the Celtic con, a sign of opposition ; and track, side, tt From the Latin frons, Celtic fron, before. it And sdnza and san {used by old writers). From the Latin sine, Celtic sy, want privation. — Bactii. PREPOSITIONS. 123 DI.* I. Domanddre di Uno, domanddre la presSnza di Uno, to ask the presence of some one ; fdr d' dcchio, fdre un cSnno d' dcchio, to make a sign of the eye ; far di cappSllo, fdre un saltito di cappSllo, to salute with the hat ; ddre di penna, ddre un c6lpo di pinna, to eflace with the pen ; ddre del briccdne, ddre il titolo di bric- cdne, to treat as a villain ; punire di mdrte, punire cdlla pina di mdrte, to punish with penalty of death ; accu- sdre di furto, accusdre per delitto di fdrto, to accuse of theft. H. Many adverbial phrases are formed with the prepo- sition di; such as di rdro, rarely ; di soppidtto, di nas- cdsto, in secret; di cirto, certainly; di frisco, di nudvo, newly; etc. A. HI. The preposition a, in Italian, is a sign of the da- tive : it is used to mark the object towards which the action or the intention of the subject is directed. It expresses the idea of tendency of action, of attribution, or of prox- imity to a place or person ; as, — JEgli venne A trovdrmi, He came to me. Manddre A vedere, A cercdre, To send to see, to find. Awicinarsi ad uno, To approach some one. Appoggidrsi ad uno, To lean upon some one. Appoggidrsi al muro, To lean against the wall. Vidno al fudeo, al letto, Near the fire, the bed. Al tempo di Noe, At the time of Noah. Vohdrsi ad uno, To turn to a person. Anddre ALLA volta di Mildno, To go towards Milan. Porre mente ad bgni cdsa, To pay attention to every thing. Pcasare all' dltra parte delta To go on the other side of th« strdda, street. It will be seen that all the verbs of motion, which ex- press a direction towards some object, are followed by the preposition a. * The preposition di may express a relation of possession, of extraction, or of qualifi- cation, as in English. 124 ITALIAN GRAMMAK. IV. There are many other expressions in Italian in which the preposition a is likewise employed ; such as — Taglidre A fette, Anddre a due a due, Mor'wano A miglidia, Impardre a mente, Stare all' erta,* ■^"Anddre, parlare, al buio, Tenete le mdni A voi, Stare a capo chino, A aperta, bdcca To cut in slices. To go two by two. They died by thousands. To learn by heart. To be upon one's guard. To walk, to speak in the dark. To keep your hands off. To be with the head down, and mouth open. CVs The Italians say, adverbially, dlla sfuggita, by stealth ; all' impazzdta, foolishly ; alV impensdta, sud- denly ; dlla rinfusa, pell-mell ; dlla peggio, at the worst; dlla mSglio, at the best ; dlla grdssa, nearly. DA. i VI.) Da is the sign of the ablative : it is used to express the point from which persons or things depart ; as, — AUontandrsi da Parigi, Liber dr si da un impegno, Ipiaceri ndscono dai bisbgni, Separdrsi DALLA famiglia, Astenersi DAL ridere, DAL par- lare, Ripardrsi DAL vento, d/lla pidggia, Dall' anno or sin DixL' anno scorso, La carita comincia da se me- La moglie dipende dal marito, Staccare una cdsa da un dltra, Venire dal tedtro, da cdsa, To go from Paris. To get out of a difficulty. Pleasures spring from wants. To separate from one's family. To abstain from laughing, from talking. To shelter one's self from the wind and from the rain. Since last year. Charity begins at home. The wife depends on her hus- band. To detach one thing from another. To come from the theatre, from the house. * AtP 6rta. This all' 6rta has given rise tc the English word " alert." PREPOSITIONS. 125 C JSssere incalzato dal nemico, C Giudicdre dalle apparenze, Andate da qu'ella parte, Che volete da me ? Fare una cosa da se, or da per se, Guarddrsi da uno, Distinguere il vero dal fdlso, Cader da cavdUo, dall' dlbero, JKfendersi d^gli ipocriti, d£x ladri, dal nemico, To be pursued by the enemy. To judge by appearances. To go on that side. What do you wish of me ? • To do a thing alone, or by one's self. To be on one's guard against one. To distinguish the true from the false. To fall from a horse, from a tree. To defend one's self against hypocrites, thieves, and ene- mies. VUL. The verbs uscire, venire, muovSre, levdrsi, to go out, to come, to move, to rise, etc., sometimes take di for the sake of euphony, particularly when the article is not used ; as, Esco di chiisa, si levd di tdyola, I go out of church, he rose from the table. With the verb car dire, the Italians say, Cader di mdno* di bdcca, to fall from the hand, from the mouth ; but with the article, and, above all, in the plural, they say, tiscir ddlla chiisa, cader ddlle mdni, to go out of the church, to let fall from the hands. "ViLL. " Out of" is translated by fu6r di, because it sounds better than fu6r da; as, Fu6ri di pericolo, out of danger. \^K^)Da is likewise used before words marking the use, employment, or distinction of a thing ; as, — Carta da scrivere, writing-paper. Carta da lettere, letter-paper. A.cqua da here, water to drink. Casa da vendere, house to sell. Bbtte da olio, oil-cask. Camera da letto, bed-chamber. Raydzza da maritdre, a marriageable girl. * Mdno admits of various significations in idiomatic phrases. (See list of idioms.) 11* 126 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. X. Da is employed to express the idea of aptitude, Armi da difendersi, Arms proper for defence. Non sdno cose da dirsi, They are not things to be said. L' errdre e da ub'mo, It is human to err. JJbmo da mdlto, da pdeo, DA A man fit for many things, for few things, for nothing, for fatigue. They are things to cause laugh' niente, da stento, Son cose da ridere, Non e cosa da un pari vostro, E una ragdzza da marito, ter. It is not proper for such a man as you. A young lady of marriageable age. XI. Da may be used in various others ways ; as, — Avete da fare ? Ddtemi da lavordre, Venite qua da me, I Dite da burial J Dite DA vero, or DAYvero t Udmo da bene, or DABiewe, Anddte DAL forndio, Andrd da jtmb madre, Vive DA Signore, Ha trattdto da birbdnte, ( JEgli fa da dottdre, da medi- co, Vi giuro da galantuomo, Have you something to do ? Give me something to do. Come here near me. Do you say it in jest ? Do you speak seriously? An honest man. Go to the baker's. I shall go to my mother's. He lives like a lord. He has behaved like a rogue. He plays the doctor, the phy- sician. I swear to you upon the faith of a gentleman. READING LESSON. Napoledne andato a Milano a farsi incoronare re d' Italia, vis- gone itd 1' Universita di Pa via. Egli si tice presentare i professori, made e domando di Scarpa. Gli fu d&to che era stdto depdsto was said was (had) been deposed dalla sua cattedra per non aver voluto prestare giuramento to hare wished to take PREPOSITIONS. 127 al nu6vo governo. Eh! che impdrta, riprese Buonaparte, il replied giuramento e le opinidni politiche ! Scarpa ondra 1' University ed il mio stato. II n6me s61o di Roma e una st6ria di maraviglie che scalda il warms pdtto ad 6gni mortdle. Terra degli droi, capo del m6ndo ; innanzi a ldi sparirono nazidni, pdpoli e citta famose, ed 611a before disappeared stdtte e sta onore e gloria d' Italia, aspettando che su6ni 1' <5ra stood stands awaiting may sound d' una nudva granddzza. Un gidrno Brasidas trovo tra alcuni f ichi sdcchi un sdrcio, che found lo mdrse si fattamente che lo lascio andar via. Voi veddte, bit let see disse a chi gli stava intorno, che non v' e animaldtto, il quale, stood per piccolo che sia, non p6ssa scampar la vita dve abbia il may be can save may have cudre di difendersi da chi l'assale. EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION. 1. If you wish to have a faithful servant, serve yourself. 2. " Deliver me from my friends," said a philosopher ; " be- cause I can defend myself against my enemies." 3. "We should abstain from such truths as have the appearance of falsehood. _ 4. Amerigo Vespucci, of Florence, made many discoveries in the New World in the year one thousand four hundred ninety- seven. Hence it was called America, from this navigator. 5. Princes ought to punish as princes, and not as executioners. 6. The knowledge of foreign languages serves to correct and perfect our own. 7. The changes of states, far from injuring, often aid in the rapid progress of civilization and the arts. 8. " From the evils which the barbarians brought into Italy," said Varchi, " two good things have come forth, — our Italian language, and the city of Venice." 128 ITALIAN GBAMMAB. VOCABULARY. 1. If you wish, se voleie ; serve yourself, servitevi da voi. 2. Deliver me, liber dtemi ; I, can (shall) defend, difenderd. 3. We should abstain, conviene astenersi ; appearance, fdccia. 4. Made,/ece; hence it was called, che venne quindi chiamato. 5. Ought, debbono. 6. Our own, la propria. 7. Injuring (to injure), nuocere ; aid, gidvano. 8. Brought, portaii; have come forth, naequero. CONVERSAZIONE. Vddo a tedtro. Con mio marito (husband). Won ho niente da fare. Egli va in campagna. Ho del caffe e una focdceia. Sara, dedicdto a Mozart. Dove anddte ? Con ehi anddte ? Che avete da fare, Dove va il Dottore ? Che avete ? A chi sara dedicdto questo mon wnento f Dove trovdste voi (did you find) la li trovai sulla tdvola. i libri ? Come andavano (went) i fanci~ A due a due. am? Sdno le tdvole e le sedie neUa Si, sdno neUa camera, camera ? Venite da me oggi? Che cdsa avete ? Datemi di grazia due uova. Ha egli del pipe ? Che volete fdref Non pdsso; non esco (go out) di cdsa. Una buona cdsa a tre piani (floors). Non ne abbidmo, ma abbidmo pane e butirro. Si, Signdre, ha del pepe, e del sale. Ho intenzione di anddre al hal- lo, ma andrd prima da mia mddre. PREPOSITIONS. 129 CHAPTEE XX. THE PREPOSITIONS CON, IN, PER. MNEMONIC EXERCISE. Io lo vidi co' miei proprj occhi, Assistetemi coi vdstri consigli, La Senna mette face in mare, Leggo per divertirmi, Io appunto ho manddto per voi, Egll ha dato in luce un' opera, E famoso per le sue imprese, Tutti parldvano in una vdlta, Diede un' occhidta in giro, Io vengo a bella posta per voi, Lo farete con vdstro cdmodo, E virtu il dir molto in pdchi detti, E cdsa che non gli pud capir in testa, Le selle non son fdtte pee gli dsini, Pice quello che gliviene m bocca, QueUa donna si adira CON tutti, Per cariia, non mi precipitdte ! E un uomo chiaro per nobilita, Vddo ad aspettdrvi m giardino, Voi cercdte d? ingarbugliarmi CON parole che non intendo, Ognun per se e Dio per tutti, I saw him with my own eyes. Assist me with your counsels. The Seine flows into the sea. I read' {for) to amuse myself. I have just sent for you. He has published a work. He is famous by his exploits. They all spoke at once. He cast a glance around him. I come expressly for you. You will do it at your leisure. It is a talent to say much in few words. It is something which he can- not understand. Saddles are not made for asses. He said what came into his head. This woman gets angry with everybody. For pity's sake, do not destroy me! He is a man illustrious by his nobility. I shall wait for you in the gar- den. You try to confuse me with words which I do not under- stand. Every one for himself, and God for us all. 130 ITALIAN GKAMMAK. CON (with). I. Oon is used as in English in such sentences as the following : — Strignere amicizia CON alcv.no, Egli pdrla c6gli occhi chiusi, Ddrme colla bocca aperta, Parldrsi c6gli occhi, Percuotere COL piede, Far cenno con la mono, col capo, Dire CON voce bdssa, CON voce sonora, Lavordre COL pennello, collo scalpeUo, Fare una cosa CON piac'ere, CON facilitd, CON difficolta, CON Parldre col raore «w mono, E uscito COL servitore, To make friends w'$ some one. He speaks wiift his eyes shut. He sleeps with his mouth open. To speak with the eyes. To stamp with the feet. To make a sign with the hand, wi^ the head. To speak in a low voice, in a sonorous voice. To work with pincers, with a chisel. To do a thing with pleasure, with facility, with difficulty, with dexterity. To speak in an open-hearted . manner. He has gone out with his ser- vant. II. In some phrases, the Italians use con where the English use by; as, Illustrdrsi col stio mirito, to make himself illustrious by his merit. IN (in). ILL In follows a verh when it expresses the existence of an object in or upon another ; as will be seen by the following : — U prdnzo e in tdvola, Ponete vino in tdvola, Anddre in viUeggiatura, Essere in mdre, Cadere in terra, Non ho dendri mdosso,* Jo non entro nei fdtti vostri, Alzdrsi IN punta di piede, The dinner is upon the table. Put the wine upon the table. To go into the country. To be upon the sea. To fall to the earth. I have no money about me. I do not meddle in your affairs. To stand on tiptoe. * Lidiisso in from in and ddsso, back. PREPOSITIONS. 131 In mia, in sua vice, Essere in potere di, essere nel- la cuna, Stare in piedi in mezzo alia piazza, Tutti gli sguardi erano fissi m lid, Stare in cittd, in villa, in cdsa, To P ho gett&to in mare, Morire in eta di cento dnni, In my, in his place. To be at the power of, to be in the cradle. To stand up in the middle of the place. Every look was fixed upon him. To live in the city, in the town, in the house. I have thrown him into the sea. To die at the age of one hun- dred. IV- In elegant style, in is sometimes used instead of c6ntro (against) ; as, Vendicdrsi is lino, to avenge one's self against another ; incrudelire NE' s-doi schidvi, to be cruel to (against) his slaves. V- It is difficult to know when to use the article with in, and when to suppress it ; and there can be no positive rules given on this point. We must, however, observe that in is generally used without an article for any thing which is, or seems to be, on the surface ; as, II vascillo che Sra m mdre si e r6tto nEgli scdgli, the vessel which was upon the sea is broken on the rocks ; i pisci vivono KEL mdre, fish live in the sea. PER (for, by, through, etc.). VI. The preposition per indicates two distinct connec- tions : — 1. It denotes the idea of passage ; as, — Scrwere per la posta, Essere crudele per natura, Operdre per interesse, Prendere pel braccio, Pagdre cinque frdnchi per gibr- no, Pee padre egli e nobile, To write by post. To be cruel by nature. To work for interest. To take by the arm. To pay five francs a day. Through his father, he is of no« ble birth. 132 ITALIAN GKAMMAK. Pee un secolo, pee un anno, During .(for) a year, a century. Vha voce cdrre per la citta, A rumor runs through the city. Viaggidre pee la Francia, To travel through France. Passare pee la Francia, pee la To pass through France, through camera, pee la porta, the chamber, through the door. 2. Per serves also to mark the aim or object of a per- son ; as, — Egli e morto pee la p atria, He died for his country. Io lavoro pee i miei scoldri, I work for my pupils. Furono lasciati pee morti, They were left ybr dead. VII. We can also say, nilla cittd, nilla strdda, in Frdncia; but the idea of motion is better expressed by the word per, rendering the phrase more forcible. VIII. We also say, — Pee verita, io non lo credo, In truth, I do not believe it. JEgli e venuto pee parte di i,no, He came from some one. JEssere pee, or stare pee, To be about to. Pee me vi assicuro che, As for me, I assure you that. Io ho quel che dite piii che pee I perfectly believe all that you vero, say. Anddte pe' fdtti vostri,' Let me alone ; or, mind your business. Pek qudnto si affatichi, tutto gli He may tire himself as much va a voto, as he will, nothing succeeds with him. beading lesson. Un giovin6tto aveVa i capelli neri e la b£i*w»- bianea. Tdtti domandavano la causa di un tal fen6meno. Up motteggiatore rispdse : " Perche f6rse quel Sign6re ha lavora*o pv is611a mascel- labored la che col cervello. Giiilio secdndo, in eta di 70 anni, con un elmo iff po montd all' assalto della mirandola. Si dice che un giorno, .qu^to papa guerriero buttasse nel Tevere le chiavi di San Pi&ro, pa* non threw aver piu ad usare, diceva egli, che la spada di San Paolo. PREPOSITIONS. 133 Un bu6n vecchio parroco di villa, che era debole di vista, e avea le dita p<5co eldstiche, stava leggendo in pulpito an capo was reading della genesi. A queste par61e : " II Signore diede ad Adamo gave una m6glie," volto due pagine in una volta, e senza abbadarvi he turned perceiving it lesse tuttavia con vdce f6rte e chiara : " Ed ella era incatramata read pitched per di dentro e per di fu6ri." Quel buon piovano si era without. parson disgraziatamente imbattuto nella descrizione dell' area di Noe. unfortunately lighted upon Bisogna che 1' u6mo abbia t&nto sehno da sapersi accomodare alle costumanze delle nazidni nelle quali si trdva. Per mancanza is. want di un chiddo si perde il ferro ad un cavallo ; per mancanza di lost shoi (iron) un ferro si perde il cavallo, e per mancanza di un cavallo, anche il cavaliere e perduto, perche il nemico lo sopraggiunge, 1' succeeded ammazza, e tdtto questo per non aver p<5sto mehte ad un chiodo killed put d' un ferro del suo cavallo. EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION. 1. It is a great misfortune not to have wit enough to speak well, nor judgment enough to keep silent. 2. In this world, we ought to be born either a king or a fool : a king, to be able to avenge injuries, and punish the vices of men ; a fool, so as not to perceive injuries, or be troubled by any- thing. 3. A caricature represented George III. with a very large sleeve, from which Napoleon wished to come out ; but, as soon as he put out his nose, George gave him a push to force him back into the sleeve. 4. We shall be measured by the same measure as we measure others. 134 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. 5. We should be careful not to lose time and words in refuting things evidently false. Zeno denied motion, and Diogenes began to walk without saying a word : Zeno persisted in his paradox, and Diogenes continued to walk. VOCABTJLAKT. 1. To speak, parldre ; to keep silent, stare zitto. 2. We ought to be born, converrebbe nascere ; to be able, po- tere ; to avenge, vendicdre ; to punish, oastigdre ; to perceive (to know), conbscere ; or to be troubled, ne ddrsi pensiero. 3. Represented, jigurdva ; Giorgio ; wished to come out, vole- va uscire ; put out, sporgeva ; gave, ddva ; to force him back, perfdrlo torndr dentro. 4. Measured, misurdti ; we measure, misuridmo. 5. We should be, etc., bisogna guarddrsi dal perdere ; in re- futing, nel confutdre ; denied, negdva ; began to walk, si mise a passeggidre ; persisted, persistette ; continued, continud. conversazione. . Che fa il vdstro servo ? Egli fa un cenno col capo. Che viiol (wishes) dire? (The ilprdnzo e in tdvola. Dotf e la vbstra arnica 1 E uscita col servitbre. Che e caduto in terra ? Lo scalpeUo con cui lavdro. Perche e il Signbr M. faimoso ? Per le sue dpere letterdrie. Che cdsa ha egli fdtto ? Ha ddto in luce mdlte dpere. U avete lette ? Si, le ho lette con piacere. Come ha egli parldto ? Ha parldto col cudre. Dove state bra? Sto in cittd. Prestdtemi un dbllaro. Non ne ho in ddsso. Che si dice del fit Capitdno? Che egli e mbrtoper la p atria. Perche lavdra il Signbr B. ? Lavdra per sudi scoldri. Volete anddre in vece mia ? Si, andrd in vice vbstra. Che chiedete (demand) vbi ? Ghiedo dandro in prestito. E crudele quest animdle ? Per natura non e crudele. Ha egli comprdto una carrozza ? No, e trbppo avdro per far quit- ta spesa. PREPOSITIONS. 135 CHAPTER XXI. THE PREPOSITIONS. MNEMONIC EXERCISE. Oid sia ditto era di ndi, Egli verra fra died gi'orni, Che c' e qui dentro ? Faccidmocegli INcdNTRO, 10 le sedeva accanto, Egli stette alqudnto s6pra di se* Noe nacque prima del diluvio, e mori dopO il diluvio, Venni questa mane A cdsa vds- tra, Non v' e cdsa nudva s6tto il sole, JEUa ha trovdto un marito se- c6ndo il suo genio, NeW inverno si sta bene accan- to alfuoco. Bisogna vivere sec6ndo le leggi deUa natura, Non vo mdi a letto prima deW alba, 11 sonno in stjl mattino e salut'e- joole, Animo, Signorina; vien tdrdi: levdtevi su, Che avete fdtto isrrfNO ad dra ? Ciaseuno e padrone in cdsa sua, Qudndo avrd casa mia, inviterd tutti i miei amid, That may be said among us. He will arrive in ten days. What is that within ? Let us go to meet him. I was seated beside her. He stopped some time to reflect. Noah was born before the flood, and died after it. This morning I went to your house. There is nothing new under the sun. She has found a husband ac- cording to her taste. In winter, one is well near the fireside. "We ought to live according to the laws of Nature. I never go to bed before day- break. Sleep in the morning is healthy. Come, miss ; it is late : get up. What have you done up to the present moment ? Every one is master in his own house. When I have a house of my own, I will invite all my friends. 136 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. UPON. I. "Upon" is often translated by in; as, — 1 will wait for you on the piazza, Vi aspettero m piazza. Ungrateful people write benefits GV ingrdti scrivono i benefizi upon the sand, nell' arena. To have no money upon (or Non avire dandri in dosso. about) you, BETWEEN, AMONG. II. These prepositions are rendered by fra or tra, and occasionally by infra or intra; as, — Among the people, Fra (or tra) ilpopoh. Among men, Fra (or tra) gli uomini. Between these two cities you Fra quisle due citta s' incdn- find three villages, trano tre paesitti. III. Fra (or tra) sometimes expresses " in " or " with- in ; " as, — I said within myself, To diciva era me. God has created the world in Bio ha credto il mdndo m set six days, gidrni. He will arrive within two j&gli arrivera fra due mesi. months, To live in pleasure, in pain, Vivere fra i piaceri, fra le pine. UNTIL. IV. "Until" is translated by fino or sino; also insino or infino. to or AT. V. " To " or " at " is rendered by da when it signifies going to some one ; as, — I go to my banker's, Io vo dal mio banchiere. You go to your uncle's, Vdi anddte da vdstro zio. He will send to the baker, Mandera dal forndio. Yesterday I went to your house Iiri vinni da voi per pregdrvi to beg you to call upon me di pass are dggi da me. to-day, PREPOSITIONS. 137 A cdsa di, a cdsa mia, a cdsa vdstra, etc., are also used when we refer more particularly to the house ; as, Vdi anddte a cdsa di vdstro zio ; iSri vinni a cdsa v6s- tra per pregdrvi di passdre 6ggi a cdsa mia. \L. The following examples illustrate the use of va- rious prepositions : — At the fireside, After dinner, After me, About the table, Against me, him, Against the enemy, About 3,000 francs, About three feet high, Along the river, According to your opinion, Before all, before me, Before speaking, Before daylight, Beyond the sea, Behind the door, Before the chimney, Beyond the Rhine, Beside that, Far from the truth, In the middle of the street, In face of, or opposite to, Near the bed, Near the sea, Outside, Out of the house, Towards me, thee, Towards spring, Without money, Within him. Accanto al Juoco. D6po prdnzo. D6po di me. Intorno alia tdvola. Contro di me, di lui. C6ntro al nemico. Cjrca a tre mila frdnchi. Alto circa, or alio int6rno a trepiedi. Ldngo il fivme. Sbcondo, or gittsta al vdstro par'ere. Prima di tiitto, PRfsiA di me. Prima di, or avanti di pdrlare. Innanzi I' alba, or prima deW dlha. Al di la dal mare. Dietro la "porta, or dUa porta. Davanti il, or al cammino. Di la dal Reno. Oltre a rib. Lungi, or lontano dal v'ero. In mezzo alia, or deUa strdda. Dirimpetto a, or in fIccia a. Accanto, or vicfNO al letto. Vicino, or presso al or del mare. Per di fd6ri, or al di fu6ri. Fu6ri or fu6ra di cdsa. Verso or inverso a me, a te, or di me. Verso primavera. Senza dandro. Dentro, or per di dentr<}, di lui. VH. When the above prepositions are followed by a personal pronoun, the pronoun is often placed before the verb, and the preposition terminates the phrase ; as, Nbn mi compartte piU dindnzi, appear no more before me. 12* 138 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. BEADING LESSON. Tasso's last Letter Che dira il mio Signdr Antdnio, quando udira la mdrte del •will say will hear suo Tdsso ? e per mio avviso non tardera molto la novella, perchd will not delay io mi sento al fine della mia vita, non essendosi potuto trovar feel being able m&i rimeclio a qu&ta mia fastididsa indisposizidne sopravvemita alle molte altre mie solite, quasi rapido torrente, dal quale senza accustomed potere aver alcun ritegno v6do chiaramehte esser rapito. Non 6 defence taken away. tempo che io parli della mia ostinata fortuna, per non dire dell' ingratitudine del m6ndo, la quale ha pur vohito aver la vittoria di condtirmi alia sepoltura mendico ; quand'io pensava, che quella gl6ria, che, mal grado di chi non vu61e, avra questo secolo da miei scritti, non f6sse pe,r lasciarmi in alcun modo sehza guiderd6ne. Mi son fatto condurre in questo Monastero di Sant' Onofrio, non to conduct s61o perche 1' aria e lodata da' m&Iici, piu che d' alciin' altra praised parte di E6ma, ma quasi per cominciare da questo ludgo emi- nente, e colla conversazi6ne di questi divdti Padri, la mia con- versazi6ne in Cielo. Preg&te Iddio per me : e siate sicuro che sicc6me vi ho amato, ed onorato sempre nella presente vita, cosl faro per voi nell' altra piu vera, cio che alia non finta, ma ve- will do feigned race carita s' appartiehe ; ed alia Divina grazia raccomando v6i, belongs e me stesso. Di Eoma in Sant' Onofrio. PREPOSITIONS. 139 EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION. 1. The tears of an inheritor are smiles concealed under a mask. 2. • Distrust those who love you very much on short acquaint- ance. 3. Private thieves spend their lives in chains and prisons; public thieves, in the midst of purple and gold. 4. With many people, love of country, is none other than to kill and despoil other men. 5. There are some country towns in France where societies meet at six o'clock in the evening, in winter. They seat them- selves around the fireplace; and, after the usual compliments, each one goes to sleep. At eight o'clock, one of them sneezes. Then, there is a general movement of surprise. " "What is it ? " — " Nothing." One of the company takes out his watch, and announces that it is eight o'clock. " Ah ! it is not late : we can amuse ourselves a little longer." They sleep again till nine o'clock, when the mistress of the house gives a signal. They rise ; they congratulate each other at having been much amused j and each one goes to his own home. 6. " Wit and judgment," says Pope, " are always in opposition to each other, as the husband and wife ; although made to live together, and mutually help each other." 7. A preacher displayed all his eloquence in a pa"negyric upon St. Antonio ; and, among the figures of rhetoric with which he embellished his style, there was one wherein he said, " Among what inhabitants of heaven shall I place our saint ? Shall it be with angels or archangels ? shall it be with cherubims or sera- phims ? No ! Shall I place him among patriarchs, among prophets ? No ! Neither shall I place him among apostles', nor doctors, nor evangelists." One of his auditors, who was tired of this long declamation, said to him, in rising, " My father, if you do not know where to place your saint, you can put him here ; because I am going away." VOCABULARY. 1. Concealed (which they conceal), nascdndono. 2. Distrust, difiddtevi; love very much, vogliono gran bene. 3. Private, private ; spend (pass), pdssano. 4. Is none other than, non e altro che ; kill, ammaszare; despoil, spoglidre. 5. There are, vi sono ; societies meet, siva in conversazione; at six o'clock, p.m., dlle sei pomerididne ; usual, soliti; there is 140 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. a general movement, insdrge un mbto generate ; takes out, cava; it is not late, non e tdrdi ; to amuse, trattenere ; they sleep again, ognuno tdrna ad adormentdrsi ; they rise tutti si alzano ; they congratulate each other, si raUegrano. 6. Although made, benche fdtti; to live together, tenersi com- pagnia ; to help, ajutdre. 7. Displayed, sfoggidva; to embellish, orndre ; to place, col- he are ; neither, neppiire ; declamation, JUastrdcca; if you do not know, se non sapete ; you can put him here, poneteh pur qui ; because, che ; I am going away, io vddo via. C ONTBRSAZIONE. Che cosa av'ete ? Dite da vero, o dite da burla ? Dov' e il mio pane (roll) imou- tirrdto (buttered) ? Ohe fecero (do) quei poverini cdtte Idgrime in sugli dechi ? Fra qudli dei celesti abitatori fu collocate Sani 'Antonio ? Ho io lascidto (left) il mio bas- tone qui ? CM e feKee ? Qua! e quelP animate, che va (goes) con qudttro piedi, pdi con due, ed in ultimo con tre ? Una bottiglia di vino. Da vero ; non ischerzo. Non so, vddo nella cucina per cercdrlo. Chiesero aiuto colpidnto e colle strida. Amico . mio, non e di saperlo. Vbi lo lascidste da mia soreHa. V6i ed io, perche non ci mdnca (fails) un amico sinceto. E V uomo, che da bambino va carpdni con le mdni e co* piedi, e cosi con qudttro pie- di, pdi ritto su due piedi, ed in vecchidja con tre, perche va col bastdne. VEEBS. 141 CHAPTER XXTT. THE VERBS £SSERE AKD AVE~RE. MNEMONIC EXEKCISE. Non c' e tempo da perdere, Non c' e came seni dssa, Avete vdi in pronto la moneta ? Non bisogna aversela a male, Jo v' ho cara qudnto sorella, Perche avete cosi fretta ? Comprdte deUa legna; perche in cantina non ce n' e piu, Se non avete che fare, venite meco, Tbcca a voi a coprire i miei difetti, Ora toccherd a me a raccon- cidrla* Non ho piacere di viaggidre di noitef Con chi V avete? Io non Vho con nessuno, Vi sdno grdn ribdldi in questo mdndo, Non si pud dare un cuore piu perfido, Abbidmo a discdrrere a qudttro dcchi,' fib incontrdto due gidrni fa vbstro cugino, J Seni del mondo sdno in mdno delta sdrte, A voi tdcca il dir prima il vds- tro parere* JEgli non e in grddo difdr questa There is no time to lose. There is no meat without bones. Have you the money ready ? You must not take it ill. I cherish you as a sister. Why are you in such a hurry ? Buy more wood ; for there is no more in the cellar. If you have nothing to do, come with me. It is for you to conceal my faults. Now it is my turn to adjust the affair. I feel no pleasure travelling by night. With whom are you displeased? I am displeased with no one. There are great villains in this world. There cannot be a more per- fidious heart. We must speak of that to- gether tete-a-tete. Two days ago I met your cous- in. The riches of this world are in the hands of fate. It is for you to give your ad- vice first. He is not in a position to in- cur this expense. 142 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. £SSEEE, TO BE. I. This verb is very much used in Italian, by its form- ing the passive, which predominates in that language. 1st, It is its own auxiliary "in compound tenses; as, Io sdno stdto, I have been: 2d, The past participle ^stdto agrees in gender and number with its subject ; as, JElla § STATA, she has been; ndi sidmo STATI, we have been. IT. When Sssere is used impersonally, it agrees with the subject which follows it ; as, M un dra, it is one o'clock ; sdno le Undid, it is eleven o'clock. III. The verb venire is very often used for essere. TV. The Italian expression Sssere per, or stdre per, signifies "to be upon the point of;" as, Io sdno, or io std per ammoglidrmi, I am about to marry. V- In the phrases "there is," "there are," "there was," etc., the Italians use ci and vi (there), abridged from quinci and quivi. Gi denotes proximity, and vi a more distant place; as, — There is, was, etc., V e, or c' e ; v' era, or c' era, etc. There are many people who Vi sdno tndlti che vorrebbero wish to learn much without impardre mdUo senza studi- study, are. VI. Gi and vi are changed into ce and ve when it is necessary to use the indefinite pronoun ne (of it, of them), etc. ; as, — Won ce n' epiu, or non ve n' e piu, There are no more of them. Nm ce n' e piu, etc., There is no more of it. VII. To express "it is ten years since," etc., the Ital- ians say, "Died dnni fa, or didci dnni sdno; and for " it is an hour," " a week," " a month," " two centuries," etc., they say »' dra fa, una settimdna fa, un mSsefa, due sicolifa.^ "There is," "there are," is occasionally rendered by vi ha, or hdvvi. VBEBS. 143 VIII. A.vSre (to have) , besides being the auxiliary of active verbs as in English, is used idiomatically in the fol- lowing phrases : — To be judicious, To be ready, To be thirsty, To be hungry, To be hot, To be satisfied with, To cherish some one, To remember, To be in a hurry, To be cold, To be ill, To be ashamed, To take a thing ill, To be afraid, To be charmed, To be in possession of, To have knowledge of, Aver giudizio ; aver cervello. Avere in pronto ; avere a mono. Aver site. Aver fame. Aver caldo. Aver caro di. Aver caro uno. Avere a mente. Aver fretta. Aver freddo. Aver male. Aver vergdgna. Aver per male. t Aver paura. Aver gusto ; aver piacere. Avere in mdno. Avere conoscenza. HEADING LESSON. Seduta un po' in disparte, cdlla fronte bassa e le mani intreccia* te sulle gin6cchia, stava piangendo cheta, la povera Laudomia. Le sue guance in questi mesi s' eran affllate e fatte pallide, che quel viver sempre in agitazione, quel doveV ad ogni dra temere le giung^sse 1' awiso che Lamberto era rimasto ucciso, esauriva in lei a poco a pdco la vita. Ed 6ra, dopo qu&ta rdtta, della quale s' ignoravano i particolari, ed in cui si sapeVa perd quasi 3,000 persone aver perduta la vita, rimaner col tremendo dubbio s' egli fdsse vivo o morto ! Non aver m6do di uscirne, non sapere a chi domandarne ! " Oh ! pensiamo," diceva, " s' egli non si sara gettato nel maggidr pericolo ! s' egli avra voltito staccarsi dal fianco del Ferniccio ! Oime ! Oime ! ch' io non abbia pr6- prio a vederlo mai piu ? " Le cognate, le nipoti e gli altri tutti di quelle tre case che formavano una sola famiglia, la veneravario piu che sorella e zia, e la chiamavano 1' Ameda, ndme antico,. ventito dal latino Amita t'che vdoi dir zia), e tuttora vivo nel contado della Brianza. 144 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION. 1. There was in Athens a very opulent miser, who troubled himself very little about being the talk of his fellow-citizens. " People may hiss me," said he ; " but I am not angry : for, when I am at home, I rejoice at the sight of my crowns." 2. Wherever there are tears to be dried up, you will be sure to meet a woman.' 3. There are men on whom is imprinted the whole character of their nation. 4. Unhappily, it is but too true, that no nation can flourish without vices. If it were not for ambition or cupidity, there would not be a single man who would wish to take charge of the government of others. Take vanity away from women, and the fine manufactures of silk and lace, which furnish labor (cause to live) to so many thousands of artisans, would cease (would be no more). If there were no thieves, lock-makers would die of hunger. Thus good and evil are always found together. 5. Always live as if you were old, in order that you may never repent having been young. 6. There are men who know neither how to speak nor to be silent. 7. An old woman asked Mahomet what it was necessary to do so as to go to Paradise. " My dear," said he, " Paradise is not for old women." The good woman began to weep ; and the prophet said, to console her, " There are no old women there, because they all become young again." 8. Dolabella said to Cicero, " Do you know that I am only thirty years old ? " — "I ought to know it," said Cicero ; " because you have been telling it to me these ten years." 9. If princes were obliged to combat hand to hand, there would be no more wars. VOCABTJXART. 1. Atene ; who troubled himself very little, che si ddva poea hriga ; hiss, fa le Jlschidte ; I rejoice, mi raUegro. 2. Wherever, dovunque ; to dry, asciug&re. 3. Imprinted, impresso. 4. Unhappily, etc., e cosa disgraziatamente pur vera ; can flourish, pud esser fiorida ; if it were not, se non fosse ; would wish, avesse voglia di ; to take charge, incaricdrsi ; take away, togliete via; manufacture, fdbbrica; cause to live, ddnno da vivere a ; would die, morirebbero. TEEBS. 145 5. If you were, se fdste ; may never repent, vi abbidte a pen- tire mdi. 6. To be silent, stare zitti. 7. Old woman, vecchia ; asked, domanddva ; Inaometto ; it waS necessary, convenisse ; to go, per andare ; paradiso ; my dear, cdra mia ; began to weep, si caccid a pidngere ; to console, racconsoldre ; become young, ritornerdnno giovani. 8. DolabeUa ; Cicerone ; only, solamente ; I ought to know it, to debbo sapere ; because, perche ; telling, anddte dicendo. 9. Were obliged to, dovessero ; combat, pugndre ; hand to hand, a corpo a cdrpo. CONVEESAZldNE. Dotf e la Luisa ? Perche? Louisa, che hai ? Che cosa ha? Bevete (drink). E ddlce abbas- tdnza? Che cos' e questa nostra vita ! Qudnti anni sdno che sietefudri di pdtria ? Figliuoli miei, avete appetito ? Volete (will you) bere (drink) ? jE mdrta la Signora ? E la Giidietta? Avete studidto la vdstra lezidne di musica ? Avete fdtto eser- cizio ? Potr'ei (could I) vederla ? E rimdsta a casa. Perche e un pdco infredddtcu La mamma std (is) male. Ha una grdssa febbre. Si, e buonissimo. Un sogno, sognidmo in pace. Sdno ormdi quindici dnni ? No, cdra mddre. Prenderemo (we will take) una J'i, la Signora Maria e mdrta. desoldta. U suo vivo dolore mi lacera (pierces) V dnimo. Mi son levdto questa mattina dlle sette, e non mi sdno piu mossa (moved) dal piano- forte. Si; se volete entrdre un mo- mento, ma non le dite (say) nulla. 18 146 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. CHAPTEE XXm. THE VERBS AND THEIR SYNTAX. MNEMONIC EXERCISE. Come ve la passdte, carino ? * Io sto ascoltdndo : nonmimuovo, Amico, gettdte via la fatlca, Venite pure avdnti, C?ie cosa dite ? Tirdte via, goccioldne ! Io stava scrivendo una lettera, Comportdtevi bene, e sarete ben voliito da tutti, Da alciini filosofi si crede che la vita sia un sdgno, Vi sono taluni che vdnno sempre macchindndo dette novita, Che cosa impedisce all' udmo di esser felice ? Pidve, tuona^ e balena, in un punto, ) Mentre 'state pranzdndo scriverd alio zio, Che andate facendo cosi per tempo ? Non parldr mdi senza aver pensdto, E cosa che si dice da alcuni, Muove piu V interesse proprio che V altrui, Mm ho goduto un' dra di bene, Appena mi vide tird via subito,' How goes it with you, dear ? I listen : I do not move. Friend, you lose your labor. You can likewise enter. What do you say ? Go away, great fool ! I was about writing a letter. Behave well, and everybody will love you. Some philosophers believe that life is a dream. There are people always occu- pied in manufacturing news. What prevents man from being happy? It rains, thunders, and lightens, all at once. While you dine, I will write to my uncle. What are you doing so early ? Never speak without reflection. There are some persons who speak of it. One's own interest is always more touching than that of others. I have never enjoyed a mo- ment's happiness. He no sooner saw me than he ran away. VERBS AND THEIR SYNTAX. 147 The verbs in the infinitive are easily recognized in Ital- ian by their terminations, namely, in are, ere, ire ; as, amdre,* to love ; vedere, to see ; finire, to finish. Many verbs have two terminations for the infinitive : some end in ere or ire. In Italian, the infinitive, when preceded by the definite article, has the nature of a noun ; as, lil proibito il far mdle, it is forbidden to do evil. GENERAL RULES. I. The word via (which signifies " way," " street " ) is placed after certain verbs of motion ; as, — Levar via, to take away. Portdr via, to carry away. Andar via, to go away, etc. II. The passive form of the verb, as we have already stated, is much used in Italian ; particularly in didactic, poetic, and historic styles. The active form becomes pas- sive by changing the construction of the phrase : the subject becomes the regimen, and takes the preposition da: the verb takes the addition of si, which is a sign of the passive ; or it is conjugated through all its tenses with the verbs issere or venire; as, Everybody says, si dice da ttitti, £ ditto da ttitti, or viin ditto da ttitti ; the people fear war, la guerra e temMa dal pdpolo. III. There are many impersonal verbs f in Italian ; among which are the following : — Albeggia, the day appears. Baggiovna, „ „ _ „ . Annbtta, it is growing dark. jina, f it drizzles: it Ldmica, > rains in small Spruzzola, ) drops. * The TerbB of the first conjugation — which ends in ABE — amount to more than four thousand: among them, only about thirty are irregular. t The impersonal verbs may be divided into proper and improper. The proper are those which have only the third person singular throughout all their moods and tenses ; as, Si fa oscii.ro, it grows dark ; tempesta, it hails. The improper are those which are not Impersonal by themselves^ but only occasionally used in an impersonal signification ; as, Convien e, it is proper ; bisd^na, it must. 148 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. Balena, it lightens. Accdde, it happens. Lampeggia, » )> Awiene, n )> Piove, it rains. Interviene, )? V Nevica, it snows. Pare, it appears. Tudna, it thunders. Sembra, it seems. Grandina, it hails. Disdice, it does not become Gila, it freezes. Bisogna, it is necessary. IV. Impersonal verbs are used in the plural when the noun which follows them is plural ; as, — Accddono strdne cose, Strange things happen. Sono le set, It is six o'clock. V. All the, impersonal verbs are conjugated in their compound tenses with essere; as, _Zv tondto, £ piov&to. VI. Many of these verbs are conjugated with the per- sonal pronouns ; as, Mi pdre, it seems to me ; mi dis- pidce, I am sorry. Remark. — In most Mnguages, many verbs are used with an idiomatic turn very different from their proper signification. VII. The verbs venirr and volire, for instance, do not always answer to the EnpJish verbs " to come " and " to be willing : " but the former jp sometimes used instead of the verb Sssere (to be) ; and the latter, being preceded by the particles ci, vi, and unipersonally employed, has the same meaning as the verb bisogndre (must or to be necessary) ; as, — Mi vien detto cost, I am told so. Ci vuol pazienza, We must have patience. VIII. The verb dovSre is expressed in English by the verb "to owe" when it means to be a debtor, and by the verb "to be obliged" when it signifies duty or the necessity of doing an action. It is also used instead of the verb bisogndre, in the signification of " must ; " as, E' gli dovSva trecento fiorini, he owed him three hundred florins. VEEBS AND THEIR SYNTAX. 149 IX. The English verb " to be," used in the sense of "to be one's turn," "business," or "duty," is rendered in Italian by the verb toccdre, in the signification of "to belong ; " as, — Tdcea a me a giuocare, It is for me to play. Tocca a lid a leggere, It is for him to read. X. The verb " to think," used in English in the sense of "to believe" or "to suppose," is translated into Italian by the verb credere ; and, when in the sense of " to re- flect" or "meditate," by the verb pensdre. XI. The verb "to know" is translated by the verb sapere when intellectual knowledge is meant, and by the verb condscere when personal knowledge derived from the evidence of one of our senses is intended. XH. The pronouns mi, ti, ci, ne, etc., are often useC as expletives* with certain verbs ; as, Jo mi son prisa la libertd di scrive'rvi, I have taken the liberty to write to you. XHI. The verbs dovSre, potSre, sapire, volSre, sometimes form their compound tenses with Sssere when followed by an infinitive ; as, Jo non son potato venire. XIV. The verb suondre, or sondre, is used in the sense of to play on an instrument ; as, Sudna il violino, sudna il cdrno da cdccia. XV. The verbs avvertire and baddre (to take care) are followed by a negation ; as, Avvertite or baddte di non inganndrvi, take care not to deceive yourself. XVI. The verb may be placed before or after the sub- ject, according to the dominant idea of either verb or " * Expletives are particles -which give strength and energy. They are bihie, si bene, ptore, tiitto, mi, ti, p6i, altrimenli, ti, gid, via, vi, m&i, igli, si, bello, non, ne; as, — H vdstro vesttto e biW e fatto, Your suit of clothes is finished. Son tiitto stanco, I am tired. Cke tempo fa igli ? What is the weather ? £gli e piu ditto ch' 'to non eredeva, He is more learned than I thought. 13* 150 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. subject. This inversion sometimes gives great effect, particularly to poetry. We may see it in Tasso : — GiIce V dlta Cartdgo ; appena i segni DeW alte sue mine il lido serba, Muoiono le citta ; muoiono i regni, etc. REMARKS. 1. The verbs ending in care and gare, as predicdre, spiegdre, take h in those tenses in which c and g would precede e or i, so as to preserve the hard sound of the infinitive. (See conjugation of cercdre.) 2. Students .should be careful to notice the difference between the imperfect and perfect-definite tenses of Ital- ian verbs. The imperfect expresses an action not accom- plished during the time of another past action, or the repetition of an action, and may be known by its making sense with the auxiliary was. The perfect-definite ex- presses an action entirely past ; as, I was going to your sister when I saw you, io me ne (imp.) ANDAVA da vds- tra sorilla, qudndo io vi (perfect) VIDI ; I went almost every night to pay a visit to the famous Schiller, io AN- DAVA qudsi 6gni sira a far visita al cilebre Schiller. READING LESSON. Era intanto comparsa la Caterina con qualche cosarejla per cena : e chi non avesse saputo che la casa era andata a sacco, 1' avrebbe indovinato vedendo quell' imbandigione, che tutta con- sisteva in un' insalata, un pezzo di cacio, e due pan neri, che 1' lino neppur era intero. La povera ddnna, sciira e macilenta in viso, c6gli 6cchi g6nfl e rossi, apparecchiava senza parlare, e metteva ogni tanto, Mnghi sospiri ; e ddpo quelle prime e brevi parole, nessiino apri piu b6cca, e rimaser pens6si, sedendo su lina p&nca che era tiitt' in giro conf itta nel muro : e questo sil^nzio parea tanto piu mesto, che nessuna vdce, nessiino strepito s' udiva neppiire,' al di fu6ri, benche fdssero nel cuor della terra,' pdco lontani di piazza. II canto d' un gallo o 1' abbaiar d' un cane avrebber almeno dato segno di cosa viva ; ma quel desolato borgo aveva aspdtto di cimitero. — D'Azelio. VEKBS AND THEIK SYNTAX. 151 EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION. The Stranger and the Guide (seated on the top of the ColUewm). 1. S. — As I just now observed, as we climbed up here, the name of Rome awakens the most agreeable sensations. 2. G. — It is because you have read so much, sir: besides, you know Latin, and then you have travelled much. 3. S. — Two years of travel have profited me much more- than eight years of Latin. I have studied nature : I have freed myself from my prejudices, and from the false national love which makes us so unjust towards our fellow-creatures. 4. G. — "What think you, then, of Italy ? 5. S. — Italy has conquered the world by her arms ; she has enlightened it by her sciences; civilized us by her fine arts; governed by her genius ; and, far from succumbing under the redoubtable blows of barbarians, she has triumphed over them, forcing them to lay down their ensanguined arms at her feet. 6. G. — Very true ; and you cannot mention another nation which has held its conquests so long as Italy. , VOCABULARY. 1. We climbed, salivdmo ; awakens, desta. 2. Read, letto ; travelled, viaggidto. 3. Profited, giovdto ; studied, studidto ; have (am) freed, sono spogliato ; fellow-creatures, simile. 4. Think, pensate. 5. Conquered, conquistato ; enlightened, illwminato ; civilized, ingentilito ; governed, governdto ; far from succumbing, non eke soggiacere ; triumphed, trionfdto ; forcing (constraining them), costringendoli ; ensanguined, insanguindti. 6. You cannot mention (cite), vossignoria non pud citare. CONVERSAZIONE. Av'ete cdmere da qffittdre (to Si, Signore, ne ho vdrie. let)? Vorrei un appartamento. Gon mobili o senza mobili t Lo vorrei (should like) smobig- Pensate di trattenervi (to re- lidto. main) mdlto ? Non piu che I'inverno. E al partire ? Al partire rivendero (I will sell Non ne caver ete un terzo del again) la mobiglia. edsto. 152 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. AUora i meglio trovdre una budna padrdna ed un bell' appartamento. Andidmo a vedere. Che mobili ha ella ? II letto e la cosa principalissi- ma. La camera rispdnde sulla strd- da? Desidera vedere un' dUra stan- za? Che si dice deW ostinazione ? Che ci vudle in tutte le cose ? Qudndo e piu lucido il sole ? Che volete amico mio ? Che bisbgna fare per godere budna salute ? Che sta facendo quesf udmo ? Che cosa i pazzia ? Vi condurrd io ddUa Signora Bidnca ; ella e persona gen- tilissima e discreta. La situazidne e bellissima. Ha mobili di mdgano (mahog- any), e tappeti di lusso. Nonpotete desiderdrne un migli- ore. No Signdre, da nel giardino. No, credo che il letto sia budno. Non si trdtta adesso che del prezzo. Si dice che F ostinazione e peg- gior di tutti i peccdti. In tutte le cose ci vudle la mo- derazidne. Ddpo una burrdsca h sempre piii lucido il sole. Vdglio piii che vdi potete ddr- mi. , Bisdgna vivere parcamente. Sta ragiondndo per passdre il tempo. Lo sperdr sempre neW avvenire e pazzia. THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 153 CHAPTER XXIV. THE VERB: THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. MNEMONIC EXERCISE. Gli comandd che parldsse, Dubito che P dra sia tarda, JXtegli ch' eglifdccia come vudle, Non so se to debba dir di si o di no, Quantf dnche io lo sapessi, non ve lo direi, Si da per sicuro che la pace sia fatta, Bisbgna che gli scrividte vdi stesso, JS ilpiu bravo ubmo ch' io abbia mdi conosciiito, Benche sia difficile, bisbgna perb vincere se stesso, Egli lo dice perche non didte a me la cdlpa, lo gli dissi che come gli piacesse le rispondesse, Pare ch' ella si faccia ognbr piu bella, Gli dissi che facesse come vo- fie io avessi studidto, sarei dotta, Pud essere ch' io porta domani, Se tu sapessi qudnto io fdmo ! Vinne da me e mi domandd chi fossi, e dove andassi, He ordered him to speak. I fear that it is late. Tell him to do as he likes. I do not know if I ought to say yes or no. Even if I knew it, I would not tell you. We are assured that peace is made. It is necessary that you write to him yourself. He is the most honest man that I have ever known. Although it is difficult, we must conquer ourselves. He says it that you may not blame me. I told him that I would answer her as he might please. She seems to be continually growing handsomer. I told him to do as he pleased. If I had studied, I should he learned. It is possible that I may leave to-morrow. If thou knewest how much I love thee ! He came to me, and asked me who I was, and where I was going. 154 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Every proposition is either positive or doubtful. I. The positive indicates that the thing positively exists ; that the action is done in an absolute manner. Tins propo- sition is expressed by the indicative mood ; as, Io pdrlo, I speak ; io parldva, I was speaking. II. The doubtful proposition, on the contrary, is ex- pressed by the subjunctive mood, and serves to indicate the possibility or doubt of a thing existing : it shows that the existence of the action is conditional and relative, be- cause it depends on an antecedent proposition, expressed or understood; as, I wish to write, io vSglio scrivere, is positive, and in the indicative mood ; I wish that you would write, io vdglio che v6i scrividte, is doubtful, de- pending on the will of another, and therefore put in the subjunctive. III. The verb is used in the subjunctive after all verbs that signify asking, entreating, suspecting, wondering, rejoicing, grudging, supposing, hoping, imagining, conjecturing, intimating; after all verbs expressive of desire, will, command, permission, prohibition, fear, belief; after all verbs implying doubt, ignorance, uncer- tainty, or future action ; and after all verbs used with a negative ; as, — Per amor di te ti prego (che) For your sake, I beseech you te lie rimanghi, to desist. Che vudi tu cK io sdppia ? "What do you think that I know? IV. Some of these verbs, however, appear sometimes to be used indiscriminately, either in the indicative or in the subjunctive mood : but it is not so in fact ; for, when they are so used, each mood expresses the action in a different manner, as may be seen in the following exam- ples : — THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 155 Vdglio sposdre una donna che I wish to marry a woman whom mi pidce, I like. Vdglio sposdre una donna che I wish to marry a woman whom mi pidccia, I may like. Vddo cercdndo uno che mi vudl I am seeking one who is fond bene, of me. Vddo cercdndo uno che mi vd- I am seeking one who may be glia bene. fond of me. In which, in the first instance, being certain of the exist- ence of the action expressed, we use the indicative ; and, in the second, we use the subjunctive, because the existence of the action is not certain, but doubted or desired. V. After sembrdre, par ere, bisogndre, or any other impersonal verb, the subjunctive is always used ; as, — Bisbgna che voi partidte domdni, You must go away to-morrow. Mi sembrava che avesse vbglia He appeared as if he had a di rider e, wish to laugh. . Parevami che eUa fosse piu bi- She appeared to me to be dnea che la nei>e, whiter than snow. VI. The verb is also used in the subjunctive after the relative pronoun che, following a comparative or a super- lative ; as, — Bella quant dltra donna (che) As handsome as any other lady fosse mdi in Firenze, in Florence ever was. E la miglibre opera che sia com- It is the best work which ever pdrsa, appeared. VII. And after the relative qudle, not used in an inter- rogative manner ; as, — Vha parte qudle volesse ne reg- He might govern such a part gerebbe, as he should wish. OF THE TENSES OP THE DEPENDENT VERBS IN A COM- POUND SENTENCE. "Vlll. When, in a compound sentence, the principal verb is in the present of the indicative, or in the future, the dependent verb must be put in the present of the 156 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. subjunctive, if we mean to imply the present or future time ; and in the imperfect of the subjunctive, if we mean to imply the past ; as, — Credo miportdsse arnore, I believe that he loved me._ to credo omdi che mdnti e pidg- I believe, that, by this time, ge sdppian di che t'empra sia mountains and plains know la mia vita, what is the condition of my life. IX. When the dependent verb expresses an action which may be done at all times, it may be put either in the imperfect or the present of the subjunctive, although the principal verb be in the perfect-indefinite of the indica- tive; as, — Iddio ci a dato la ragione affin- God gave us reason in order che ci distinguidmo, or ci dis- that we might distinguish tinguessimo, dagli animali, ourselves from animals. X. In suppositive or conditional phrases, the imperfect of the indicative in English — had, toas, or were — is rendered in Italian by the imperfect of the subjunctive; as, — Se io avessi questi dendri, glieli If I had this money, I would presterei incontanente, lend it to you immediately. Chi starebbe meglio di me, se Who would be more happy than quei dendri josser miei ? I, if that money was mine ? Remark. — Some conjunctions require the subjunctive mood ; as, Ajfinchi, in order that ; benche, though ; senza ch£, without ; dato che, suppose. READING LESSON. E c6sa rara che s' incontri un giureeonsulto che litighi, un mddico che prenda medicina, e un teologo che sia bu6n cristiano. Fleecier era figlio d' un droghiere. Dicono che in un momenta di malavdglia, un v&covo gli rimproverasse la vilta dei su6i na- tali, e che Flechier gli rispondesse : Monsignore, v' e quests differenza fra vdi e me, che se v6i f6ste nato nella bottega di mia padre vi sar^ste anc6ra. Tre gi6rni dopo la m6rte di Caterina di Francia, il predica- t6f e Lincestre cosi dall' alto del pergamo la raccomandava agli THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 157 astanti: "La Regina madre e m6rta, la quale, vivendo, fece m61to, male, e per me cr^do molto piu male che b^ne. In quest' oggi si presenta una difficolta, che consiste in sapeVe se la chi&a cattolica de\a pregare per lei che visse tanto male, e cosi sp&so sostenne la eresia, quantiinque si dica che in ultimo sia stata con n6i, e non abbia acconsentito alia morte d& ndstri principi. Su di che io d£vo dirvi, che se volete recitarle un pater ed ave cosi a casaccio, fate v<5i ; varra per quello che pud valdre : e lo rim£t- to alia vostra liberta." EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION. 1. As a countryman was one day walking in the streets of Paris, he passed by a broker's shop ; and, not seeing any thing but a man occupied in writing, he was anxious to know what busi- ness he did. He entered, and asked what they sold. " Asses' heads," answered the money-changer. " You must do good busi- ness," immediately replied the countryman, " since you have only your own left." 2. Semiramis ordered the following inscription to be engraved upon her tomb : " Let the king who has need of money demol- ish this tomb, and he will find a treasure." Darius caused the tomb to be opened: instead of money, he found 7 this other in- scription : " If thou hadst not been a bad man, and of insatiable avarice, thou wouldst not have disturbed the ashes of the dead." 3. A Turkish ambassador asked Lorenzo de Medecis why they did not see as many fools in Florence as in Cairo. Lorenzo pointed to a monastery, and said, " See where we shut them up." 4. A man having consulted the philosopher Bias, to know if he should marry, or lead a life of celibacy, he answered, " The woman you marry will be pretty or homely : if she is pretty, you will marry a Helen ; if she is homely, you will marry a Fury : so you would do better not to marry. ' VOCABULARY. 1. Was walking, girando; passed, passd ; seeing, scorgendo ; was anxious to know, eb be voglia di, etc. ; did, facesse ; entered, entrd ; sold, vendesse ; you must do, etc., ne abbiate un gran con- sumo ; left (remains), rimdne. 2. Demolish (make to demolish), fdccia demolire ; will find, trovera. 3. Did see, vedessero ; pointed, additd ; we shut, rinchiudidmo. 4. Should marry (if he had to take a wife) ; will marry, mene~ rete. 14 158 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. conveesazi6ne. Che cosa domandd egli ? Che diceste voi ? Che volete sapere ? Qudndo ritornerete ? Chi sarebbe stdto generoso se fos- se nato ricco f Che disse Maria ? Che cosa e rdraf Percke vi maraviglidte voi ? Ese to av'essi bisdgno di danaro ? Se io avevo ben studidto. Non so s' io debba dir di si o di no. Vdglio sapere chi ella sia. Pub essere ch' io ritorni domani. II pdvero che si mostra riconos- cente di un benefizio. Se io fossi ricca, so ben io quel che avr'ei a fare. E cosa rara che s' incontri un medico che prenda medicina. Perche voi avete venduto quel cavdllo. Se sapeste quant io »' dmo, m' avreste domanddto di prestar- vene. THE INFINITIVE, GEEUND, ETC. 159 CHAPTEK XXV. THE INFINITIVE, GEEUND, PEESENT AND PAST PAR- TICEPLES. MNEMONIC EXEBCISE. Spesso la veritd sta occulta, Che cdsa avete sentito dire ? . Ho sempre odidto V adulazibne, II fudco e spar so in tiitta la na- tura, Bisbgna anddre cduto nel par- Idre, Giunto alia porta, la trdvai chiusa, I Toscdni sdno acutissimi nel motteggidre, Alprimo vederla la sorpresa mi ha tradito, Lo sperdre neW awenire e paz- zia, La foUa crescente sboccdva da ogni parte, H parldr pbco, il fare assdi, e'l non lauddre se stesso, sbno virtu rare, Guarddti dal vantdre le cose tue, Una bwrla per essere delta fudri di tempo pub diventdre un offesa, Si pud dire quella essere vera arte che non appare essere arte, Non il comincidre, ma il perse- verdre, e degno di lode, Truth is often concealed. What have you heard said ? I have always hated flattery. Fire & spread throughout all nature. It is necessary to be careful in speaking. When I arrived at the door, I found it shut. The Tuscans are very sharp at raillery. Surprise betrayed me when I first saw her. It is foolish to place one's hopes on the future. The swelling crowd poured in from all parts. To speak little, to do much, and not to praise one's self, are rare virtues. Be careful not to boast of thy actions. An untimely joke may become an offence. It may be said, that true art is that which does not appear to be so. It is not the commencing, but the persevering, which mer- its praise. 160 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. I. The infinitive takes the place of the third person when the phrase is composed of a principal proposition and a subordinate one, connected by the conjunction "that;" as, He said that the people ought not to be de- ceived, igli dice il pdpolo non DOVER essere ingan- ndto; it is said that time is the father of all truth, dicono il tSrnpo essere pddre di dgni veritd. This style, though very elegant and much used, is not adapted for common conversation. The above phrases may be trans- lated word for word ; as, JEgli dice che il pdpolo non dee Sssere inganndto. II. The pronouns Mi and iSi are used instead of egli and ilia with the infinitive ; as, 8a ogntino lui Sssere ' stdto maSstro di bel dire, everybody knows that he was a model of eloquence. s ^TII. The infinitive is used for the second person singu- lar of the imperative mood, when preceded by the negative particle non; as, — Non fare strepito, Do not make a noise. Non ti lusingdre, / Do not flatter thyself. did non temere, Do not fear that. Non mi toccdre, ribdldo ! / Do not touch me, rascal ! ^_TV. The infinitive may be used as a noun in the nomi- native case, or as regimen of the verb ; as, — Mi pidce molto il suo fare, His manners please me much. Nel danzdre, ella non ha jpdri In dancing, she has no equal nel mondo, anywhere. Dalparldr'e si conosce V interno We know the hearts of men hy degli uomini, their speech. V. The infinitive is used as follows by an able his- torian, in describing the movements of a camp preparing for an assault : Quindi Sra nel cdinpo un anddre* un * The Italians make frequent use of anddre, venire, and stare: the first two convey an Idea of movement ; the latter, that of rest. as, — PARTICIPLES. 161 venfae, un urtdrsi d' udmini e di cdrri un forbir d' drmi, un apparecchidre di mdcchine murdli, eke V dere ne Sra a mdlta distdnza introndto. Many English phrases may be translated literally ; It is a great folly to live poor, E gran pazzia il viver pdvero, in order to die rich, per morir rlxco. It is a virtue to say much in E virtu di dir molto in pocki few words, detti. THE PARTICIPLES. VXT. When the past participle * is joined to the verb e"ssere (to be) , or to such verbs as venire, restdre or rima- nSre, vedSrsi, etc., used in the signification of "to be," it should agree with the subject of the verb with which it is joined, in gender and number ; as, — JEssi eran di frbndi di querela They were garlanded with oak- inghirlandati, leaves. Ne erano le fdlte de' ViteUidni Nor were the faults of Vitel- punite, ma benpagdte, lius' troops punished, but well paid. VHT. But when the past participle is joined to the verb avere (to have), — if this verb is used, instead of essere, in the signification of "to be," or is used in the significa- tion of "to hold," "to possess," etc., as an active and not an auxiliary verb, — the participle agrees with the object of the verb in gender and number ; as, — *S" avea (for i era) messe alcune He had put some small stones pelruzze in boeca, in his mouth. Per non poterti vedere f avresti Thou wouldst have torn out (for ti saresti) cavdti gli occhi, thy eyes, not to see thyself. Vho che fordta avea (for tenea, One who had his throat pierced. possedea") la gola, * There are many participles in &to t ata, which are contracted by suppressing the at: these are — Accetto — a for accettato — a, accepted. Adatto — a for adattato — a, adapted. Carico — a for caricato — a, loaded, etc. 14* 162 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. IX. If the verb aytre, to which the past participle is joined, is used as an auxiliary verb in order to represent the idea of past time, which could be equally expressed by a single form of the verb to which the participle belongs, then this participle remains invariable ; as, — Gome w avrd ddto (or dard) As soon as I shall have given loro bgni cosa, every thing to them. Oercdto ho (or cercdi) sempre I have always sought a solitary solitdria via, way. Chi queste cose ha manifestdto "Who has told these things to (or manifesto) al maestro ? the master ? X. When the past participle is preceded by one of the pronouns mi, ti, ci, vi, si, il, lo, la, li, gli, le, ne, che, cdi, qudle, qudli, qudnti, as objects of the verb, the participle agrees with the pronouns, or the objects repre- sented by them, in gender and number ; as, — JaUa medesima me le ha dette She herself has told them to (or mi ha dette queste cose), me. II liberto diceva averla esso uc- The freedman said that he had cisa (or av'ere esso uccisa la killed her himself. donna), XI. The English present participle may be expressed in Italian, — 1. By the gerund of the corresponding verb ; as, — Veggendolo consumdre come la Seeing him waste away like neve al sole, snow in the sun. Dormendo gli pdrve di vedere la (Sleeping, or) whilst he was donna sua, asleep, it seemed to him that he saw his lady. 2. By the conjunction che, or the adverb qudndo, and a tense of the indicative mood ; as, — Poi ch' ebbi riposato il cdrpo Having rested my weary body. Idsso, Qudnd' ebbe detto do, riprese il Having said this, he took up tSschio misero co' dSnti, once more that miserable skull with his teeth. PARTICIPLES. 163 3. By a preposition and the verb in the infinitive ; as, — Consumd quella mattina in cer- He spent that morning in look- cdrli, ing after them. Credo che le suore sien tutte a I believe that the nuns are all dormire, (sleeping or) asleep. XTT. When the English present participle has before it a preposition, such as " of," " from," " on," " in," etc. , it is always rendered in Italian by the corresponding verb in the infinitive with a preposition. XIII. If the participle is preceded by the prepositions " of," " from," " with," they are expressed in Italian^ by the preposition di, attended by the infinitive; as, JEbbi il piacire di vedSrlo, I had the pleasure of seeing him. XIV. The preposition " on," before the participle, may be expressed by the prepositions di or in; as, — Si vdnta oV aver la Idro cono- He values himself on being ac- scenza, quainted with them. Nelpartire gli sowenne di lei, On his departure, he recollected her. The preposition " in " is rendered by a or in; as, — Avea nel quetdr popolo autoriia In appeasing the people, he had ed arte, both authority and art. Che a far rid volesse aitarlo, That he would assist him in doing that. XV. The prepositions "for," "without," "before," "after," etc., are literally translated. XVI. If the participle is preceded by the preposition " by," this preposition is generally omitted in Italian, and the participle rendered by the gerund of the correspond- ing verb ; as, — Gli scoldri imparano le r'egole Scholars learn the rules of a di una lingua studidndole, language by studying them. 1 64 ITALIAN GBAMMAR. XVLT. But if we wish to express the preposition, then the verb must be put in the infinitive, and " by " rendered by con; as, — II divino Giulio rintuzzd la se- The divine Julius checked the dizione del suo esercito col dir sedition of his army by only solo, "Ah, Quiriti!" saying, "Ah, Romans!" READING XESSON. Dio mi cre6 per amare ; io mi ricordo di un fanciiillo sensitivo, vago di solitiidine, abbandonare il trambusto della citta, e lontano nei cam pi voltarsi indietro a contemplarla, come l'Alghie'ri des- crive il naufrago che uscito fuori dal pelago alia riva, si vdlgo all' acqua periglidsa, e gudta ; egli si avvolgeva pei bdschi, udiva la v6ce arcdna che par. che mandi la natiira al siio Creature, ascol- tava comm6sso 1* armonia degli uccelli, ed invididva la v6ce 16ro per dantare anch' egli un inno di gl6ria, e le ali per accostdrsi al firmam^nto, perche gli aveVano detto il Padre del creato abitare nei cieli : quanto tesdro di affetto era nell' dnima di quel fan- ciiillo ! Appena la campana della sdra indicdva 1' ora dei m6rti, prosternato davdnti dlla immdgine di Gesu Cristo non s^nza ldcrime la supplicdva per le anime dei sudi defunti . . . per tutti quelli che purgandosi asp&tano di sollevarsi dlle gioie divine: egli aveva una pardla di confdrto per qualunque sconsolato. Ah! quel fanciiillo fui io. — Guerrazzi. EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION. 1. The ancients pretended that the greatest happiness was not to be born ; and the next, to die young. 2. The Epicureans denied the existence of the soul, and rec- ognized only physical principles : they said the gods did not en- ter into worldly things. 3. The philosopher Clednte earned his living by drawing water during the night, so that he might study by day (to come to study). 4. Apelles painted a bunch of grapes so natural, that several birds, seeing it, came to peck at it. 5. At Eome, a father emancipated his son by giving him a box on the ear. 6. In Paris, various academies are seen aiming at very differ- ent ends. There is the Academy of Music, which excites (moves) PARTICIPLES. 165 the passions ; and the School of Philosophy, to quiet them : the Fencing Academy, which teaches how to kill men ; and the Medi- cal Academy, to preserve life. 7. The painter Caracci, having been despoiled by certain thieves, knew so well how to delineate their physiognomy, and paint their faces, that they were discovered and arrested. VOCABULARY. 1. Pretended, pretendevano ; to be born, ndscere; to die, morire. 2. To deny, negdre ; recognized, ricondbbero ; they said, dice- vano. 3. Earned, guadagndva. 4. Painted, dipinse; came, vennero. 5. To emancipate, emancipdre ; box on the ear, schidffb. 6. Are seen, vedono ; moves, mudve ; to quiet, acchetdre ; to teach, insegndre ; to kill, ammazzdre. 7. To despoil, spoglidre ; to designate, disegndre ; discovered, scoperti. CONVEESAZI6NE. Che negdrono gli epicurei ? L' esistenza deW dnima. Che riconobbero essi ? Soltdnto i principj fisici. Che dicevano ? Dicevano gli dei non entrdre neUe cose di questo mondo. Di chi era BeWni maestro ? Di Tizidno. Che fece il pittdre Bellini per Egli dipinse la decoUazidne di Maometto secdndo ? San Giovanni Battista. Ne fu contento il sultano ? Loddndo la pittura, awerti V artista d' un errore. Come guadagndva la vita il Col cavdr dequa in tempo di filosofo Clednte ? notte per attendere alio studio di gidrno. A chi somigliano gli udmini in A un miserdbile principe do- generate ? mindnte suUe edste della Gui- nea. Perche ? Perche diceva ad alcuni Fran* cesi: " Si pdrla mblto di me in Frdncia ? " Che pretendevano gli anttchi ? Pretendevano, la prima felicita essere il non ndscere, la se~ cdnda, il mor'w presto. 166 ITALIAN GBAMMAR. CHAPTEE XXVI. THE VERBS ANDlRE, DARE, FARE, AKD STlRE.* MNEMONIC EXERCISE. Mi rittcresee di ddrvi disturbo, Fece vista di non intendere, Venite a stare con ndi, Gome state d' appetito ? A che dra si'ete sblito far colazio- ne? E un ragdzzo che non puo star fermo, . Sidmo cosi stdnche che non pos- sidmo piii, stare in piedi, Ditegli eh' egli faccia come vuo- le, II gusto degli uomini va sogget- io a moke vicende, Egli non pose gran fdtto cura a queUo ch' io dissi, to scelsi una mogMe secdndo il cuor mio, Non fate capitate della sua pa- rola,* Da noi si va in tavola dtte cin- que, Vi darb contezza del suo stdto, To V induco quanto so e posso, a stare allegro e a fdrsi dnimo, I am sorry to disturb you. He pretended not to hear. Come to live with us. How is your appetite ? At what hour do you generally breakfast ? He is a child who cannot keep still. We are so tired that we can no longer stand. Tell him that he may do as he likes. The taste of men is liable to many changes. He did not pay much attention to what I said. I took a wife after my own heart. Do not depend upon his word. We dine at five at our house. I will inform you of his situa> tion. I will induce him, as much as I can, to drive away melan- choly, and take courage. * And&re, dares stare, are the only irregular verbs of the first conjugation. In some of their compounds, they become regular ; as rianriare. trasanddre, etc., which are varied like amare. Fare is a contraction of faccre (now obsolete), of which it retains many forms. It is considered by some grammarians as belonging to the second conjugation, and is irregular in its compounds. VERBS. 167 ITALIANISMS WITH ANDARE (TO GO). %$uesta cdsa non va fdtta, Anddr dietro ad uno, Anddre a voto, in vdno, Anddre alia ventura, Anddre in coUera, Anddr sicuro, Lascidmo andare quisto, A lungo andare, Anddre alt'ero, lo so quel che va ditto, H sole va sotto, Anddre bene, Anddrne la vita, Tl mirito va congiunto cdUa mo- distia, Le ddnne vanno trattate con gentilezza, This thing ought not to be done. To follow some one. Not to succeed. To go without care. To get angry. To be sure. Do not speak of that. In the long-run. To be proud. I know what I must say. The sun sets. To succeed. To have one's life at stake. Merit is accompanied by mod- esty. "Women ought to be treated with courtesy. WITH DIRE (TO GIVE). Dare a cdmbio, Dare com/pimento, Dar da dormire, Dar da ridere, Dare de' cdlci, Dar fede, Dar luogo, Dar le vile a'vinti, Dar il bum anno, Dare il motto, Dar la mdno, Avere a dare, Ddrsi budn tirtvpo, Ddrsi V acqua ai piidi, Ddrsi a gdmbe, Ddrsi pensiire, Dar che dire, Dar giu, Dare una voce ad uno, Ddre in tdvola, Dare voce, To put out money at interest. To finish. To lodge. To give cause for laughter. To kick. To believe. To give an opportunity. To set sail. To wish a merry new-year. To give the word. To consent. To be in debt. To live a merry life. To praise one's self. To run away. To care for. To give occasion to talk. To lose one's credit. To call some one. To serve the dinner. To spread a report. 168 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. WITH FARE (TO DO). Fate che vinga da me, Fare le carte, Questo non fa per me, Aver molto a fare, Non ne ho a fare, Fdtevi a me, Far si alia finestra, Tre mesi fa, Una settimdna fa, Al far del giorno, Far hello, Non fa fdrza, Far certo, Fdtevi indietro, Far capo ad uno, Far del grdnde, Far fare uno, Fare una predica, . Far vita strelta, Far sua voglia, Che vi fa egli che venga o non vinga ? Bid him come to me. To deal at cards. This will not do for me. To be very busy. I have no need of it. Come near me. To look out of the window. Three months ago. A week ago. At the break of day. To set off. It is no matter. To assure. Go back. . To address some one. To be self-important. To cheat some one. To admonish. To live niggardly. To do as one pleases. What is it to you if he comes or not? WITH STARE (TO BE). Sto per partire, Qui sta il punto, State qudnto vi pidce, Dove state di casa ? Jl tutto sta, s' egli sia budno o no, La cdsa sta come vi dico, Stdre a pane ed dcqua, Gome state vdi ? Egli sta bene, Star cheto, Stdndo alia finestra lo vidi pas- sore, Sta come una stdtua di mdrmo senza parldre, Ditemi in che mddo sta che egli sia vdstro frateUd? I am on the point of leaving. This is the question. Stay as long as you please. Where do you live ? The point is, if it be good or not. The thing is as I tell you. To live upon bread and water. How do you do ? He is well. To be quiet. Whilst I was at the window, I saw him going by. He stands like a marble statue, without speaking. Tell me, how comes it that he is your brother ? VEKBJ3. 169 BEADING LESSON. IlfuAco t V acqua e V ondre, H fu6co, F acqua e F on6re, f&cero un tempo comunella insieme. II fuoco. non pud mai stare in un luogo, e F acqua anche sdmpre si mudve ; onde tratti dalla 16ro inclinazioue, indiissero F onore a far viaggio in eompagnia. Prima dunque di partirsi, tiitti e tre dissero che bisognava darsi fra loro un segno da potersi ritrovare, se mai si fassero scostati e smarriti F uno dall' altro. Disse il fu6co : " E se mi avvenisse mai qu^sto caso che io mi segre- gassi da v6i, pon^te ben mdnte cola dove voi vedete fumo; qu^sto e il mio segnale e quivi mi troverete certam6nte." — " E me," disse F acqua," se v6i non mi vedete, non mi cercate cola d6ve vedr&e seccura o spaccature di terra, ma d6ve vedrete salci, ontani, canmicce o erba molto alta e verde ; andate costa in traccia di me, e quivi saro io." — " Quanto a me," disse F onore, " spalancate ben gli occhi, e ficc&temegli beue add6sso e tenetemi saldo, perche se la mala ventura mi guida fuori'di cammino, sicche ib mi perda una volta, non mi trovereste piu." EXEBCISE FOE TBANSLATION. 1. A drop of water complained of remaining unknown in the ocean. Moved to compassion, a genius caused an oyster to swallow it. It became the most beautiful pearl of the East, and was the most splendid ornament of the Great Mogul's throne. 2. Milton, after he became blind, married, for his third wifej a woman who was very beautiful, but of a furious temper. A friend once said to him, that his wife was like a rose. " I can judge of the color of it," he replied, " only by the thorns." 3. Who would believe that smoking tobacco was in fashion with the English ladies in the sixteenth century ? Every day, when Queen Elizabeth rose, there were (one saw) thirty ladies seated in a circle around her, smoking pipes. The queen set (gave) them the example ; but one day she broke the pipe, say- ing, " "We will renounce a pleasure that evaporates in smoke." 4. A doctor was translating a work. They came to tell him that his wife was very sick, and desired to speak with him. " I have only one page to translate," said he ; " when I will come im- mediately." A second messenger came, and informed him that she was dying. " Two words more, and I have done," said the translator. " Go, return to her." A moment after, they came to tell him that she was dead. "lam very sorry for it," said he ; " ehe was a good woman : " and he continued his work. is 170 ITALIAN GKAMMAR. VOCABULARY. 1. Complained, si ddlse ; moved, mdsso ; caused (made), fece; became, divenne. 2. Become, divenuto ; furious, furibondo ; can, posso ; judge, giudicare. 3. Would believe, crederebbe ; one saw, si vedevano ; seated, seduto ; smoking pipes, pipdvano ; gave, ddva ; broke, spezzb ; we will renounce, rinunzieremo ; evaporates, svapdra. 4. Was translating, stdva traducendo ; they came, vennero ; will come, verrd ; came, venne ; she was dying, era dgli estremi; go, anddte ; return, torndte ; I am sorry, me ne rincr'esce ; con- tinued, continud. C ON VERS AZIONE. A chi sono cdri i ndmi del Sdr- Son tdnto cdri aW Eurdpa pi, del Panda e del'Algardtti? qudnto all' Italia. Che bisdgna fare per I' infortu- Bisdgna compiangerlo e soccor- nio ? rerlo se si pud. Per reggere affl ingiustizia degli TJn gran cordggio. udmini che e necessdrio ? Chi fu AMo Maurizio ? U primo celebre stampatore che sia stdto in Europa. E il Z'eno ed il Goldoni f Sdno i pddri del drdmma e della commedia iialidna. Chi fu Bembo ? H primo legislator e della lin- gua italiana. Come si chiamava anticamente Partenope, nome di una Sirena Ndpoli ? che credesi dbbia fonddta la citta. Che si dice della potenza Vene- Etta ha arricchitaV Italia el' zidna? ha dife'sa gran tempo ddi Bdrbari. ADVERBS. 171 CHAPTER XXVH. ADVERBS. MNEMONIC EXERCISE. Vi racconterd la cdsaper minuto, Osservdte minutamente ogni cdsa, Per dra non pbsso dirvi di piu, Dove andate cosi per tempo ? Dite da vero, oppure burldte ? Dove si va cost in fr'etta ? Cattiva erba ndsce dappertutto, U tempo possa presto, Mi prime assdi di parldrgli, Veniie quanto piu presto potete, V ing annate di gran lunga,' Questa non e gia cdlpa vostra, Gli udmini imitano molto, e ri- fiettono pdco, Chi obledisce alia cieea, spesso si pente, CM sempre ride, spesso ingdn- na, Le sue cose vdnno di bene in meglio, Jo non vi voglio neppur guar- ddref Gli ho reso canto appuntino di ogni c6sa, Di rdro il medico pigKa medi- cine, Nbn Usogna mdi parldre a cd- so, Me ne ricorderd per un pezzo, Ddnde venite f Dove andate ? I will relate the affair minutely. Observe every thing minutely. I cannot tell you any more now. Where do you go so early ? Are you in earnest, or joking ? Where are you going so quickly ? Weeds grow everywhere. Time 1 passes quickly. I much need to speak to him. Come as soon as possible. Tou are greatly mistaken. This is not your fault. Men imitate much, and reflect little. He who obeys blindly, often repents. He who always laughs, often deceives. His affairs become better and better. I do not wish even to look at you! I have rendered an exact ac- count of every thing. The physician rarely takes medicine. We should never speak at ran- dom. I .shall remember it for a long time. Whence do you come ? Where are you going ? 172 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. ADVERBS. I. The greater portion of the Italian adverbs are formed of a feminine adjective and the noun mente, manner (from the Latin mens) ; as, Ddtta, learned ; dotta-minte, learn- edly ; sdvia, wise ; savia-mSnte, wisely ; ddlce, sweet ; dolce-mSnte, sweetly. If the adjective ends in le or re, the final e is dropped, for the sake of euphony, in the formation of the adverb : as, FedSle, faithful; fedel-mtnte, faithfully; maggidre, greater ; maggior^minte, greatly. II. These adverbs have their comparatives and super- latives formed from the comparatives and superlatives of the adjectives ; as, Piil sincSra, more sincere ; piil sincer- amSnte, more sincerely ; mSno felice, less happy ; ni6no feliceminte, less happily ; prudentissima, very prudent ; prudentissirnaminte, very prudently. III. Some adverbs are mere adjectives> and are used also in their comparatives and superlatives ; as, Ohidro {chiaraminte) , clearly; piil chidro, more clearly; schv- itta (schiettame'nte) , candidly ; mSno schiStta, less candidly; triste (tristarnSnte) , sadly; tristissimt >t tt yesterday morning, last evening, to-day. in our days, this morning, this evening, to-night. to-morrow morning, to-morrow. ADVERBS. 173 Posdrmdm the day after to-morrow. Gudri, not long since. Posdomdne 1 » » 11 11 Omdi, now. Inndnzi, before. Oramdi, Didnzi, „ Oggimdi, a Prima, I* Quasi, almost. Dietro, afterward. Circa, about. Ddpo, n Incirca, a Pdi, then, since, afterward. Intdrno, ' a Dipdi, a ii ii Tdrdi, late. Dappdi, » ii >i Pertempo, soon. Pdscia, a « » Presto, quick. fndi, then, afterward. Addgio, slow. Qulndi, a n Mdntre, whilst. Appresso, >i ii Intdnto, in the mean time Inftne, in fine. Frattdnto, a a a a Da capo, once more. Trattdnto, »» a it » Gia, already. Dacche, since. Di gia, Finche,, until. Mai, never. Qudndo, when. Giamm&i, a Tuttavia, still. OF PLACE. Qui, here, hither. Ovtinque, wherever. Quit, Li, there, thither. Dovtingue, 6gni ddve, Altrdve, everywhere. La, « a elsewhere. Costi, there near you. Altrdnde, a Costa, Avdnti, before. Coh, there, thither. Davdnli, a Cola, Diaro, behind. Su, Tip'.' Didi&ro, n Giu, down- Indiel.ro, back. Quivi, there. Addietro, a OR, n Sdpra, upon, above. tvi, Sdtto, • under, below. tndi, thence. Abbdsso, below. Quinci, from hence. Entro, within. Qulndi, from thence. Dtnlro, 71 Quassie, here above. Fudri, without. Quaqqiu, here below. Fudra, a 4 w lnsu, upward. Difudri, • from without. Ingiu, downward. Difudra, Alldto, a a Lassu, there above. aside. Laggik, Colassu, there below. Accdnto, 17 there above. Attdrno, around. Colaggiii, there below. Dattdrno, 17 Costaggiu, there below near you. RimpeVo, opposite. Costinci, from thence. Dirimpdtto a Ove, where. I/tingi, far. Ddve, a 6ltre, beyond. Ddnde, whence. IB* 174 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. OF ORDER. Prima, Dipdi, Quindi, Infine, In afro, Alia JUa, first. Assierne, then. r Insietne, afterward. A vice'nda, finally. Al tutio, by turns. Alrov&cio, in a row. Sossdpra, together. n by turns, altogether, the reverse, topsy-turvy. Pitt, more. M€no, less. Mdnco, „ Assdi, much. Abbdstdnza, enough. A sujjieienza, „ OF QUANTITY. Nitrite, nothing. Davantdggio, more. Alpiu, at the most. Almeno, at least. Almdnco, „ „ Male, Appeha, A gdra, A cdso, A tdrto, well. badly. hardly. purposely. emulously. by chance. wrongly. OF QUALITY. Brancoldne, Carpdne, A cavalcidne, Tentdne, Boccdne, crawlingly. on one's knees, upon all fours, astride over, gropingly, with one's face downward. OF AFFIRMATION. Si, Gia, Bene, Invero, Davvero, Da dovero, In verita, yes. yes, certainly. well. indeed, truly, in truth. Si, bene, 40, Appiinto, Volentieri, Benvolentieri, Malvolentieri, yes, indeed, yes, truly, in faith, just. willingly, rery willingly, unwillingly. OF NEGATION. No, Mai, Mainb, Certo no, Nongia, no, not. never, no, indeed, certainly not. not, not at all. Nonmdi, Mica, Nonmica, Per nulla, Niehteaffdtto, never, not. not at all. by no means, nothing at alL Fdrse, Forsechi, Pub e~8sere, Pub ddrsi, perhaps. » may be. OF DOUBT. Per accidente, Per sdrte, Per avventura, perchance. ADVEKBS. 175 OF COMPARISON. Si, so, thus. CoA, „ „ Cdme, as. Siccdme, so, as. Piii, more. Me'no, less, much. Vlappiu, a great deal more. Vieppiu, „ „ „ „ Viammgno, a great deal less. Viemmeno, „ „ „ „ A gulsa, like. A mddo, „ Al pdri, „ OF INTERROGATION. 6ve? where? Che? how? Ddve9 where? whither? Cdme? how? Ddnde? whence? Perche? why? Qudndo? when? Qudnto? how much? OF CHOICE. Ami, rather, sooner. Prima, „ „ Piupre'sto, rather, sooner. Piuttdsto, „ OF DEMONSTRATION. E~cco, here or there is ; lo ! hehold ! Eccoqul, here is, here are. Eccoqua, „ „ „ „ EccoTi, EccogR, Eccola, there is, there are. V. A list of the adjectives which are used in Italian aa adverbs : — Fdrte, Sp&so, Sddo, Alto, Cdi-to, Triste, Ddlce, CMdco, Sckie'tto, Pidno, Tdrdo, Lento, PreSto, Prdnto, Tdsto, Rdtto, Tdnto, very much. often. fast, hard. softly. certainly. sadly. sweetly. clearly. candidly. low, softly. late. slowly. soon. readily. speedily. >t so much. Hiiro, Sdlo, TiMo, Pdco, Mdlto, Trdvpo, Bella, Budno, Meylio, Peggio, Apdrto, Subito, Sialro, Dime'sso, Somme'sso, Victno, Lontdno, rarely. only. all. little. much. too much. handsomely. very well. better. worse. openly. immediately. surely. lowly. humbly. near. far. In order to know when these words are adjectives, and when adverbs, it is sufficient to observe, whether they 178 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. stand by themselves, or are added to or used for a noun : for, in the former case, they are always adverbs ; and, in the latter, adjectives. VI. Besides the above adverbs, there are some expres- sions called adverbial phrases; chiefly the following : — Di siibito, JJi bdtto, In un baldno, In un bdtter d' dcchio, Pdco fa, Fra pdco, Un pdzzo fa, Delh vdlte, AW improwrfso, AW awem&re, A minuto, Di frdsco, Di budn grddo, Mio malgrddo, Sdnsa meno, Qudnto prima, A bdtto studio, A beila pdsta, A mdno che, Da per iffitto, Per dgni ddve, Ad un irdtto, suddenly, presently, in an instant, in the twinkling of an eye. a little while ago. in a short time, some time ago. at times, unexpectedly, in future, in detail, newly, willingly, against my will, positively, very soon, designedly. unless. everywhere. at once. Di rddo, Di rdro, Infdtli, Difdtti, Digran hinga, A tango anadre, A piu potere, Di mdla vdglia, A un di prdssa, D' alldra in qua, D' dra inndnzi, In qudl mdntre, I Di pUnto in punto^ Di punto in bianco, Di qudndo in qudndo, Di trdtto in irdtto, Di tdnto in tdnto, H piu per lo pili, seldom, rarely. in fact. by far. in the loDg-run, in time, with all one's might, unwillingly, almost. since that time, henceforth, in or at that time, exactly, point-blank, now and then. on the whole, at the utmost BEADING LESSON. La Pivera CUc.a. E br&na 1' aria — per le contrade, A fi6cche a fidcche la neve cade ; E la in gindcchio pr^sso la chiesa, Geme una v^cchia d<5nna proste'sa: Orba ddgli dcchi, la poveretta Attende il pane, che a lei si g^tta • Fate limdsina, pietdsa gente, F$.te limdsina alia dolente ! Voi non sapdte che quella ddnna, Macero il viso, lorda la gonna, De' suoi concdnti coll' armonia Di cento p6poli F alme rapia ; ADVERBS. 177 Oh quanta invidia ai fortunati Che d' un sorriso rend^a be&ti ! Fate lim6sina, pietosa gente, Fate lim6sina alia dolente ! Oh qudnte v61te fu6r de' te&tri L' imm^nsa fdlla d£gl' idolatri Fra mille plausi le fea codazzo Fino alia p6rta del suo palazzo, E rivenjnte stendea il gindcchio Perche scenddsse dall' aur£6 c6cchio ! Fate limosina, pietosa gente, Fate limosina alia dolente ! Quante dovizie spandeva intorno II stio magnifico vasto soggidrno ! Brdnzi, co!6nne, vasi, cristalli, Argento ed <5ro, cocchi e cavalli . . . Di fl6ri e gemme da tutte b&nde, Sovra i siioi pdssi piov^an ghirMnde . . . Fate limdsina, piet3sa g^nte, Fate limosina alia dolente ! Ma un di fra 1' dnsie d' un duolo atr6ce Perde la vista, perde la voce — Ahi sventurata ! or per le strdde Va mendicando 1' altriii pietade, Ella che un gi6rno per chi gemea De' sudi tesori 1' arche schiud^a ! Fate limosina, piet<5sa g^nte, Fate limosina alia doldnte ! Ma il fr^ddo adddppia — gelida e sp^ssa La neVe c6pre la genuftessa, Che, pur pregando, intirizzita Stringe il Rosario fra le sue dita — Perche la misera confidi anc6ra Nella pietade del ciel, che impldra, Fate limdsina, piet<5sa g^nte, Fate lim6sina alia dolente ! A. Fusinato. 178 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. EXEKCISE FOB TRANSLATION. 1. A truly courageous man is he who has a knowledge of danger. We often see men who neither fear nor are afraid of death : yet we cannot call them courageous ; because (being), ignorant of danger, they rush forward foolishly. 2. Francis I., going out from the council which had determined upon war with Italy, met his buffoon, who said to him, " Sire, it seems to me that your councillors are fools." — "Why?" asked the king. " Because," he replied, " they have been so long dis- cussing what part of Italy they intend to enter, and have never said a word about the part to go out. Therefore, O sire ! take care not to go there at all." A month after this, Francis was a prisoner in Pavia. 3. There are many people who think that they can learn the Italian language in three months ; and (these people), after six months' study, do not know how to say, " I have just written ; the clock has just struck ten ; I should like to know it for cer- tain." VOCABULAET. 1. We see, si vedono ; they rush, spingono. 2. Going, uscendo ; met, incontro ; have (been discussing) discussed, hdnno discusso ; said, detto ; take care, awertite. 3. Think, stimano ; do know, sdnno ; I should like, vorrei. CONVEKSAZIONE. Che cosa dimandd egli ? Jl perche. Che dra e ? Sdno appena battute le died. perche. non siete venuto ? Perche sdno stdto alia villa. E quella dunque la vdstra arnica ? E ben lei. Av'ete vino, pane, 'formdggio, Non ho prdprio nulla da ddr- qudlche cdsa ? ' vi? Non avete neppure una scodeUa Non ho nulla in verita. di Idtte ? E dunque un anno e mezzo ch' No, non sono ancora quindici eUa e partita? mesi? Dove dimdra il suo Signor pd- Dimdra qui vicino. dre? Che effetto fa la medicina ? Guarisce talvdlta e consola spes- so. Qudndo condsce uno il valor e Qudndo e asciutto (dry) ilpoz- deW dcqua ? zo. CONJUNCTIONS, AND INTERJECTIONS. 179 chapter xxvrn. CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS. MNEMONIC EXERCISE. „ Via, via ; meno cidrle ! Oime ! eke vedo mdi ? Deh ! non lo fate, Oh Mlla! son venuto per questo, Qudndo e cosi, vado via, Cosi d{co ; anodr io, La edsa ando pur cosi, JEhi, quel giovine ! jLnimo, dnimo bdsta cosi ! JEhi, queUa giovine, Evwva, il nostra Sempronio! love V ho pur ditto, Non ha pure mostruto di conos- cermi, Oh! se potessi ridere, rider'ei pur di cuore, Al can che fugge, ognwn grida, ddgli, ddgli, Per Bdcco, piu ci penso, e meno so comprendere il mo- tivo, Questo partito e il miglidre; dnzi, il solo ciii debba appi- glidrmi, E cosi, che edsa faccidmo f Addio, cdro : dove si va ? Via, lion lo sgriddte : poverino 1 lo vi dmo, perche lo meritdte, Come, come ; less talk ! Alas ! what do I see ? Do not do it, I beg of you. Indeed ! I came on purpose. Since it is so, I shall go. I say so ; even I. It went off well. Here, young man ! Courage ! that will do. "Well, miss. Bravo, our Sempronio ! I have, however, told you. He did not even appear to know me. Oh ! if I could laugh, I would laugh willingly. When a dog runs, people cry after him, after him. Truly, the more I think of it, the less I understand the motive. This part is the best ; nay, the only one which I ought to take. , Well, what are we going td do? Adieu, my dear: where are you going? There, don't scold him: poor boy! I love you, because you deserve it. 180 ITALIAN GRAMMAK. CONJUNCTIONS IN COMMON USE. E, and. Nonostdnte, 0, or, either. Nondimeno, Ne, nor, neither. Nientedimeno, Se, if, whether. Con tutto cib, still, nevertheless, Ma, but. Non per tdnto, • notwithstanding, Peril, „ Non per questo, for all that. Che, that. Cib non ostdnte, Pike, yet, nevertheless. Cibnondimeyio, Gia, yet, already. Tuttavia, Anzi, nay, rather, on the Non gia, not at all, not in- contrary. deed. Anc/ie, also, even. Non solo, 1 Non che, J not only, not mere- Anco, „ „ ly- Eziandio, „ „ Purche, provided. Altresl, „ „ A meno che, unless. Ancdra, also, even, again. Ami che, rather, sooner. ^ Epptire, yet, nevertheless. Ossia, or, either. Anzi che no, rather than not, rather so than Ovvero, „ „ otherwise. Oppiire, „ _ „ Nemmeno, neither, not even. Si,^ so, thus. Cost, „ Nemmdnco, „ „ „ Cdme, as, like. Neppure, „ „ „ Siccdme, ,» » Nednche, „ „ „ Sicche, so, thus, wherefore. Tampdco, „ „ „ Cos\ che, », » j* Se mdi, if ever, if indeed. Talche, so, so that. Se pure, „ „ Glacche, since. Se perh, if however. Cioe, that is. Se non, unless, except, but. Cioe a dire, that is to say. Se non che, „ „ „ Vdle a dire, ty t. Accib, ] Almeno, at least. Acciocche, in order that, to the Almdnco, Affine, end that. Di piu, Indttre, moreover. Affinche, besides,besides this. Ancorche, even that. Oltrecche, Contuttoche, „ „ Oltraccib, Che, for, why, because. D' altrdnde, >) >> Perche, „ „ Dunque, then, therefore. Poiche, ) because, since, as, Posciache, ) after. Perocche, 1 Adilnque, dnde, ) Ladnde, > wherefore, where- Imperocche, Perciocche, Imperciocche, because, whereas, as, since. Quindi, ) Percib, upon. therefore, for which reason. Conciosiacche, J In sdmma, } In fine, J in short, in conclu- Qiiantunque, although. sion. Sebbene, 7J Sia che, whether, or, either. Benche, „ Vudi, Comeche, „ Del resto, otherwise, besides. Avvegnachi, „ Per dltro, » » CONJUNCTIONS. 181 Tdnto, Quanta, Qudndo, Qudna" dnche, In guisa che, In mddo che, In maniera che, Di mddo che, Di maniera che. when, even when. so that, in such a manner. Intdnto, \ in the mean time, mean* Frattdnto, Mentre, Mentrecche, Sdlvo, Ecce'tto, Trdnne, Fuorche, Fdrse, 6ra, while, whilst, whilst, whilst that. save, saving, except. perhaps, now. I. PHre is often used in the sense of anc6ra (even) , and s6lo (only) . II. Perche has four significations : 1. In an interroga- tive phrase, it has the meaning of "why;" as, Perchi anddte vid? why do you go away? 2. Followed by a verb in the subjunctive, it signifies "in order that;" as, JNbn vi ho ddto il dendro perchi lo spendidte stibito, I did not give you the money that (in order that) you should immediately spend it. 3. It is used for "though ;" as in the phrase of Dante, Non lascidvam I' anddr, perche e' dicisse, Let us not cease walking, although he speaks. 4. It also signifies " because ; " as, Perchi ri- dSte? Perchi ho vdglia di ridere, Why do you laugh? Because I wish to laugh. III. Anzi is sometimes used for " before ; " as, Anzi timpo, dnzi V 6ra, dnzi la mia mdrte, before the time, before the hour, before my death. IV. Mintre, nel mSntre che or mSntre che, in tSmpo che, signifies "whilst" or "whilst that;" as, MSntr' egli cantdva, io balldva, whilst he sung, I danced. V. Many conjunctions, as nondimino, cib non os- tdnte, etc., contain in themselves a pronoun, a prepo- sition, an adverb, etc. ; but, from their office of joining sentences together, they are commonly reckoned amongst conjunctions, though in fact they are but conjunctive phrases. .16 182 ITALIAN GEAMMAB. INTERJECTIONS IN COMMON USE. Ah! Eh! e! Ihl Oh! ol Uh! Ami Ma 6hi! dil tildl Dehl Doh! Ah, ah I Eh, eh! Oh, oh! Poh! Puh ! ptt 1 JEia ! Ola! Cost! Si! Gia! Pare 1 Cdme! Su! 1 Orsu! I Su, su! \ Vtal J Via, via I Eh via! Vergdgna ! Oibb! Animo ! Cordggio 1 Fdte cudre 1 Bdne! Bravo 1 Budno ! Viva! Eh viva ! evviva ! Cdpperi! ) Cdppita ! > Poffdre! ) Ohbella! j£cco! ah! ha! alas I eh! ih! oh ! ho ! uh! ah! alas! [there! here! ho hey! ho ah! oh! ah ! alas ! ah ! alas ! pray ! prithee ! oh! pshaw! ah, ah ! eh, eh ! oh, oh 1 poh! pu ! pooh ! halloo ! holla ! ho there ! so ! thus ! yes, certainly ! yet! how ! how then ! why ! why so ! up, up ! come ! come then! away! fie ! fie upon ! for shame ! oh, fie ! oh, fough ! courage! cheer up! well! bravo! very well! good! long live ! huzza! ay ! heyday ! mar- ry! fine! lo! behold! Ahimi! aim's i Ehimel eime! Ohime! oimel Ome! Oilei Oise! Gudi! A iiito 1 ODio! . Lasso! Ldsso me ! Ahildsso! Pdvero me ! Misero me! Meschtno me! Dolente me ! me bedto ! me felice 1 Bedto me 1 Felice me ! Alto! Sta! Ohe! Gudrda ! Ldrgo ! Pidno, 1 Addgio, j Zi! zttto! Chdto! Non piul Bdsta ! Silenziol Tacdte! An date ! Baddte ! AU'erta! Stdie all' drta Di grdzia ! Per carita ! Per amdr delcieio Merce, \ Misericdrdia, J Possibile ! Appunto ! Pensdte 1 ,\ alas (me) ! alas (thee) ! alas (him or her) ! woe! help! O Heavens I alas ! wretched that I am ! unfortu- nate that I am ! wretched me 1 poor me 1 happy that I am I happy me ! halt! stop! take care ! have care ! beware I softly! gently I slowly! whist! hush! quiet ! still ! enough ! silence ! away! mind ! have care ! beware ! pray! for charity's sake ! ' for heaven's sake ! mercy! mercy upon us ! is it possible ! exactly ! just 1 just think!* * It is important to observe, that, as some of these interjections are used to express different and even contrary emotions or affections of the mind, their exact signification can only be determined by the sense of the words which accompany them, or give rise to the exclamation. INTERJECTIONS. 183 The interjections Idsso, prfvero, miser o, meschino, bedto (me /) , are mere adjectives ; and, when used by a female, take the feminine termination, — Idssa, pdvera, misera (me/), etc. ; and in the plural make Idssi, p6v- eri (ndi/), etc., for the masculine; and Idsse, pdvere (ntfif), etc., for the feminine ; as, — Lussa me ! in che maJS dra ndc- Alas ! in what evil hour was I qui ? born ? Miseri ndi! che sidm, se Idd'w Miserable that we are ! what ci Idscia ? becomes of us, if God for- sakes us ? JBrdvo, zitto, chito, are also adjectives ; and when used in speaking to a female, or to more than one male or female, follow the same rule ; as, — Brdva ! come quando ? Bravo ! as when ? Zitti, un po' ! Hush, a little ! JBrdvo is also used in its superlative, and makes bravissimo, bravissima, bravissimi, bravissime, " bravis- simo." READING LESSON. La Rondinrtla. Rondinella pellegrina Che ti posi in sul verdne Eicantando 6gni mattina Qudlla flebile canz6ne, Che vu6i dirmi in tda favella Pellegrina rondineHa ? Solitaria nell' oblio, Dal tuo sposo abbandonata, Piangi f6rse al pianto mio Vedovella sconsolata ? Piangi, piangi in tua faveHa, Pellegrina rondin411a. Pur di me m&ico infelice Tu afle penne almen t' affidi. 184 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. Sc6rri il ldgo e la pendice, Empi F aria de' tu6i gridi, Tutto il gidrno in tua favella, Lui chiamdndo, o rondinella ! Oh, se dnch' io ! Ma lo contende Questa bassa angusta volta, Dove s61e non risplende, Dove F dria ancdr m' e tolta, D' 6nde a te la mia favella Giiinge appena, o rondinella ! II settembre inndnzi viene, E a lascidrmi ti prepaid : Tu vedrai lontane arene, Nudvi m6nti, nuovi mari, Salutdndo in tiia favella, Pellegrina rondinella. Ed io tutte le mattine Rikprdndo gli occhi al pianto Era le nevi e fra le brine Credero d' udir quel cdnto, Onde par che in tua favella Mi compianga, o rondinella. Una croce a primavera Troverai su qu^sto sudlo ; Rondinella in su la sera S<5yra a lei raccdgli il v61o : Dijle pdce in tiia favella, Pellegrina rondinella ! EXEECISE FOR TRANSLATION. 1. Lycurgus prohibited those who returned from a feast taking a light, in order that the fear of not being able to find their homes might prevent their becoming intoxicated. 2. There is nothing meaner than to see hypocrites launching their thunders against the weaknesses of humanity, whilst their heart is the sink of every vice. 3. Vespasian incurred the danger of being condemned to death, because he gaped while the fool Nero was singing on the stage in Rome. CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS. 1'85 4. During summer evenings, Dante was accustomed to sit upon a stone, which is still religiously preserved in Florence. One evening, a man unknowa to him passed before him, and said, " Sir, I have promised to give an answer, and know not how to get myself out of the difficulty : yon, who are so learned, can suggest it to me. "What is the best mouthful ? " Dante imme- diately answered, " An egg." A year after, at the same hour, Dante being seated on the same stone, the same man, whom he had not since seen, returned, and asked, '" With what ? " Dante, without hesitation, answered, " With salt." VOCABULARY. 1. Prohibited, vietd ; returned, torndvano ; might prevent, im- pedisse ; intoxicated, ubbriacdte. 2. Launching thunders, scaglidre i fulmvni ; sink, sentina. 3. Incurred (ran), corse; gaped, sbadigli&va. 4. Was accustomed, soleva ; unknown, sconosciuto ; to get out, etc., trwrmi d' off are ; can suggest, potreste mggerire ; mouthful, hoccone ; without hesitation, s'enza metier timpo in mezzo. CONVERSAZIONE. Qudl fa il regtilo che fece un Uno scudo, credendo forse con colonnello ad uno de siioi growth rid di ricompensdrlo di tdnia atieri che pugndndo valoro- perdita. sissimamente aveva perdute dmbe le brdccia ? Tale meschinitd non ecritb essa Gertamente, e con ragidne disse la sdegno del bravo solddlo ? al suo Colonnello — Credete forse ch' w non dbbm perditto che unpdio di gudnti? Quale fdma hdnno lasci&ta Im- Una tristissima fdma, perche domco XI. e Ferdinando d' furono entrdmbi crudeli eper- Arragona ? ftdi. Non si chiamdrono, il primo Si, e rid prdtoa che I' dmbra del cristianissimo e V dltro cattd- trdno pud coprlre imminsi lico ? delitti. Che rispose. Ddnte a chi gli do- Un udvo con sale. manddva qual fosse il miglior hoccone f 16» 186 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. ^tt^ili arg Bzxhz. Ax ire, to have. INFINITIVE MOOD.— Av&e, to have. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. koOTd, hai or at, haovd (due), I have. J abbi&mo (avimo), thou hast. 1 av&te, he has. f kdnno or anno, IMPERFECT TENSE. we have, you have, they have. io aveva or avia, tu avevi, igli aveva or avia, I had. 1 avev&mo, thou hadst. avevdte, he had. | av&uano (avieno), PERFECT TENSE. we had. you had. they had €bbi, avdsti, me, I had. 1 a/oimmo, thoo hadst. aviste, he had. | ibbero, FUTURE TENSE. we had. you had. they had. avrdj avr&i, avrd, I shall hare. 1 avremo, thou wilt have. avrite, he will have. | avrarmo, CONDITIONAL MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. we shall have, you will have, they will have. avret (avria), avristi, avr&be {avria), I should have. thou wouldst have. he would have. avremmo, avriste, avr&bbero (av/iano we could have, you should have. , they would have. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. the io abbia, eke tu abbia or abbi, che egli abbia, if I may have. if thou may st have. if he may have. che abbi&mo, che abbiate, che abbiano, If we may have, if you may have, if they may have. IMPERFECT TENSE. the io avisstj eke tu avdssi, che igii av&sse, if I might have. if thou couldst have. if he would have. che avesshno, che aviste, che avissero (-mm) if we should have, if you might have. if they might have. IMPERATIVE MOOD. abbi tu, abbia egli, have thou, let him have. abbi&mo n6i, -abbiate v6i, abbiano iglino, let us have. have ye. let them have. GERUND. COMPOUND TENSES. a/vdndo, having. PARTICIPLES. avdnte, having. avuto, avuta (8. J, ) -^ avuti, avute (p.), ) avindo avitto, having had. io ho avitto, io aveva av&to, , w 6bbi avuto, to avrd avuto, io avr&i avuto, che io abbia avuto, che io ave'ssi avuti I have had. I had had. I had had. I shall have had. I should have had. if I may have had. , if I might have had. AUXILIARY VERBS. 18? A ssere, to be. INFINITIVE MOOD.— Asere, tote. to jiino, $Har «', to dro, 6a, fi» (fa), tart (/la), sarai. tard (fia,fie), INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT TEN SB. lam. thou art he is. 1 siamo (simo^ sicte (site), | sdno, IMPERFECT TENSE. I was. thou wast, he was. 1 travdmo (eramo), J eruvate, | erano, PERFECT TENSE. I was. thou wast, he was. 1 fkmmo, faste, 1 farono (fiinno), FUTURE TENSE. I shall he. thou wilt he he will be. 1 saremo, saHte, I sardnno (fiano) t CONDITIONAL MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. sardi (saria, fora), I should be. I sar&mmo, saristi, * thou wouldst be. J sariste, aardbbe {saria, JSra), he would be. j sardbbero (sanano), SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. che'xo sia, che tu sia, or sia, the egli sia, if I may be. if thou mayst be. if Jxe may be. PRESENT TENSE. we are. you are. they axe. we were, you were, they were. we were, you were. they were. we shall be. you will be. they will be. we should be. you should be. they should be che siamo, if we may be. die state, if you may be. die siuno, or sieno, if they may be. IMPERFECT TENSE. che \o fdssi {fassi), if I were, or should be. che tu jf&ssi, if thou wert. che egli fdsse, if he were. che fdssimo, if we were. che fdste, if you were. chefdssero (fdssino), if they were. sia, or sli tu, $'ia egli, tssdndo, IMPERATIVE MOOD. be thou, let him be. GERUND. being. PARTICIPLES. Stato, stata*(s.), I staii, stale (p.), f tssendo stato, having been. been. ■^r' siamo n6i, let us be. siate v6i, be ye. siano, or sieno dglino, let them be. COMPOUND TENSES. \o s6no statOj io era stato, io sard stato, io sardi stato, che io sia stato, eke io fossi stato, I have been. / I had been. I shall have been. I should have been. , if I may hare been. if I might have been. * The past participle of the verb issere always agrees with the subject in gender and number : thus we say, io sdno stato, if- the subject is masculine singular ; io s6no stata, If feminine singular j ndi siamo stdti, if masculine plural ; noi siamo state, if feminine plural ; ' and so on. 188 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. IJUgalar B&xh&. VARIATION OF ACTIVE VERBS. Active verbs, in the compound tenses, are varied with the auxiliary verb avere, to have. FIRST CONJUGATION. Amdre, to love. PARADIGM OF THE VERBS ENDING IN drp. INFINITIVE MOOD. Present. Past. am-&re f to love. | a/v&re amato , to have loved. Present. GERUND. 1 Past an>&ndo t loving. J avindo am&to t having loved. Present PARTI CIPLE. Past am-dnte (a.), aw.-a.nti (p.),* loving. am~&to (m. s am-ata (f s. ), am-dti (p.), loved. , am-ate (p.),* loved. INDICATIVE MOOD. SIMPLE TENSES. Present.. dm-o, dm-a, I love, or do love, thou lovest. he loves. am-iamoj am-ate, cnn-ano, we love, you love, they love. ho am-&va t am-avi, igli am-avcij Imperfect. I loved, or did love. J am-avamo^ thou lovedst. { am-avdte, he loved. j am-dvamo, we loved, you loved. they loved. am-Astiy am-d, Per I loved, or did love, thou lovedst. he loved. feet am-amm.0) we loved. am-dstej you loved. am-arono (am-dro), they loved. Future* am-erdrf am-era. I shall or will love. 1 am-eremo^ thou wilt love. I am-erdte^ he vfill love. | am-eranno^ we shall or will love. you will love, they will love. * The present participle of active verbs, like that of avere, agrees with the subject of tho proposition in gender and number. The past participle agrees, sometimes, with the object in gender and number. t The verbs of this conjugation in the future and the conditional change the a of their terminations for e, and make am-ero, instead of am-ard t etc. EEGTJLAB VERES. 189 ho amdto, kdi amdto , ha amdto , b au^f a amdto, Secon ibbi amdto , COMPOUND TENSES. Second Perfect I have loved. I abbidmo amdto, thou hast loved. auefe amdto, he, she, or it has loved. | kanno amdto. I had loved. Pluperfect | avevdmo amdto, we have loved, you have loved. they have loved. we had loved. I had loved. Future Anterior, word am&tOj I shall have loved SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. SIMPLE TENSES, Present che io dm-i (am-e), that I love, or may love. che tu dm-i, that thou lovest. che 6gtidm-i(am-e) t that he loves. che amAamo, che am-idte, che dm-ino, , che to am.-d.ssiy che tu am-dssi, che egli am-dsse, if I loved, or should love. it thou lovedst. if he loved. Imperfect. che am-dssimo, che am-aste, che am-assero (-ino), Perfect. COMPOUND TENSES. that we love, that you love, that they love. if we loved., if you loved, if they loved. che io dbbia amdto, that I have loved, or may have loved. Pluperfect che io avdssi amdto, if I had loved. CONDITIONAL MOOD. SIMPLE TENSE. Present. am^erei (am-eria), I should love. [ am-erimmo, we should love. am-eresti, thou wouldst love. am-eriste, you would love. am-eribbe (am-eria), he would love. | am-ere'bbero (amerioMo), they would love. COMPOUND TENSE. Past. avret amdto, I should, would, or could have loved, or might have loved. dm,-CL tu, am-i igli, IMPERATIVE MOOD, Iam4amo ndi, let us love. am-dte vdi, love ye. dm-ino eglino, let them love. Besides the foregoing changes of termination, there are some verbs of the first conjugation which undergo in some persons and. tenses a change of orthography. verbs ending in cidre, glare, drop the a, which follows c, g, whenever c%, gi, precede e, i; as, Bacidre, to kiss; fregidre, to adorn. Verbs ending in idre, in which ia form one syllable, drop the i whenever it is followed by another **; as, Noidre, to annoy. Verbs ending in idre, in which ia form two syllables, drop the i only when if would be followed by the vowels ia ; as, Invidre, to send. 190 ITALIAN GRA M M AR . Variation of the Verb Cerc&re. PARADIGM OF THE VERBS ENDING IN cdre. cerc-o, c4rc-a t INDICATIVE MOOD. Present* I search, or 'do search,. 1 cercn-i&m o , thou eeaTcheat. I cere-ate, he searches. ] cerc-ano, we search, you search, they search. ceres-erdy eerCR-er&if cercs.-erd i Future. I shall or will search. | cercB-erSfno t thou wilt search. | eercH-erete, he will search. ( cercB-eranno. we shall search, you will search. they will search. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. eke \o cercB-i {-«), that I search. the tu circn-ij that thou search. che igli cercH-t (-0), that he search. che cercB-ddmo t that we search. che cercB-iale 9 that you search., che cdrcn-inoj that they search. certB-eret [-er\a) t eercB-erisH^ eercs~crebbe t CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present* I should search, thou wouldst search, he would search. cercK-erermnOf cercB-ereste^ cercR-erebbero, we should search, you would search, they would search. cfrc-atU) cercB-i egli t IMPERATIVE MOOD. search thou, let him search. cercR-idmo n6i, cere-ate v6i, ccTcB-ino igliiiOy let us search. search ye. let them search. Tenses conjugated like those of the regular verb are omitted. REGULAR VEBBS. 191 Variation of the Verb Pregire. PARADIGM OP THE VERBS ENDING IN ffdre. preg^ prigm^ INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. I entreat, or do entreat. I pregH-i&mo t thou entreatest. I preg-ate, he entreats. | preg-ano, we entreat, you entreat, they entreat. pregK-erd, pregu-erau pregBrera^ I shall or win entreat. I pregH-er£mo t we shall entreat, thou wilt entreat. f pregs-erite, you will entreat- he will entreat. J pregK-er&imo, they will entreat* SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. the \o prgga-i (-e), that I entreat. eke tu pregB.*ij that thou entreat. the 6gUpr6gHri (~c), that he entreat. eke pregBri&mO) eke pregB.-iate y eke prdgn-ino, that we entreat. that you entreat. that they entreat. prigK-er&j pregH-eristij pregK-er4bbe 9 CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present. I should entreat. I pregs-er^mmoj thou wouldst entreat. I pregH-eriste^ he would entreat. | pregK-erebbero, we should entreat, you would entreat, they would entreat, preg-a tv, pregs4 eglif IMPERATIVE MOOD. entreat thou. let him entreat. pregTZ-iamo n6i 9 preg-dte vdi t pr6gK-4no igUno t let us entreat. entreat ye. let them entreat* 192 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. SECOND CONJUGATION. The verbs of this conjugation are commonly divided into two classes, — those ending in ere (long), accented, and those ending in ere (short), unaccented : both of these in the perfect have two terminations,, ei and eiti y except a few which have the. termination ei only. Variation of the Verb TemeVe. PARADIGM OF THE VERBS ENDING IN Ire (LONG), ACCENTED, AND OF THOSE WHICH, IN THE PERFECT, END IN U AND £tti. IKFINITTYE MOOD. Present, tent-ire, to fear Past. avere temuto, to have feared. tem-6ndo, fearing. GEROTD. I Past. I avindo temuto f having feared. PARTICIPLE. Um-6nte {$.), tem-enti (p.), fearing. Past.. temuto (in. s.) t tem&ti (p.), feared. tem«itta (fV s,) R %emMe (p.), feared. INDICATIVE MOQIK SIMPLE TENSES. Present. I fear, or do fear. I tem-4&mo^ thou fearest. J tem-ite^ he fears. | tcm-ono, Hm-O) tiftn-iy t&m-e. \o tem~6va or tem-6a, I feared, or did fear. I tem-ev&mo y tem-ivi, thou fearedst. tem-evdte^ igli tem-eva, he feared. | tem-ivano, Perfect, tem-'ki or tewi-ferri, I feared, or did fear. tem-dstij thou fearedst. tem-k or tem-ftTTX, he feared. tem-dmmO) tem-iste^ ««w-£rono, we fear. you fear, they fear. we feared, you feared, they feared. we feared, you feared. they feared. REGULAR VERBS. 193 tem-erd, tem-erdi, tem-erd, Future. I shall or will fear. I tem-$remo, we shall or will 1 thou wilt fear. tern-erfae, you will fear, he will fear. J tem-erunno, they will fear. ho temuto, COMPOUND TENSES. Second Perfect I have feared. | abbidmo temuto, we hare feared. io aviva temitto, 1 had feared, etc. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. SIMPLE TENSES. Present ehe io t&m-a, that I fear. ehe tu tem-a or -i, that thou fear eke egli tem-a, that he fear. eke tem-idmo, ehe tem-idte, eke tem-ano, that we fear. that you fear. that they fear. Imperfect ehe io tem-Sssij if I feared. ehe tu tem-dssi, if thou fearedst. ehe igli tem-isse, if he feared. ehe tem-e'ssvmo, if we feared. ehe tem-iste, if you feared. eke tem-cssero, if they feared. COMPOUND TENSES. Perfect ehe io dbbia temuto, that I hare feared. | eke io avissi temuto, if I had feared. COISDITIONAL MOOD. SIMPLE TENSE. Present. tem-eret (-eria), I should fear. tem-eresti, thou wouldat fear. tem-erebbe {-eria), he would fear. tem-er&mmo, tem-ere'ste, tem-eribbero, we should fear. you would fear, they would fear. COMPOUND TENSE. i Past avrti temuto, I should, would, or could have feared, or might hare feared. IMPERATIVE MOOD. t&m-itu, tem-a igH, fear thou, let him fear. tem-iamo n6i, tem-ite v6i, tcm-ano eglino, 17 let us fear. fear ye, let them fear. 194 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. Variation of the Verb Tdssere. PARADIGM OF THE VERBS ENDING IN ere (SHORT), UNACCENTED} AND OF THOSE WHICH, IN THE PERFECT, END IN H ONLY. IKFINITIVE MOOD. Present. \ Past, tess-ere] to weave. | avire tessitto, to have woven. GERUND. Present. \ Past. tess-cndo. weaving. I avendo tessuto, having woven. PARTICIPLE. Present. tess-ente (s.), tess-inti (p.), weaving. Past. tess^&to (m. a.), tess-&ti (p.), woven. tess-iita (f. s.), itss-ute (p.), woven. INDICATIVE MOOD. SIMPLE TENSES. Present, tiss-o, 1 weave, or do weave, or am weaving. | tess-d&mo {tess-6mo) t we weave. Imperfect, io tess-dva Or tess~ca, I wove, or did weave, or was weaving. Perfect. tess-tl t I wove, or did weave. | tess-bnmo, we wove. tess-6sti, thou wovest. tess-6ste, you wove. tess-k (tess-io), he wove. | tess-&ROXO, they wove. Future, tess-erd, I shall or will weave. KEGULAB. VEKBS. 195 COMPOUND TENSES. Second Perfect. i Pluperfect. ho tessuto, I have woven I io aveva tessxito, I had woven, eto SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. SIMPLE TENSE. Present i Imperfect. cht 'to tess-a, that I weave. I the io tes5-6ssi t that I wove. COMPOUND TENSES. Perfect. i • Pluperfect. ehe io Abbia tessulo, that I may have woven. I che io avtssi tcssuto, if I might have woven. CONDITIONAL MOOD. SIMPLE TENSE. Present. tess-erci [tess-eria), I should, would, or could weave, or might weave. COMPOUND TENSE. Past. avr&i tessiito, I should, would, or could have woven, or might have woven* IMPERATIVE MOOD. tess-i tu t weave thou. Verbs ending in cere (long), accented, in order to preserve the soft sound of c in all their inflections, take an i after that consonant, whenever it is followed by a, o, u; as, Tacere, to be silent. Verbs ending in iere drop the i whenever it is followedby another i; as, Empiere, to nil. 196 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. THIRD CONJUGATION. The verbs of this conjugation are divided into three classes, — those which, in the present of the indicative, end in o ; those which end in isco ; and those which have both of these termina- tions. Variation of the Verb Sentfre. PARADIGM OP THE VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION, WHICH, TR THE PRESENT OF THE INDICATIVE, END IN O ONLY. Bent-ire, INFINITIVE MOOD. I Past. to hear. | avere sent'uo,, to have heard. GERUND. Present. 1 Past. sent-dndo, hearing. j avdndo sent'uo, having heard. PARTICIPLE. Present. Past sent-dnte (s.), sent-dnti (p.), hearing. sent-ito (m. s sent-ita (f. s. ), sent-iti (p.), heard. , sent-kte (p.), heard. INDICATIVE MOOD. SIMPLE TENSES. Present. amt-Q) I hear, or do hear. 1 sent-ia-mo^ sent-i, thou hearest. sent-ku^ sent-E, he hears. j .s ;i/-oso, we hear, you hear, they hear. Imperfect ho sent-bva or sent-bct) I heard, or did hear. 1 sent-iv&mo t sent-kvi, thouheardst. 1 sent-dvate^ egli sent-iva or sent-ia, he heard. ] sait-iva.no, we heard, you heard, they heard. Perfect, sent-Uy I heard, or did hear. sent-'isii, thou heardat. sent-i [sent-bo), he heard. sent-bmmo t sent-iste, sent-irono, we heard, you heard. they heard. REGULAR VERBS. 197 sent-iro, sent-irai) sent-irdy Future* I shall or will hear. I sent^irdmo, we will hear, thou wilt hear. sent-irete, you will hear, he will hear. | sent-irannoy they will hear. COMPOUND TENSES. he sentito, Perfect I have heard. Pluperfect. to avcva sentito t I had heard, etc. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. SIMPLE TENSES. Present. che lo s&nt-A, that I hear. che tu s&nt-A. or -i, that thou hear. eke 6gli sint-A.) that he hear. che io sent-kssif eke tu sent-kssiy the sent-isse, die sent-i&mo t that we hear. che sent^idte, that you hear. che sent-ANO) that they hear. Imperfect. that I heard. that thou heardst. that he heard. eke sent-kssimo, If we heard. che sent-iste, if you heard. che sent-kssetOy if they heard. COMPOUND TENSES. Perfect. j io dbb-ia sentito, that I may have heard. [ Pluperfect, to avdssi sentito t if I had heard. aent-ireH (-trio), sent-iristi, sent-irebbe {-iria\ CONDITIONAL MOOD. SIMPLE TENSE. ' Present. I should hear. thou wouldst hear. he would hear. stnt-ir&mmo, sent-ireste, sent-irebberoj we should hear. you would hear. they would hear. COMPOUND TENSE, Past. avreH sentito, I should, would, or could have heard, or might have heard. IMPERATIVE MOOD. I sent-iamo ndi. let us hear. sdnt-i tu, hear thou. sent-ite vdi. hear ye. s&nt-A. egli, 4 let him hear. \ s&nt-Anso iglinoj 17* let them hear 198 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. Variation of the Verb EsiMre. PARADIGM OF THOSE VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION, WHICH, IN THE PRESENT OF THE INDICATIVE, HAVE THE TERMINATION tSCO ONLY. INFINITIVE MOOD. Present. | Past. Esib-ire, to offer. I avire esVAto, to have offered. csib-cndo. GERUND. Present. j Past. offering. I avcndo esibito, having offered. PARTICIPLE. Present esib-inte (s.), esibdnti (p.), offering. Past. esib-hto (m. 8.), esib-iti (p. ), offered. esibita (f. a.), esib-ite (p.), offered. m&-fsco, esib-fscij INDICATIVE MOOD. SIMPLE TENSES. Present. I offer, or do offer, thou offerest. he offers. esib-i&mo, esib-ite^ esib-tBQOTStOy we offer, you offer. they offer. to es&-iva or -ia, estb-'ivi^ esib-iva or -ia, I offered, or did offer, thou offeredst. he offered. esib-ivamO) esib-ivdte^ esib-ivanOf we offered. you offered. they offered. estb-Hf esib-isti) esib-i (esib-'w), Perfect. I offered, or did offer. thou offeredst. he offered. esib-bmmO) we offered. csib-iste, you offered. esib-krono {esib-vro)^ they offered. e$8>4rd t esib~ird t Fitture. I shall or will offer. I esib-ir&mo, we will offer. thou wilt offer. esib-irete, . you will offer. he will offer. | esib-irdnno t they will offer. REGULAR VERBS. 199 COMPOUND TENSES. Second Perfect* I PluperfecU ho €sib'ito t I have offered, etc. I \o avcva esibito, I had offered, etc. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. SIMPLE TENSES. che ko esib-isCA, that I offer. die tu es-ib-tsCA, that thou offer. eke egli esib-iscA, that he offer. die esib-i&moj that we offer. che esib-iate, that you offer. che esib-t scano, that they offer. Imperfect. che io esib-issi, if I offered. I eke esib-bssimo, if we offered. che tu esUhbssii if thou offeredst. che esib-kste, if you offered. che igli esUhissej if he offered. | che esib-is$ero t if they offered. COMPOUND TENSES. Perfect. I Pluperfect, eke io dbbia esibito, that I hare offered. I che io avessi esib'do, if I had offered. CONDITIONAL MOOD. SIMPLE TENSE. Present. esfihirH (esib-iria) y I should offer. I estb4r4mmo t we should offer. esib^iristij thou wouldst offer. I esib-ir&ste, you would offer. esib-irebbe {esib-iria), he would offer. 1 . esib-ire'bbero, they would offer. COMPOUND TENSE. Past avrH €sib'ito } I should, would, or could have offered, or might have offered. IMPERATIVE MOOD. eftMsoi, esib-fBCA, offer thou, let him offer. esib-kte, ei'i'6-iscANO, let us offer. offer ye. let them offer. 200 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. Cucire, to sew. Verbs ending in cire, in order to preserve the soft sound of the c in all their inflections, take an i after that consonant, whenever it is followed by a, o ; as, Cucire, to sew. PABADIGM OF THE VERBS ENDING IN cire. c&c-e, INDICATIVE MOOD. I sew, or do sew. thou sewest. he sews. cuc-i&mo {-kmo) t we sew. cuc-ite, you sew. cuci-ono, they sew. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present the S.o c&cl-ti) that I sew or may sew. che tu citci-a or cum, that thou sew. die igli ciici-a, that he sew. che cuc-'tamO) che cuc-'i&te, die cuci-ano. that we sew. that you sew. that they sew. cud tu, curia egli t IMPERATIVE MOOD. sew thou. let him sew citc'iamo-noi, Jet us sew. cuc-ite voij sew ye. cuciano eglino, let them sew. REGULAR VERBS. 201 A&borrire, to abhor. PARADIGM OP THOSE VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION, WHICH, IN THE PRESENT OF THE INDICATIVE, END BOTH IN O AND isCO, INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. abb&rr-o or abborr-f SCO, I abhor, or do abhor. abb6rr-l or aborr-t SCI, thou abhorrest. dbb6rr-7l or abborr-1 SOB, he or she abhors. abborr-j&mo, we abhor. abborr-kte y you abhor. adodjr-ONO or -f scowo, they abhor. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present, eke abb6rr-A. or -f 8CA, that I abhor. the o66drr-A,-l,or -f SCA, that thou abhor. the abborr-A. or 1 SCA, that he abhor. eke abborr-iamoy that we abhor. che abborr-w.te y that you abhor. eke abbdrr-AHO or -f s- that they abhor. CANO, IMPERATIVE MOOD. abb6rr-i or abb6rr-t soi, abhor thou. ai&cJjT-A or -f boa, let him abhor. abborr-i&mo, let us abhor. oJ6orr-Ue, abhor ye. oiodrr-ANO or -f soano, let them abhor. 202 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. %, Sgturpiixal CaMe OP THE VARIATIONS OF THE REGULAR VERBS, Showing their different Terminations in their Simple Tenses. FIRST CONJUGATION. [Am-] are. SECOND CONJUGATION. THIRD CONJUGATION. INFINITIVE MOOD. PRESENT. [Tern-] ere. [Cred-] ere. [Abborr-] ire. [Am-] indo. GERUND. PRESENT. [Tern-] endo. [Abborr-] endo. [Am-] ante. PARTICIPLES. PRESENT. [Tern-] ente. [Abborr-] en to. [Am-] ato, -a, ati, -e. [Tern-] uto, -a, utS, -e. [Abborr-] ito, -a, iti, -«. [Am-] o, iimo, ate, ano. [Am-] ava, avi, ava; avamo, avate, avano. [Am-] ai, asti, * ; ammo, aste, arono (aro, ar). INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT. [Tern-] o, iamo, ete, ono. IMPERFECT. [Tern] eva, ea (ia), 6vi, eva, 6a; evamo, evate, evano, eano. PERFECT DEFINITE. [Tern-] Si, etti, esti, e, ette (eo); emmo, este, 6rono, ettero f ero). [Abborr-] o, isco, i, isci, e, isce; iamo. ite, ono, iscono. [Abborr-] iva, la, ivi, iva, ia; ivamo, ivate, ivano, iano [Abborr-] ii, isti, 1 (io); iramo, iste, irono. VARIATIONS OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 203 HE3T CONJUGATION. SECOND CONJUGATION. FUTURE INDEFINITE. THIRD CONJUGATION. [Am-] ero, [Tern-] er6 2 [Abborr-] ird, irai, erai, em, era; era; ira; eremo, eremo, iremo, erete, er6te, ir6te, eranno. er&lmo. iriuno. CONDITIONAL MOOD. t Am-] er6i (eria), eresti, erebbe (eria) ; crenimo, erebbero (eriano) [Tern-] erel (eria), eresti, erebbe (erla) ; ereinmo, ereste, erebbero (eriano). [Abborr-] ire"i (iria), iresii, ira or v' era, there was. | c> crano or v 1 erano, there were. Perfect. ei fu or vi Jit, there was. | ci fiirono or vi furono t there were. Future. ei sard or vi sard, there shall be. | ci saranno or vi saranno, there shall be. COMPOTJND TENSES. Second Perfect. c 1 e* or v 1 e stato (m.J, -a (f.), there has been. ci sono or vi sono, stati (m.), -e (f.), there hare been. c' era or «' eVa stato, -a, there had been. c' erano or «' erano s(d(i -e, there had been. Future Anterior, ci sard or vi sard stato, -a, there will have been. ci saranno or vi saranno stati t -«, there will have been. UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 213 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. SIMPLE TENSES. the ci sia or m sict, that there be or may be. the ci siaiiO) vi siano or ci sieno, vi sieno, that there be or may he. Itwperfect. ci fdsse or vi fdsse, if there were or should be. ci f&ssero or vi fdssero, if there were or should be. COMPOUND TENSES. Perfect. ci sia or vi sia stdto, -a, that there has been. ci siano or vi siano stdti^ -e, that there have been or may have been. Pluperfect, ci fdsse or vi fdsse stdto, -a, if there had been. ci fdssero or vi fossero stati, -e y if there had been. CONDITIONAL MOOD. SIMPLE TENSE. d saribbe or vi saribbe, there should, would, or could be, or might be n sarebbero or v£ sarebbero, there should, would, or could be, or might be COMPOUND TENSE. Past. ci saribbe or vi saribbe stato, -a, there should, would, or could have been. ci sarebbero or vi sarebbero stati, -e, there should, would, or could have been. IMPERATIVE MOOD. ci sia, vi sia, or sia-ci, sia-vi, let there be. ci siano, vi sieno, or sian-ci, sien-vi, let there be. The verb avere, to have, is often substituted for the verb essere when unipersonally used, and then it is varied after the same manner ; as, Av'erci or avervi, to be here or to be there ; ci ha or vi ha, here is or there is ; ci hdnno or vi hdnno, there are ; etc. The verb avere not only may be used with propriety for the verb essere, but it is also elegantly used in the singular, although the noun to which it is joined is in the plural ; as, Qudnte miglia ci ha ? how many miles is it ? Isbbevt rnoUi uomini, there were a great many men there ; etc. To express in Italian " here or there is some of it," " here or there are some of them," we join the particle ne, of it, of them, to ci or vi, and say, essercene or esservene. 214 ITALIAN GKAMMAR. ^xxzgnlux ffizthts. The irregularities of Italian "Verbs are chiefly confined to the perfect tense of the indicative mood, and to the past participle. Some verbs, however, are also irregular in the present of the indicative ; and then they are irregular likewise in the present of the subjunctive and in the imperative. When verbs are contracted in the infinitive mood, they are contracted also in the future tense and in the conditional mood. In those tenses in which verbs are irregular, the irregularity, generally, does not extend to all the persons. Thus, with very few exceptions, in the perfect of the indicative, the second person singular, and the first and second persons plural ; and in the present of the indicative and subjunctive, and in the imperative, the first and second persons plural, — are regular. In the variation of these verbs, we will give only those tenses in which they depart from the paradigms already given, to which we must refer for the formation of the other tenses. The per- sons which are irregular are here printed in small capitals. For the assistance of learners, we have added to each verb the auxiliary with which it is varied in its compound tenses. VARIATION OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. There are but four simple verbs in the first conjugation, which are not varied like amdre ; viz. : — anddre, to go. - fare, to do, or to make. dare, to give. „» stare, to be, to dwell, to stand, or to stay. IRREGULAR VERBS. 215 And&re (varied with Essere). INFINITIVE MOOD. anddre, to go. GERUND. anddndo, going. PARTICIPLE. anddtOj gone. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present VO or vAdo,* I go or am going. I andiamO) we go. vAl, thou goest. I andate, yon go. VA. he goes. | vAhho, they go. .Fotore. audrd (by contraction for anderd), I shall or will go. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. to vA da, that I go or may go. tu viDA (udf a or Df I, that thou give. I rf/d!e, that you give. igli djCa, that he give. | Df ano or Df eito, that they give. Imperfect. \o dessi, if I gave or ghould give. CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present. dakei (daria), I should, would, or could give, or might give. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Idiamo ndi, let us give. date v6i t give ye. Df ako, let them give. The compounds of dare — as, riddre, to give again ; adddrsi, to devote one's self ; etc — have the same irregularities. IRREGULAR VEEBS. 217 /o ( faceio), FAI {fid), fa (face), FECI {fii), faoesti ifisti), ff.ce (fe',fio), io FA ooia, tu fAccia, efii FAOCIA, F&re (varied with Ave"re). INFINITIVE MOOD. fAre (facert),* to do, or to make. GERUND. facendo, doing. PARTJCEPLE. fAtto, done. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. FACOIAMO, I do or am doing, thou doest. he does. file, famho {fin). Imperfect. io factva or facia (fia), I did or was doing Perfect. I did. J fac&nmo {fimmo), thou didst. faeSste (ftste), he did. | fecero (ferono), FARd, I shall or -will do. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. that I do or may do. that thou do. that he do. FAOOIAHO, FACCIATE, FAOOIAHO, Imperfect, io facdssi (/&«), if I did or should do. we do. you do. they do. we did. you did. they did that we do. that you do. that they do. CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present. farei (faria,far&), I should, would, or could do, or might do. fa(fi')tu, FACCIA igll, do thou, let him do. IMPERATIVE MOOD. FACOIAMO, fate, FACOIANO, let us do do ye. let them do. The compounds of fare — as, assuefdre, to accustom; confdre, to suit, to agree ; contraffdre, to mimic, to imitate ; disfdre, to undo ; misfare, to do wrong; etc. — have the same irregularities. Sodisfdre, or soddisfare. to satisfy, is both regular and irregular. * This verb belongs properly to the second conjugation ; it being but a contraction of facer e, now become obsolete, of which it retains many of the forms. 19 218 ITALIAN GKAMMAR. Stdxe (varied with Essere). EOTINITIVB MOOD. Present. Scire, to stand, to stay, to dwell, or to be. e GERUND. stando, standing 1 . PARTICIPLE. stiito, stood. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. StO, stai, sta y I stand. thou standest. he stands. stiamo, state, stAnno, we stand, you stand. the; stand. Perfect. ST^TTI {stii)j BTfiSTI, ST.ETTE (SU), I stood, thou stoodst. he stood. STJsMHO, stj-iste, stetteeo (stiro), -we stood, you stood, they stood. Futwre. STABd, I shall or Trill stand. ko STlA, tu sTf a or STf I, 4gH STf A, SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. that I stand. that thou stand, that he stand. stiamo, that we stand stiate, that you stand STf ano or STf eno, that they stand Imperfect, to btjsbi, if I stood or should stand. CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present. btaeei {star\a\ I should, would, or could stand, or might stand. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Istiamoy let us stand. stdte, stand ye. srf ako or arfaso SgHiiOy let them Btand. IEREGtlLAH VEUBS. 219 Stare is sometimes varied with the conjunctive pronouns, mi, ti, si, etc., and the particle ne : thus, me ne sto, I remain here ; te ne stdi, thou remainest here ; etc. Me, te, etc., are then mere expletives. Gon trastdr e. signifying to deny, to dispute ; soprastdre or sov- rastdre, signifying to stand over, to threaten ; ostwre, to oppose ; re store, to remain, — are regular, and are varied KEe amdre. The foregoing verbs, anddre, dare, fare, and stare, in all those forms in which, when they are simple, they make but one sylla- ble, have, in their compounds, the grave accent on the last syllable ; as, vo, da, fe', sta : Sivd, I go again ; rida, he gives back again ; disfe', he destroyed ; instd, entreat thou ; etc. VARIATION OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. Variation of the Irregular Verbs in ere {long). The simple irregular verbs in ere (long) are the following, viz. : — cadere, dissuad&e, dolere, ydovere, giac&re, jpartre, ^persuad6re, piacere, ,pot&e, to fall. ntnan&e, to remain. to dissuade. j, sape're, sedere, to know. to grieve. to sit down. to owe. tac&e, to be or keep silent. to lie down. „, ten&e, to hold. to seem. ^j>al&re, to be worth. to persilflde. ve&irt, to see. to please. ,, vol&e, to wish, to will, of to be able. to be willing. 220 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. Cad£re (varied with Essere). INFINITIVE MOOD. cad ere- to fall. tado {c&ggio) t tadi t tade, I tail. thou fallest, he falls. PARTICIPLE. caduto, fallen. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. cadiamo (eaggiamo), cadcte, cadono (caggiono). OADDI (eadiijcaditti), I fell. cadesti, thou fellest. oAdde (cad4o), he fell. we fall, you fall they falL cadtmmo, we fell. cadeste, you fell. cAddef.o [cadiro t cad£r) t they fell. Future. cadero (cadrd) s I shall or will fall. to c&da t tu cdda, 4gli cddaj SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. that I fall or may fall, that thou fall. that he fall. cadiamo (eaggiamo), that we fall. cadiate {caggidte), that you fall. cadano (caggiano), that they fall. CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present. caderii [cadrHj caderia, cadria) } I should, would, or could fall, or might fall. IMPERATIVE MOOD. cadi til, fall thou. Dissuad^re (varied with either Av£re or Essere). dissttXsi, dissuadistiy DISSUASE, INFINITIVE MOOD. dissitadcre, to dissuade PARTICIPLE. DiseuAso, dissuaded. INDICATIVE MOOD. Perfect. I dissuaded, thou dissuadest. he dissuaded. dissuaddmmo, dissuadeste, DISSUASERO, we dissuaded, you dissuaded, they dissuaded. DissucuUre, properly speaking, is a compound of the Latin verb euaddre I well as persuamre t to persuade, which has the same irregularities. IBEEGULAE VERBS. 221 Dol6re (varied with Essere, and the Conjunctive Pro- nouns, mi, ti, si, etc.). INITNITIVE MOOD. doler-si) to grieve. PARTICIPLE. doluto-si, grieved. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. mi D(5lgo (ddglio), I grieve. H du6li, thou grievest. si du6le ( ddle), he grieves. mi ix5lrt, I grieved. ti dolesti, thou grievedst. si D6LSB, he grieved. ci dogliamo [dol4me) t we grieve. •ct dolete, you grieve. 5t dulguno (ddgliono), they grieve. Perfect. ci dol&nmo, we grieved. vi doleste, you grieved. si d<5lbero, they grieved. Future. dorrd (by contraction for tfoferd *), I shall or will grieve. > SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. mi DdLQA (rfog-f fa), that I grieve. ti i>6lga (doglia), that thou grieve, n i>(5lga (dog-^'a), that he grieve. Present. ci dogliamo, that we grieve. vi doguatb. that you grieve . si ixjlgaxo (ddgliano), that they grieve. CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present. dorret (dorr'ia), by contraction, for doltr&i (doleria)^ I should, would, or could grieve. IMPERATIVE MOOD. T>Tj6tt.-ti) grieve thou. si B(5lg A (ridg-Zfa), let him. grieve. DOGLTAMO-e£, let us grieve. dolete-vi, grieve ye. si rxti.GAKO (ddgliano)) let them grieve The compounds of dolire — as, condolere, to condole, etc. have the same irregularities. * To distinguish it from doler6, future of the verb dol&re, to defraud. ^ t To distinguish them from dolerH (doleria), forms of the conditional nf the verb doldre. to defraud. 222 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. Dov^re (varied with Av6re) . INFINITIVE MOOD. dovire {devire *), to owe. PARTICIPLE doviito, owed. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. aevo or d£bbo (deggio), I owe. I :dobbi.£mo [debbi&mo\ we owe. devi{dei\ thou owest. dovete, you owe. deve or debbe (dde rfe'), he owes. J devono or debboso, they owe. Perfect. dovU or dovdtti, I owed. Future. doverd or dovrd, I shall or will owe. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. io debba (ddggia)) that T owe. tu d kbba {deggia^ that thou owe. <*g^£ i>ebba (deggta), that he owe. bobbtamo (deggiamo), that we owe. dobbiate (deggidte), that you owe. d&bbano (dcggia.710), that they owe* CONDITIONAL MOOD. Preset. dover&i or dovrU (doveria or dovria\ I should, would, or could owe, or might owe. IMPERATIVE MO.OD (wanting). • The Latin debere, from which dovire derives some of its forms. IRREGULAR VERBS. 223 Giacere (varied with either Avere or Essere) . INFINITIVE MOOD. giacire^ to lie down. PARTICIPLE. gtaciitto, lain down. INDICATIVE MOOD. GlAoCIO, giaei", giace, GlACQUI, giacesti, GlACQUE, Present. 1 lie down, thou liest down, he lies down. giacciAmo, giacete, GlACCIONO, Perfect, I lay down. J giacfanmo, thou layest down. giaceste, he lay down. . j GlAcQUERO, we lie down, you lie down, they he down. we lay down, you lay down, they lay down. 10 giAccia, tu GlACOIA, egli glAccia, SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. that I lie down. I giacciAmo, that thou lie down. I giacciate, that he lie down. | giAcciano, that we lie down, that you lie down. that they lie down. gi&ci tu, oiAcoia igU t IMPERATIVE MOOD. lie thou down, let him lie down. giacciAmo nii, giacite v6i, GliCCIANO dglino, let us lie down. lie ye down. let them lie down. The compounds of giacere (as, soggiacere, to be subject, etc.), as well as piacere and its compounds (compiacere, to please ; dispiacere, to displease ; etc.), have the same irregularities. Piacere, and its compounds compiacere, etc., in the second per- son plural of the present of the subjunctive, and in the second person plural of the imperative mood, make piacciXte, etc. 224 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. PAlO, pari, pare (par), pAitvi (parsi), partsti, "BS.~B.yrSi (parse). Par^re (varied with Essere) • INFINITIVE MOOD. parere, to seem. PARTICIPLE. paritto (pa so), seemed. INDICATIVE MOOD. I seem. thou seemest. he seems. I seemed. thou seemedst. he seemed. Present. Iparidmo, we seem. parite, you seem. parono, or, PiiONO, they seem. Perfect. Iparemmo, we seemed. pariste, you seemed. pArvero (parsero), they seemed. Fuiwre. parrd (by contraction for parerd *), I shall or will seem. \o pAia, tu pAia, igli pAia, SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. that I seem, that thou seem that he seem. panamo, pariate, pAiako, that we seem. that you seem, that they seem. CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present. parreH (parria), by contraction for parer&i ( parer'tai), I should, would, or could s pari tu, pAia igU, IMPERATIVE MOOD. seem thou, let him seem. pariamo ndi, parite -vdi, pAiano 4glino t Persuad^re. (See " Dissuadere," p. 220.) Piac^re, (See " Giac6re, )! p. 223.) let us seem. seem ye. let them seem. * To distinguish it from parerd, future of the verb pardre, to parry, to adorn, t To distinguish them from parerei (pareria), corresponding forms of the verb parara t to parry, etc. IRREGULAR VERBS. 225 Pot6re (varied with either Av6re or Essere) . INFINITIVE MOOD. Pofere, to be able. PARTICIPLE. potato, been able. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. p<5sso. I am able. I p08SIA"mo, we are able. PU<3i ( pu (5'), thou art able. 1 potdte, you are able. PUo (pudte, p6te)j he is able. | pussono (p6nno), they are able. Future. ^ ' potrd (by contraction, for poterd\ * I Bhall or will be able. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. PdsSA, that I be able, or may be able. CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present potr&i {potna\ by contraction for poterit I I should, would, or could be able, or might (poteriarf poria}) I be able. IMPERATIVE MOOD (wanting). * To distinguish it from poterd, future of the verb potftre, to prune, t To distinguish them from poter&i ( poteria), corresponding forms of the verb pot&re^ to prune. 226 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. Eiman^re (varied with Essere) . INFINITIVE MOOD. rimanere, to remain. PARTICIPLE. rimAsto {rimuso) } remained.. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. eimAngo (rim&gno), I remain. I rimani&mo^ rimdni, "" thou remainest. HmanHe^ rimdne, he remains. ] riiilAhgono, rim A si, rimancsti) eimAse. Perfect. I remained, thou remainedst. he remained. rimandmmoj rimaniste, rimAsero, we remain, you remain. they remain* we remained. you remained. they remained Future, rimarrd (by contraction for rimanerd)^ I shaU or will remain. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD Present. to XXM&TSGAirimagna), that I remain. tit, rim Anga (rim&gna), that thou remain, igli eimAnga, that he remain. rtmaniamo, rimaniate. etmAngamo, that we remain. that you remain, that they remain. CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present. nmarrii {rimarria), by contraction for ri- maner&i (nmaneria), I should, would, or could remain, or might remain. IMPERATIVE MOOD. rim&ni £«, rimAnga igli, remain thou, let him remain. rimaniamo rcdi, let us remain rimandte v6i, remain ye. rimAwgano tglinoy let them remain IRREGULAR VERBS. 227 BO, bSi. 8A (sape), HEPPI, sapesti, rSEPPE, Sape're (varied with Ave>e) . INFINITIVE MOOD. sapfre, to know. PARTICIPLE. saputo, known. INDICATIVE MOOD. I know, thou knowest. he knows. I knew. thou knewest he knew. I SAPPliMO, sapete, | SANNO, Perfect. Isapemmo, sopeste, SEPPERO, we know, you know, they know. we knew, you knew. they knew. Futwre. sapro (by contraction for sapero), I shall or will know. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. \o sAppia, that I know, or may know. COKDITIOKAIi MOOD. Present. ,er& (.scrj77^j\, by contraction for saperii I I should, would, or could know, or might (sujnJia), I know. IMPEBATIVE MOOD. SA>j?IA igliy know thou let him know. sappl4mo n6i t let us know. SASFIATE vdi. know ye. BJffPiJfltfb igUno i let them know. ^ The compounds of sapere — as risapere, to learn, or to come to know — follow the same irregularities. 228 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. Secure (varied with Avere) . INFINITIVE MOOD. sedere (siggere *), to sit down. GERUND. „ \edendo (seggendo), Bitting. PARTICIPLE. seduto, seated. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. sitoo or segqo, SIEDI, iIEDE (side), I sit. 1 sediamo, thon sittest. sedite, he sits. | siedoko, Perfect. we sit. you sit. they sit. sed&i or seditti, I sat. Fuiwre. seder o {sedrd), I shall or will sit. subjunctive mood. Present. io si ed A or segga , that I sit, or may sit. I sediamo or seggiamo, that we sit. tu 81 ed A or 8 egga, that thou sit. ' sediate (seggiate), that you sit. egftBIEDAorSEQQA, thathesit. | BIBDANO or 8EGGANO, that they sit CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present. seder ei {sedret, sederia), I should, would, or could sit, or might sit. IMPERATIVE MOOD. SIEDI tu. Bit thou. bieda or segga igli, let him sit. sediamo or (seggiamo) not, let us sit. sedete v6i t sit ye.' siedano dglino, let them sit. Sedere is sometimes varied with the pronouns mi, ti, si, etc., and then it requires the auxiliary essere ; as, mi siedo, I sit (my- self) ; ti sei seduto, thou hast sat (thyself) ; etc. The compounds of sedere — as, possedere, to possess ; risedere, to reside ; soprassedere, to supersede — have the same irregulari- ties. * This verb, now become obsolete, is Btill used in many of the forms of the modern verb sedere. IRREGULAR VERBS. 229 Tace*re (varied with Avere) . INFINITIVE MOOD. tacere, to be or keep silent. PARTICIPLE. taciuto, been silent. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present, tacio (t&ccio), I am silent. rAcQui, I was silent. taccsti, thou wast silent. t.£cque, be was silent. Perfect. tachnmo, we were silent. taceste, you were silent. tAcquero, they were silent. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present, to tacia {taccia), that I be silent or may be silent. CONDITIONAL MOOD. tacerti, I should, would, or could be silent. IMPERATIVE MOOD. tdci tu, be thou silent. Tacere is sometimes varied with the pronouns, mi, ti, si, etc., and then it requires the auxiliary essere : mi tdcio, I keep silent ; si e taciitto, he has kept silent ; &c. The compound of tacere — ritacere, to become once more silent — follows the same irregularities. 20 230 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. Tenure (varied with Avere). i INFINITIVE MOOD. tenere, to hold. PARTICIPLE. teniuo, holden. TftNQO (tdgno), TrfeNI (tegwi) t TEfeKE, Tfimsi, ttnesti, TiXBK, INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. Iteni&mo {tegnamo), tentte, TiSHGOHO, Perfect. tenemmo, teniste, TiHHBRO, Future, tend (by contraction for tenerd), I shall or Trill hold. I hold, thou holdest. he holds. I held, thou heldest. he held. we hold, you hold, they hold. we held. you held, they held. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. to TfiNOA ( tigna), that I hold. tu t£ngA, that thou hold. igU T&KGA (teg na), that he hold. leniamo (ttgnumo), that we hold. teniate [tegnate), that you hold. TiKGASo (lejnano), that they hold. CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present. terrU (terria\ by contraction for tenerti (teneria), I should, would, or could hold, or might hold. IMPERATIVE MOOD. ti4hi (tP) tu, hold thou. tSnga (legKa) igli, let him hold. teniamo (tegn&mo) ndi\ let us hold. tenets v6i y hold ye. t4noaho iglino, let them hold. Tenlre is sometimes varied with the pronouns mi, ti, si, etc., and then it requires the auxiliary essere ; as, mi.sono tenuto, I have holden or restrained myself; etc. IRREGULAR VERBS. 231 Val^re (varied with either Av6re or Essere) . ESWrNITIVE MOOD. valcre, to be worth or to avail. PARTICIPLE. valuta (vdlso), been worth. vALGO [vaglio), vali, vale (vdl)j vaxsi, VA-LftE, INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. I am worth, thou art worth. he is worth. vali&moj valete, vAlgono, I was worth, thou wast worth. he was worth. Perfect. valtste, vAlsero, we are worth, you are worth, they are worth we were worth, you were worth, they were worth jfutwe. varrd (by contraction for valerd), I shall or will be worth. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. io VAlga or v.£glia, that I be worth. tu vAlga or vAglia, that thou be worth. 4gli vAlga or vAgli a, that he be worth. valiamOj vaiiate. vAlgaho, that we be worth. that you be worth. that they be worth. CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present. uarrii (varrza), by contraction for valerH (Valeria). I should, would, or could be worth, might be worth. IMPERATIVE MOOD. v&u tu, be thou worth. vAlga {vaglia) igli, let him be worth. valiamo n6i t valite vdij vAlgano eglmo, let us be worth be ye worth. let them, be worth. 232 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. Ved^re {varied with Av6re). INFINITIVE MOOD. ved(re/v> Bee. GERUND. ved&ndo or veggendo, seeing. PARTICIPLE. veduto (visto), seen. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. vido, veggo, I see. vidi {v&% thou seest. vediamo or yeggiAmo, we see. vedele t you see. vedono or VEGGONO, they see. VfDI (viddi), I saw. vede'sti, thou sawest. vede.) he sees. PerfecU vedemmo, we saw. vedeste, you saw. vIde, ' I 16 saw. viDERO, {vzder) 9 they saw. Future. vedro (by contraction for iJerferd), I shall or will see. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. io v4.da or VEQGA, that I see or may see. I vediamo or VEGGIAMO, that we see. tu vdda or vegga, that thou see. I vediate or veggiAte, that you see. igli vida or vegga, that he see. j vcdano or veggano, that they see. CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present. vedrH (vedr'ta), by contraction for vederti I I should, would, or could see, or migh 1 (vederia) t see. IMPERATIVE MOOD. vidi {v&) tu, see thou. vida 01 VEGGA 4gli t let him see. vediamo n6i y i e t us see. vedete v6i t gee ye. ' ve'dano tglino, let them boo. IRREGULAR VERBS. 233 Volere (varied with Av6re) . INFINITIVE MOOD. volere, to wish, to frill, or to be -willing. PARTICIPLE. voluto, been willing. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. VdGLIO op T(5', I am willing. I vogliAmo (vol&mo), we are -willing. VTJ<5l (vu6li, Uttd 1 ), thou art willing. voMte, you are willing. vu6le (rd/e), he is willing. | v6gi-iono [v6nno) t they are willing. Pejyecfc V<5l*LI, I was willing. I volemmo, we were willing. t-olcsti, thou wast willing. voleste, you were willing. volle, he was willing. | vdxLEEO, they were willing. Fvtwe. vorrd (by contraction for volerd *), I shall or will be willing SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. io v<5glia, that I be willing or may be willing. CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present. vorrii (vorriu), by contraction for volerii | I should, would, or could be willing, or (vole.r'ial), | might be willing. j IMPERATIVE MOOD (nrmitina^ i ' The compounds of volere — as, disvolere, to desire the contrary of what one has wished ; rivolere, to wish again, or to be once more willing — have the same irregularities. * To distinguish it from the future of the verb volare. to fly. t To distinguish them from the corresponding forms of volare, to fly. 234 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. VARIATION OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. The following are the simple irregular verbs of the third conjugation; viz., — dire, to say or to tell. morlre, to die. saUre, to ascend. scguire, to follow. udtre, uscfre, ^entre, to hear, to go out. to come. Dfre (varied with Av6re) - INFINITIVE MOOD. Df fjr, to say. GERWD. d kendo, saying. PARTICIPLE. d£tto (ditto), said. dico, ffici or Df ,' dice, dic6sti t DfSSK, INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. I say. thou say est. lie says. dtci&mo t DfTE, d'icono, Imperfect. w dic&va or dicca, I said. Perfect. I said, thou saidst. he said. dic&mmOy diciste, DfSSBBO, we say. you say. they say. we said. you said, they said, Future. sm6 (by contraction for dicerd), I shall or will say. IRREGULAR VERBS. 235 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. < to dica, that I say or may say. Imperfect. to dictisi, if I said or should say. CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present. I>ib£i (diria), by contraction for dicerH I I should, would, or could say; or might (diceria), \ say, IMPERATIVE MOOD. # I dici&mo ndiy let us say. Di' to, say thou. I dJtb vdi, say ye. rffca ANO eglino, let them hear. The compounds of ucSre — as, riudire, to hear again, etc. — • have the same irregularities. Esaudire, to grant, is regular, and varied like esihire. 240 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. Uscfre {varied with Essere) . INFINITIVE MOOD. uscire (escire), to go out. PABTICIPLB. uscito, gone out. Jbsoi, INDICATIVE MOOD Present I go out. thou goest out. he goes out. usciamo, uscite, fcSCONO, we go out. you go out. they go out. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. 'xo £soa, that I go out or may go out. tu fisOA, that thou go out. igli isCA, that he go out. usciamoy usciate, iSSOATJO, that we go out. that you go out. that they go out. £soi r«, ±soa 4gli t IMPERATIVE MOOD. go thou out. let him go out. usdamo n6i, uscite v6i, ftSOANO dglinoy let us go out. go ye out. let them go out. The compound of uscire 'same irregularities. • rtwcvre, to succeed — has the IRREGULAR VERBS. 241 Venire {varied with Essere) . INFINITIVE MOOD. venire^ to come. PARTICIPLE. TEMtrTO, come. INDICATIVE MOOD. \ Present. VEngo (inJgrio), I come. VL&ni, thou comest. viene, he comes. veniamo (vegn&mo), we come, vm'Ue, you come. viHGONO {v6gnono)j they come. Perfect. VEBrare, I came. uen'isti) thou earnest VENNE, he came. IvenimmO) we came. veniste, you came. ViJNirKito {vemro)) they came. Future. vend (by contraction for veniro) } I shall or will come. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. lo VBNGA, that I come or may come. tu vj&kga, that thou come. 6gli vilHGA, that he come. venidmo (vegnamo), that we come. venidte {vegndte), that you come. vGhgano [vegnanoh that they come. CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present. verrdi {verria)^ by contraction for venirdi (veniria)) I should, would, or could come, or might come. corae thou, let bim come. IMPERATIVE MOOD. veniamo ndi^ i-enite v6i, V±NGANO tgh let us come. come ye. let them come. Ventre is sometimes varied with the conjunctive pronouns mi, ti, si, etc., and the particle ne : thus, me ne vengo, I am coming thence ; te ne vieni, thou art coming thence, etc. Me, te, etc., are then mere expletives. The compounds of ventre — as, convenire, to agree ; divenire, to become ; etc. — have the same irregularities. 21 1242 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. TABLE OF IRREGULAR VERBS. INFINITIVE. Accendere. to light Accorgersi, to perceive Addiirre, to allege (Adducere), to allege Affliggere, to afflict Aucidere, to kill "Andire, to go Apparire, to appear (Apparere). to appear Appartenere, to belong Applaudire, to applaud (Applaiidere), to applaud Aprire, to open Ardere. to burn Ascendere, to ascend Aseondere, to conceal Aspergeue, to sprinkle Assistere, to assist Ass61yere, to absolve Assorbire, to absorb (Assorbere), to absorb Assiimere, to assume Astringere, to compel (Astrignere), to compel Attendere, to wait Avere, to have Avvellere, to root up Bevere, to drink (Bere), to drink Bollire, to boil Cadere, to fall Ca'lere, to care for Capere, to comprehend (Cap ire), to comprehend Oedere, to submit Chiedere, to ash Chiudere, to shut Cignere, to gird (Cingere), to gird (flgsr }'•«»«-■ C6mpiere, to accomplish (Cdmpire), to accomplish CoDcepire, to conceive "■■oncGpere), to conceive vnn6ttere, to connect /jdscere, to know Oonsumare,* I ., ire, to say Dirigere, to direct Disc. emit: re, to descend Disp6rgere, to disperse Distinguere, to distinguish Diveddre, to Divellerc, to root out Dolere, to grieve ■"*"!Dovere, to owe (Devere), to owe Emergere, to emerge Erigere, firgere, to erect Esigere, to exact Espellere, to expel Espdnere, to expose (Espdrre), to expose Esprimere, to express Eseere, to be Estendere, to extend Estingnere, to extinguish mt ^ Facere or fire, to do Fendere, to cleave Figere or figgore, to fix Fingere orfignere, to feign Fdndere, to melt Frangere, 1 . break (Fragnere), Friggere, to fry GenuflGttere, to kneel Giacere, to lie down Gire, to go Gitingere, to arrive Giugnere, to arrive Godere {gaudere), to enjoy Illiidere, to delude Immergere, to immerge Impellere, to impel Imprimere, to print Incidere, to grave Incdrrere, to incur Increscerc, to be sorry Intendere, to understand Intessere, to weave Intridere, to temper Intrudere, to intrude Invadere, - to invade Invdlgere, to wrap up Invdlvere, to wrap up fre, to go Irridere, to deride PRESENT. cdrro costringo costrigno cresco cudco do decido deliido deprimo difendo dico dlrigo disc en do disp6rgo distinguo divedo divello ddlgo, ddglio debbo, devo (deo) em ergo erigo, ergo esigo espello espdngo (espdno) esprimo sdno estendo estinguo fo tfaccio) feudo figo, figgo fingo (figno) fdndo frango friggo genufletto giaccio giungo godo illuso immergo impello imprimo incido incdrro iacresco in ten do intesso intrido intrudo invado invdlgo invdlvo irrido PERFECT. cdrsi costrinai crebbi (crescetti) cdssi (cocdi) diedi, diei dec i si (?) delusi difesi distinsi (distingudtti) dividi (dividei) divelsi ddlsi doveij dovdtti (devei) emersi eressi, ersi csigei espulsi espdsi (espudsi) espressi fui (estemletti) estinsi feci (fei) fendei (fessi) fipsi (fisi) finsi fusi (fondei) frJnsi frissi genuflessi giacqui (giacetti) giunsi godetti, godei ill usl immerfli impulsi impressi iucisi incdrsi iDcrdbbi (increecetti) intesi intessei intrisi intrusi invasi invdlsi FUTURE. correrd costringerd (costrignerd) crescero cocerd dard deciderd deluderd deprimerd difenderd diro dirigerd discendero dispergero distinguerd divedrd divellerd (diverrd) dorrd dovrd (doverd) emergern erigerd, ergerd esigerd espellerd esporrd (esponerd) eeprimerd sard estenderd estingnerd fard fenderd figerd, flggerd fingerd fonderd frangerd friggerd genufletterd giacerd gird giungerd goderd illuderd i mm ergerd impeUerd imprimerd inciderd incorrerd incresrero intenderd intesserd intriderd intruderd invader© involgerd involverd irn irriderd PARTICIPLE. cdrso cos tret to crescinto cotto dato deciso deluso depresso difesso detto diretto disceso disperse ** distinto divedato (diviso) divelto doluto (ddlto) dOTuto emerso e ret to (erto) esatto espulso espdsto (esposito) espresso Btato estinto fatto fesso fitto,fisso,iiso finto (fitto) fuso, fonduto franto fritto genuflesso giaciuto (gito) gidnto god u to illuso immerso impulso imprdsso inciso incdrso inereseidto in teso, intent* intessuto intriso intruso invaso involute ito irriflo 244 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. \ to milk INFINITIVE. Iscrivere, to inscribe Istrufre, to instruct Ledere, to offend Leggere, to read Maledicere, i Maledire, [ to curse (Maladire), ) M6rgere, to dive Mescere, to mix Mettere, to put Mdlcere, to assuage Mdrdere, to bite Morire, to die Mugnere, Mungere, J Mudvere, to move Nascere, to be born Nascdndere, to conceal Negligere, to neglect Nudcere, )• . , (Mcen), I i0 lmrt Offendere, to offend Offerire, to offer Ofirire, to offer (Offerere), to offer Opprimure, to oppress Parere, to appear Piscere, to feed Percudtere, to strike Perdere, to lose Persuadere, to persuade Piarere, to please Piangere, 1 , Piugere, pignere, to paint Piovere, to rain (Pdiiere) or pdrre, to put Pdrgere, to offer — Potere, to be able Precidere, to shorten Premere. to press Prendere, to take Presumere, to presume Proteggere, to protect Pungere,pugnere, toprick RAdere, to shave Recidere, to retrench Redimere, to redeem Reggere, to govern Rfindere, to render Repellere, to repel Reprimere, to repress Ridere, to laugh Rilucere, to shine Rimanere. to remain RVdlvere, to resolve Rispdndere, to answer Ristare, to desist Rddere, to gnaw PRESENT. PERFECT. FUTURE. PAR-TICIPLI. iecrivo iscrlssi iscrivero iscritto istruisco istruii istruird i st rut to ledo (l.jsi) (ledei) lederd le&o leggo lessi (leggei) leggero letto lice, lece (licito) lecito maledico * maledessi maledird maledetto m6rgo mdrsi mergerd merso mesco mesc6i mescerd (mesciuto) metto misi, (m6sBi) metterd messo (raissn) 2d pers. mdlci (niulse)" 3dpcrs.mdlce mordo morsi morderd mdrso ( nmdro, mdro ( muojo, mdjo morii morird, morr6 mdrto miingo munsi nmgnerd muuto muovo mdssi (movei) moverd mdsso nasco n&cqui nascerd TlitO nasc6ndo nascdsi nasconderd nascdso negligo negligei negligerd neglfttto nudce, noccio nocqui nocerd npsciuto offendo offessi offenderd offeso offerisco offerii offerird, ofErird offero offersi (offerrd) offerto dBro opprimo oppressi oppriioerd oppresso pijo (piro) parri (pirsi) parro (parerd) paruto (parso) pAsco pascei pascero pasciuto percudto percdssi percuoterd percdsso perdo perd6i perdero perdu to persuado persuasi persuaderd persuaso (persuadei) (persuaduto) piaccio, piacio pidcqui piacerd piaciuto piango, piagno piansi piangero pianto piDgo plDSi pingerd pinto (pitto) piovo pidvvi, pioT§i piovero pioTiito pdngo (pono) pdsi (pudsi) porrd pdsto pdrgo pdrsi porgerd porto pdsso pot6i, potetti potrd (potero) potuto ( posse tti) (pord) precido precisi precidero preciso premo premei premerd premuto prendo presi prenderd pr6so presumo presunsi presumero presunto proteggo protessi (?) proteggero protetto pungo piinsi pungerd punto rado risi (radei) radero rAso recido recisi reciderd reciso redimo redimi§i redimero redento r6ggio r6ssi reggerd retto rfindo rendei renderd renduto (reso) rep611o repulsi repellerd repulso reprimo repressi reprimerd represso rido risi {ridei} riderd riso riluco rilussi rilucerd rinnVngo rimasi rimarrd rimaso risdlvo risdlsi, risolv€i risolverd risdlto rispondo risposi risponderd rispdsto risto ristdtti ristard ristato ristringo ristrinsi ristringerd ristretto rddo rdsi roderd rdso TABLE OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 245 INFINITIVE. Itdmpere, to break Salire, to ascend »**Sapere, to know Scegliere(sc6rre), to choose Scendere. to descend Scindere, to cleave agr 1 }'— «• Scdrgere, to perceive Scdrrere, to lay waste Scrivere, to write Scudtere, to shake Sedere, td sit down Seguire, to follow Serpere, to creep Soffrire, \ , ~. (Sofierire), } t0 su ^ Solere, to be wont Solvere, to solve Sorgere (surgere), to arise Sospendere, to suspend SpAudere, to pour out Spirgere, to spread Spegnere, I . . - . , Spendere, to spend Spergere, to disperse Spingere, ) . , (Spig-nere),)'^^ *^ Stire, to stand Stendere, to extend Stridere, to en/ out Struggere, to dissolve Suggere, to suck Tacere, to Je silent Tendere, to tend ^Tenere, to hold Tessere, to weave Tignere, tingere, to dye $£^ }*>*■*»«»«» Tdndere, to shear Torcexe, to twist Torpere, to be benumbed Trirre, ) (Triere), J to draw { Triggere), ) CIccidere, to kill Udire, to hear Ugnere, ungere, to anoint Uscire, to go out ^^Valere. to be worth, Vedere, to see ^Venire, to come Vincere, to conquer Vivere, to live ^rf^-Tolere, to will Vdlvere, to turn Volgere, to turn PRESENT. PERFECT. FUTURE. PARTIOIPLH. rdinpo ruppi (rdppi) romperd rdtto salgo, salisco salii (salsi) salii'6 (aaiTo)' salito so (sAppo) s6ppi (sapdi) sapro (sapero) sap u to scelgo, sceglio scelsi scegliero seel to scendo scesi (scendei) scendero sc6so seiudo scinsi scinderd SC1SS0 scigno, scingo scinsi scigner6 scinto scidglio sciulsi sciogler6 scidlto scorgo sc6rsi scorgeri scdrto scdrro scdrsi scorrero scorto scrivo (seribo) scrissi scriverd scritto scudto (sedto) sedssi (scotdi) scoterd sedsso si£do, sdggo seddi, sudctti sedero (sedrd) sediito seguo, sieguo seguii seguiro seguito .serpo serpeva serpen te sdffro soffrii sofiriro soffdrto sdglio edno, solito solito edWo solvei solverd sola to sorgo (surgo) sdrsi (siirsi) aorgero sdrto (siirt( ) sospendo sospesi sospender6 sospeso spando spandei spaudero spanduto spargo sparsi spargero sparso spengo spensi spegner6 sp^nto spendo spesi spendero spdso spergo spersi spergerd sperso spingo spinsi apingerd spinto s to stetti (stei) staro (sterd) stato stendo stesi (stendei) stenderd stdso strido stride! striderd stingo (sfcigno) stinsi (stignerd) st into stringo strinsi stringerd str6tto struggo, strussi struggcro strut to fivello, sv61go svelsi svellerd svelto suggo ( suggei (siiKsi) suggerd ticio (taccio) tacqui (tacci) tacerd taciuto ten i.lo tesi (tendel) teuderd Mso ten go (tegno) tenrri (tenii) terrd (tenerd) tenia to tesso tessei tesaerd tessiito tingo (tigiio) tinsi tignerd tinto tdglio, tolgo t61si torrd tdlto fcdndo tondei tonderd tonduto tdrco torsi torcerd tdrto tdrpo torpente traggo (trio) traasi trarrd tratto uccido uccisi ucciderd ucciso ddo udii udird (udrd) mli to ungo (ugno) unsi tragerd unto &RCQ uscii (escii) uscirn nacito fesclto) valgo (v*glio) vilri (valci) varro (Talerd) valuto (vAlso) Tedo, veggo vidi (veddi) vetlrd vediito (visto) vengo venni (venii) verro (venird) veniito(vento| vinco vinsi viucero vinto (vitto) vivo vissi (vivei) Tiverd Tivuto vdglio, to* volli (volsi) vorrd vol i to vdlgo vdlsi volgerd Tdlto vdlvo volverd ll 21* 246 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. \zhctibz B&xhs, Defective Verbs ending in ere {long'), accented. calere, coldre or cdlere, lecere and licdre, \ . lecere and Reere, f to care for. to adore. to be lawful. pavdre, to fear. silere, to be or keep silent soldre, to be wont. stupdre, to be astonished. Defective Verbs ending in 8re (short). arrdgere, cdpere, chdrere, conve'llere, ulcere, mdlcere, to be chill. riddere, to return. to afflict. sdrpere, to creep. to add. to contain. soffdlcere, \ soffdlgere, J to support. to ask. tdngere, to touch. to convulse. tdllere, to take away. to wound. tdrpere, to be benumbed to shine. ■drgere, to urge. to assuage. vigere, to be vigorous. Defective Verbs ending in ire. (re, to go. gtre, to go. dire, to smell. DEFECTIVE VERBS. 247 VARIATION OF DEFECTIVE VERBS. (These verbs are used only in the tenses and persons which are here given.) Calere. INFINITIVE MOOD. Present. | Past. ealGre, to care for. j tesere caluto, to have cared for. GERUND. calendo, caring for. PARTICIPLE. cellule^ cared for. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. I Imperfect. c&le or cdl, he cares for. I caUva or cale.a, be cared for. i Perfect cAlse, he cared for. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. I Imperfect. cagli a, that he care for. | calisse, if he cared for. IMPERATIVE MOOD. CAGLIA dgh\ let him care for. Calere is generally used with the conjunctive pronouns mi, ti, ei, vi, gli: thus, mi cdle, I care for; ci caleva, we cared for; etc. 248 ITALIAN GRAMMAK. Colore or C61ere. INFINITIVE MOOD. colore or cdlere, to adore. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. tc6lo) t (Me), I adore. he adores. Lec6re and Lic£re, or L£cere and Licere. INFINITIVE MOOD. leccre and licirej to be lawful. j essere lecito or 1'icito* to be lawful. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. lice or lice, it is lawful. Pav6re. INFINITIVE MOOD. pavfre t to fear. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. pave, be fears. Sil^re. INFINITIVE MOOD. silere, to be or keep silent. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present, t'ili\ thou art or keepest silent. skle.y he is or keeps silent. * From this form are derived i Ucito, it is lawful ; 6ra or fu Ucito. it was lawful * sard UcitOy it will be lawful ; etc., which are used to supply the tenses in which lecire is defective. DEFECTIVE VERBS. 249 Sotere. INFINITIVE MOOD. fo&re, to be wont. | essere sdlito, GERUND. solendo, being wont. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. to be wont. SdGLIO, BUdLI, eudLE (site), I am wont. 1 .sogliamo {solemo), thou art wont. solete, he is wont. | sogliono, Imperfect. 10 sol&va or soUa z I was wont. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. lo sdOLiA, that I am wont or may be wont. Imperfect. to soUssi, if I were wont or should be wont. we are wont, you are wont. they are wont. Stup£re. INFINITIVE MOOD. stupcre, to be astonished. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. stupe, he is astonished. Algere. 6Zsi t algistij the. INFINITIVE MOOD. algere, to be chill. INDICATIVE MOOD. Perfect. I was chill, thou wast chill. he was chill. algimmOj algiste^ dlseroy we were chill, you were chill, they were chill. 250 ITALIAN GBAMMAR. Angere. INFINITIVE MOOD. Angere, to afiiict. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. I Imperfect. &nge, it afflicts. | ang&oa, it afflicted. Arr6gere. INFINITIVE MOOD. arrigere, to add. GERUND. arrogindo, adding. PARTICIPLE. ARe6to or ABK<5so, added. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. arrdge, . . . I arrog'i&mo, he adds; | arrdgono, Imperfect. io arrog&va or arrogda, I added we add. they add. arrogesttj ARB.6SE, Perfect I added. | arrogdmmoj thou addedst. arrogdste, he added. | apjx6seko, we added. you added. they added. C&pere. INFINITIVE MOOD. c&pere, to contain. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. I cape, it contains. I capeva, it contained. DEFECTIVE VERBS. 251 Chdrere. c/utrc. INFINITIVE MOOD. cJiey&re, to ask. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. I ask. he asks. Conv^llere. INFINITIVE MOOD. conveUers, to convulse. GERUND. conveUendo, convulsing. PARTICIPLE. COKYtfxso, convulsed. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. conveUe, he convulses. [ conve'Uono, they convulse. Imperfect. conveUeva or -Ma, he convulsed. | conveUdvano or 46ano, they convulsed. Future. he shall convulse. | conveHeran.no, convellerd, convellesse, SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Imperfect. if he convulsed. | conveUessero, they shall convulse if they convulsed. cmveUeribbc, CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present. he should convulse. | conveUerebbero, they should convulse. 252 ITALIAN GBAMMAB. fiido, JMdi, ftidt, Fiddere. INFINITIVE MOOD. Jttdere, to wound. GERUND. Jied&ndo, wounding. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. I wound, thou woundest. he wounds. JUdonOf Imperfect. to Jied&va or Jiedea, I wounded. Perfect. JiedH, I wounded. they wound. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. to fiida {fiiggia\ that I wound. tgli JUdia {Jieggia), that he wound. Ji6da.no, Imperfect. to fiedissi, If I wounded. that they wound. DEFECTIVE VERBS. 253 Lticere. frice, tucisti. Igti (Ziica), INFINITIVE MOOD tucere, to shine. gerund. lucent! o, shining. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. • • . • 1 luc'idmt, thou sliinest. Incite^ he shines. | . . • we shine, you shine. Imperfect. \o lucdva, I shone. Perfect. thou shinest. | luciste, ■we shone, you shone. Future. lucerd t I shall or frill shine. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Preserei. luc'iate, {lucano), that we shine. that you shine, that they shine. that he shine. to lucissi, if I shone or should shine. CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present, lucerii (luceria), if I should, would, or could shine, or might shine. M<5lcere. INFINITIVE MOOD. mdlcere, to s INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. mild, mike. thou assuagest. hes Imperfect. \o molciva, . I assuaged. mokevi, thou ossuage&st. igli molctoia, he assuaged. 22 254 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. Ri6dere. INFINITIVE MOOD. riedere, to return. riidOj I return. ri^di. thou returnest. riede. he returns. INDICATIVE MOOD. ri&donO) io riideva or ned6a } I returned. riedevi, thou returnedst. igli riedeva, he returned. Imperfect. io riida, tu rieda, igli rieda, riedfoanoy SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. that I return, that thou return, that he return. riidanO) they return. they returned. that they return. S^rpere. INFINITIVE MOOD. sfrpere, to creep. GERUND. sdrpendo, creeping. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. serpo t serpe. I creep, thou creepest. he creeps. 1 sfrponoj Imperfect io serp&va, serpivi, egli serp&ua t I crept, thou creptest. he crept. | serpevano. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD, Present. lesdrpa t tu sfrpa, igli sfrpdj that I creep. that thou cree{ that he creep. , 1 ::: | s&rpanO) they creep. they crept. that they creep. DEFECTIVE VERBS. 255 Soflftlcere or Soffolgere. INFINITIVE MOOD. sojfftilcere or soJF6lgere y to support. PARTICIPLE. sqffUlto, supported. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. t Perfect. toff6lce or soffdlge, he supports. j sqff"6lse t he supported. T&ngere. IOTTNITIVE MOOD. tangere, to touch. INDICATIVE MOOD; Present. tcmge, he touches. T6llere. INFINITIVE MOOD. totUre, to take away. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. t6Ui, thou takest away. j . . . . • tdlle, he takes away. . . . a • SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. lu t6Ua, that thou take away. I . . . . • egli tdua. that he take away. | . . . • • ^ • . . • IMPERATIVE MOOD. tdlla dgli, let him take away. EstdUere (to lift), compound of tdllere, is defective only in the participle, and in all the persons of the perfect of the indicative. 256 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. Ttfrpere. infinitive mood. tdrpere, to become numb. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. tdrpo, I become numb. I tdrpe t be becomes numb. | SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. io t&rpa, that I become numb. tu tdrpa, that thou become numb. tgli tirpa, that be become numb. TJrgere. INFINITIVE MOOD. irgere, to urge. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present, i-rge, he urges. Imperfect. tgli vrgiva or virgin, he urged. | urglvano, they urged. Vfgere. INFINITIVE MOOD. vigere, to be vigorous. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. vige, he ia vigorous. Future. vigerd, it will be rigorous. DEFECTIVE VERBS. 257 Gfre. INFINITIVE MOOD. gire, to go. PARTICIPLE. g'do, gone. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. . . . . ! giamo, we go. gite, you go. Imperfect. giva or gia, I went. Perfect. to gr'w, I went. Future. gird, I shall or will go. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. . . . . I g'tdmO) that we go or may go. . . . [ g'iate, *Jiat you go. Imperfect. io gissi, if I went or should go. CONDITIONAL MOOD. girdi, giria, I should, would, or could go, or might go. IMPERATIVE MOOD. I g'iamo, let us go. gilt, go ye. 22* 258 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. Ire. INFINITIVE MOOD. ire, to go. PARTICIPLE. ito, gone. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present, ite, you go. Imperfect. to iva r I went i iva.no, we went. igli iva, he went. | . . . ... Perfect. lilt, thou wentest. | (iro, if), they went. Future. .... i iremo, we shall or will go j irite, you will go. ..... i irano, they will go. CONDITIONAL MOOD. (iriano), they should, would, or could go, or might go. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Ite, go ye. OHre. INFINITIVE MOOD. oZire, to smell. INDICATIVE MOOD. Imperfect* lo oZico, I smelted. [ ... olivij thou smellcdst. 1 ... igli o&va, he smelled. j olivano, they smelted. PROVERBS. 259 PEOVEEBS. A word to the wise is enough, All that is fair must fade, A ragged coat finds little credit, Any thing for a quiet life, A great liar has need of a good memory, An old horse for a young soldier, A huttered mouth cannot say no, A good appetite needs no sauce, A good beginning makes a good ending, A barking dog does' not bite, A voluntary burden is no burden, A gold key opens every door, A fat kitchen, a lean testament, A new broom sweeps clean, Aught is better than naught, All is not gold that glitters, A sin confessed is half forgiven, A little spark kindles a great fire, A rolling stone gathers no moss, A little gall makes u. great deal of honey bitter, As you would have a daughter, choose a wife, Anger increases love, All's well that ends well, A married man is a caged bird, An ounce of discretion is worth more than a pound of knowl- edge, A tasting stomach has no ears, After the horse is stolen, shut the barn-door, A bird in the hand is worth two in the bush, ■"Jend the tree while it is young, Better late than never, Better a happy heart than a full purse, setter bend than break, xsetter give the wool than the sheep, Big head and little wit, A budn intenditdr pdche parole. Bella cdsa tdsto e rapita. A veste logorita pdca fdde vien pros- tata. Alia pace si pub sacrificar tiitto. A un gran bugiardo ci vudl budna memdria. A gidvane soldato vecchio cavallo. Boeca linta non pub dir di no. Budn appetito non vudl salsa. Budn principio fa budn fine. Can che abbaia non mdrde. Carica volontaria non carica. Cbiave d'dro apre dgni porta. Grassa eucfna, magro testamento. Granata nudva spazza ben la casa. Meglio e pdco che niente. 6ro non e tiitto quel che risplende. Peccato confessato e mezzo perdo- nato. Piccdla favilla accende gran fudco. Pietra mdssa non fa miischio. Pdco fiele fa amaro mdlto miele. Qual figlia vuoi, tal mdglie piglia. Sdegno aumenta amdre. Tiitto e bene che riesce bene. XJdmo ammogliato, uccello in gabbia. Val piii un' oncia di discrezidne che una Kbbra di sapere, Vdntre digiiino non ode nessiino. Ddpo che i cavalli sdno pr^si, serrar la staila. il m^gho un uccello in gabbia che cento fudri. Piega l'albero quSindo e gidvane. Meglio tardi che mai. i, meglio il cudr felice che la bdrsa pidna, fe mdglio piegare che rompdre. & muglio dar la lana che la pe'cora. Capo grasso, cervello migro. 260 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. Bad news travels fost, Counsel is nothing against lore, Comparisons are odious, Christmas comes but once in a year, Do what you ought, come what may, Do not count your chickens before they are hatched, Delays are dangerous, Different times, different manners, Drop by drop wears away a stone, Do not look a gift horse in the mouth, Every thing is good in its season, Every dog is a lion at home, Every truth is not good to be told, Every body knows where his shoe pinches, Every one for himself, and God for us all, Every body praises his own saint, Every body's friend, nobody's friend, Every one thinks his own cross the heaviest, Extreme ills, extreme remedies, Friends in need are friends indeed, For a web begun, God sends thread, Fair words, but look to your purse, Four eyes see more than two, Fortune comes to him who seeks her, Forbidden fruit is sweet, Father Modest never was a prior, From those I trust, God guard me ; from those I mistrust, I will guard myself, God helps him who helps himself, Give to him that has, Give time, time, God sends meat, and the devil sends cooks, Great griefs are mute, Great smoke, little fire, Gold does not buy every thing, Good wine makes good blood, He who succeeds is reputed wise, He who knows nothing, knows enough if he knows how to be silent, He is blind who cannot see the sun, He who sings drives away sorrow, Le cattive nudve vdlano. Cdntro amdre nori e consiglio. I paragdni son tutti odidsi. Natale non viene che una vdlta Van- no. Fa quel che devi, n' arrivi cib che potra. Non far cdnto dell' udvo non ancdr nato. L' indugiare e pericdloso. Altri tempi, altri costiimi. A gdccia a gdccia si trafdra la pietra. A caval donate, non guardarin bdc- ca. Da stagidne tutto e budno. Ogni cane e ledne a casa sua. Ogni yero non e budno a dire. Ogmino sa dove la scarpa lo strfnge. Ogmin per se, e Di'o per tutti. Ogmino ldda il prdprio santo. Amico d' ogmino, amico di nesstino. Ad ogmino par piii grave la crdue sua. Ai mali estremi, estremi rimedi. A bisdgni si condscon gli amici. A tela ordita Di'o manda il Jfilo. Belle parole, ma guarda la bdrsa. Veddn piu quattr' dochi che due. Vien la fortiina a chi la prociira. I friitti proibiti sdno ddlci. Era modesto non fu mai pridre. Da chi mi f ido, mi guardi Iddio ; da chi non mi f ido mi guardero id. Chi s'aiuta, Di'o l'aiuta. Da del tiio a chi ha del silo. Da tempo al tempo. Dio ci manda la came, ma il diavolo i cudchi. I gran doldri sdno miiti. Gran fiirao, pdco arrdsto. L'dro non cdmpra tutto. Budn vino fa budn sangue. A chi la riesce bene, e tenuta pe» savio. Assai sa, chi non sa, se tacer sa. Ben e cieco chi non vede il sole Chi canta, i sudi mali spaventa PEOTEEBS. 261 lie who buys in time, buys cheap, He laughs well who laughs last, Hear, see, and say nothing, if you would live in peace, He is master of another man's life who is indifferent to his own, He gives twice who gives in a trice, He who stands may fall, He that reckons without his host must reckon again, Hell is full of good intentions, Habit is a second nature, In at one ear, and out at the other, HI weeds grow apace, Look before you leap, Like master, like man, Live, and let live, Love me, love my dog, Love rules without law, Love me little, and love me long, Love knows not labor, Let him who is well off stay where he is, Long tongue, short hand, Marry in haste, repent at leisure, Many a true word spoken in jest, Much smoke and little fire, Make me a prophet, and I will make you rich, Nothing venture, nothing have, Nothing is difficult to a willing mind, Near the church, far from God. Old reckonings, new disputes, One enemy is too many, and a hun- dred friends are too few, One hand washes the other, and both hands wash the face, One word brings another, One swallow does not make a sum- mer, One man warned is as good as two, Out of sight, out of mind, Poor as a church mouse, Poverty has no kin, Physician, heal thyself, Pluck the rose and leave the thorns, Rather hat in hand than hand in purse, Eoses grow among thorns, Chi cdmpra a tempo, cdmpra a budn mereato. Bide be'ne che ride 1'iiltimo. 6di, ve'di e taci se vudi viver in , pace. E padrone della vita altriii chi la sua sprezza. , Chi da presto, da il ddppio. Chi e ritto pub cadere. Chi fa il cdnto senza l'dste, gli con- vien farlo due volte. Di budna volonta e pieno l'inferno. L' abito e una secdnda natura. De'ntro da un orecchio e fudri dall' altro. La mal erba cresce presto. Guarda innanzi che tu salti. Tal padrone, tal servitdre. VTvi, e lascia vivere. Chi ama me, ama il mio cine. Amor regge se"nza legge. Amami pdco, ma continua. Amor non condsce travaglio. Chi sta bene non si mudva. Lunga lingua, cdrta mano. Chi si marita in fretta, stenta adagio. Quel che pare biirla, ben sovente e vero. Mdlto furno e pdco fudco. Pammi indovi'no, e ti faro ricco. Chi non s'arrischi non guadagna. A chi vudle, non e«dsa difficile. Vicino alia chiesa lontan di Dio. A cdnti vecchi, contese nudve. E trdppo un nemico, e cento amici non bastano. Una mano lava l'altra e tiitt' e due lavano il viso. tjna pardla tira l'altra. Un fidre non & Primavera. Un avvertfto ne val due. Lontano dagli dcchi, lontano del cudre. Povero come un tdpo in chiesa. Poverta non ha pare'nti. Me'dico, ciira te ste'sso. Cdgli la rdsa, e lascia le spine. Piuttdsto cappello in mano, che mano alia bdrsa. Anco tra le spine nascono le rose. 262 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. Saying is one thing, and doing is another, Silence gives consent, Strike while the iron is hot, See Naples, and then die, Savings are the first gain, Seeing is believing, Second thoughts are best, The full belly does not believe in hunger, To pay one in his own coin, Think much, speak little, and write less, Translators, traitors, The weakest goes to the wall, They say, is a liar, The people's voice, God's voice, To fall out of the frying-pan into the fire, The biter is sometimes bit, The world is governed with little brains, True love never grows old, The liar is not believed when he speaks the truth, The workman is known by his work, There is always a calm before a storm, The beard does not make the phi- losopher, There is no love without jealousy, There is no smoke without fire, The steed is starving whilst the grass is growing, The devil is not so ugly as he is painted, The best is the cheapest, Teaching we learn, To cast pearls before swine, The earth covers the errors of the physician, There is no disputing about tastes, The doctor seldom takes medicine, .' The world was not made in one day, 'i ell me the company you keep, and I will tell you what you are, Whoever brings, finds the door open for him, Where there is a will, there's a way, Well begun is half done, Altra cdsa e il dire, altra il fare. Chi tace, acconsente. Batti il ferro quand e caldo. Ve'di Napoli e pdi mudri. Lo sparagno c il prfmo guadagno. Chi con I'dcchio vede, di cudr crede II secdndo pensiero e il miglidre. Cdrpo satdllo non cre'de al digiiino. Pagar uno della sua propria moneta. P6nsa mdlto, parla pdco, scrivi meno Traduttdri, traditdri. Sempre ha tdrto il pin ddbole. Si dice, e mentitdre. Voce di pdpolo, voce di Dio. Cader della padella nelle bragie. Chi biirla, vien burlato. Con pdco cervdllo si governa il mdndo. Amor vero non diventa canuto. Al bugiardo non si crede la verita. All opera si condsce il maestro. La bonaccia burrasca minaccia. La barba non fa il fildsofo. Non c'e amor senza gelosia. Non c'e fumo senza fudco. Mentre l'e'rba cresce il cavaTlo muore di fame. II diavolo non e cdsi briitto come si dipinge. II miglidre e men caro. Insegnando s'impara. Gettar le marguerite ai pdrci. Gli errdri del me'dico gli cdpre la t6rra. Dei giisti non se ne dispiita. Di rae.") I (the sign of plural), 28, 32; exceptions, 33 ; elision of, 18, 189, 195 ; addition of, 200. (See"IZ.") Idioms, Italian, 263. II, i, 17; contraction of, 23; as pronouns, 55, 98, 162 ; suppression of, 74 ; used for prepositions, 42. Imperative mood, 160, 214 ; pronouns after, 51 ; irregular verbs and, 214. Imperfect tense, 150, 156. Impersonal verbs, 147, 155. 210, 212 ; how varied, 210 ; list of, 147, 211 ; cssere and, 147, 212 ; pronouns and, 49, 148. (See "Verbs.") In, 129, 136, 163 ; where placed, 130 ; union with article, 22, 131 ; becomes ne, 22. Indefinite adjective pronouns, 109, 115. (See "Pronouns.") Indefinite article. (See "Article.") Indicative mood, 154, 156, 162, 196, 198, 201 ; irregular verbs and, 214. Inferiority, comparative of, 68. Infinitive mood, 159 ; article and, 20, 147 ; pronouns and, 57 ; terminations of, 147 ; used as a noun, 147, 160 ; as third per- son, 160; present participle and, 163; issere and, 161 ; Ite, lei, and, 160 : im- perative and, 160 ; contraction of, 214. INDEX. 277 Interjections, 182; in common use, 182; derivation of some, 183 ; agreement of, 183. Interrogative pronouns. 50, 91; phrases, 50,91. Irregular plurals,, 36. Irregular verbs, 166, 214 ; how varied, 214 ; first conjugation, 214; second, 219-233 ; third, 234-241; table of, 242. (See "Verbs.") fssimo, 73. 74. Italian alphabet, 1; grammar, 1; idioms, 263 ; proverbs, 259. Italianisms, with possessive pronouns, 100 ; with tutto, etc., 112 ; with anddre, dare, 167 ; stare, fare, 168. La, 17 ; its plural, 17 ; contraction of, 23 ; as pronoun, 55, 162 ; as inflection of ella, 11, 56 ; before verbs, 56 ; its place, 57 ; before numerals, 83 ; elision of, 18, 56. id, adverb, 173. Le, 17, 18; contraction of, 23; as pronoun, 48, 51, 55, 162; before verbs, 56; its place, 57 ; before numerals, 83 ; elision of. 18. Letters, 1 ; sounds of, 1. Li, article, 17 ; as pronoun, 55 ; before verbs, 56: its place, 57. Li, adverb, 173. Lo, 17 ; its plural, 17 ; contraction of, 22 as pronoun, 55, 162 ; before verbs, 56 its place, 57 ; used for preposition, 42 elision of, 17, 22, 56. Ldro, 48, 52, 97. M. Mano, 125. Mien, teco, sico, etc., 51. Meno or maneo, 17, 68, 70, 74, 172, 174. Mezzo, 63. Monosyllables, union of, 55, 57. Months of the year, 39. N. Names, proper, 19, 35, 41, 65. Ne. 51, 55, 118, 142, 149, 162, 213, 215,219. (See "In.") Neuter verbs, 206 ; how varied, 208 ; be- come pronominal, 209. (See " Verbs.") Mm, 56, 58. 117. 149. 160. 171. u Nothing." 93, 110, 116, 117, 174. Nouns, 26; general remarks on, 29; gen- der of. 27 ; plural of, 32 ; double plu- rals, 37 ; irregular plurals. 35 ; cases of, 40 ; terminations of, 27-36 : proper. 19, 35, 41, 65 ; abstract, 19 ; invariable, 33 ; relation expressed by di, a, da, 40 ; vari- ation of nouns, 41 ;/words used as, 19; possessive pronouns used as, 98 ; infini- tive used as, 20, 147, 160 ; numeral adjectives and. 83 ; nouns used as ad- jectives, 62; suppression of the noun after uno } 85 ; exercise upon the noun, 38. Number, 15; of articles, 17; of nouns, 32; of adjectives, 32, 61 ; pronouns. 36, 97. Numeral adjectives, 82 ; how divided, 82 ; cardinal numbers, 82 ; ordinal, 84 j fractional and collective, 84. o. O. sounds qf, 2. Objective, repetition of, 66. " Of," rendered by il or lo, 42. Ogni, 109-111; ognidl. 109. Onde, 93; ddnde, 173, 175. Ora, 83, 172 ; ogndra, 109, 172. Ordinal numbers, 84. Orthoe'py, 1. Orthography, 1. 6sso. 34. Paradigms of verba. (See " Verbs.") Pari, 62. Participles, 161 ; agreement of, 161 ; place of 64. Present, 162 ; how expressed, 162 ; of active verbs, 188 ; prepositions and, 163; infinitive and, 163; che and, 162. Past, 161; of active verbs, 188; of passive, 204 ; of neuter, 206 ; avere, 161; dssere, 142, 161, 187. Pronouns and, 58, 162 ; irregular verbs and, 214 ; as qualificative adjectives, 73; contrac- tion of, 161. Particles, 41, 43, 211 ; expletive, 149. Parts of speech, 15. Passive verbs, 147, 204 ; much used, 147 ; formation of, 142, 204 ; how active verbs become passive, 147, 205 ; past participle of, 204. Per, with the article, 24; contraction of, 24 ; as preposition, 122, 129, 131. Perchd, 175, 181. Perfect definite, 150, 192, 194, 214. Personal pronouns. (See " Pronouns.") Phrases, adverbial, 123, 124, 176; con- junctive, 181 ; idiomatical, 143, 263 ; in- terrogative, 50*91. P»l, 17, 67, 70, 74, 172, 174. Plural of articles, 17; nouns and adjec- tives, 32, 61 ; pronouns, 36, 97 ; irregu- lar. 36. Poetical pieces, 176, 183. Possessive pronouns. (See " Pronouns.") Prepositions, 121, 129, 135 ; in common use, 122 ; union of articles and, 22, 41, 125 ; use of various, 137 ; after personaJ pronouns, 137 ; present participles and, 163; repetition of prepositions, 85. Pronominal verbs, 208; variation of, 208 (see " Verbs ") ; pronouns and, 51. Pronouns, 46; place of, 49, 57; suppres- sion of, 49 ; transposition of, 58 ; appo- sition of, 49 ; elision of, 52, 56 ; imper sonal verbs and, 49 ; pronominal verba and, 61; infinitive and, 57; past parti 278 INDEX. ciples and, 58 ; euphonic rules, 57 ; doubling of consonants, 58. Personal pronouns in the nominative, 46, 49 ; in the objective, 47, 50, 55 ; verbs and, 148 i past participles and, 162 ; preposi- tions and, 137. Possessive adjective, 20, 97 ; plural of, 36, 97 ; division of, 97 ; variation of, 98 ; agreement of, 98 ; per- sonal pronouns and, 99 ; as nouns, 98 ; . as Italiauisms, 100 ; as expletives, 149 ; use of, with article, 20, 98, 99; demon- stratives added to, 105. Indefinite, 109, 115 ; used in singular, 109 , in plural, 110. Relative, 89, 97. Demonstrative, 103 ; added to possessive, 105- Interrog- ative, 50, 91. Conjunctive, 48, 55. 97, 209, 215, 219. Disjunctive, 97. Reflec- tive, 51. Pronunciation, 1 : exercise in, 4 ; reading- exercise in, 5-15. Prdprio, 98. Prosody, 1. Proverbs, Italian, 259. Pure, 181. Q. Qu&le, 36, 90, 116, 155, 162 ; use of, 91. Quanto, 62, 69, 70. Quello, 104. Qutsto, 104-106. R. Beading-lessons, 5, 20, 25, 30, 37, 44, 52, 69, 65, 70, 74, 86, 94, 100, 106, 113, 118, 126, 132, 138, 143, 150, 156, 164, 169, 176, 183. Reflective verbs, 208. (See " Pronominal Verbs.") Regular verbs, 188; synoptical table of the variations of, 202. (See " Verbs.") Relative pronouns, 89, 97. s. &,*47, 50, 51,118. Second conjugation, 192 ; division of, 192 ; first class, 192 ; second class, 194 ; irreg- ular verbs, 219-233. (See " Verbs.") <( g e jf j i 49 Si, 5l', 57,*100, 117, 147, 149, 162, 205, 209, 219, 221, 228, 229, 230, 247. Signdre, Signdra, etc., 19, 56, 99: elision of, 19. "Some." 43, 110, 112. S6mmo, 73. Sdpra, used for su, 24. Sounds of vowels, 2 ; of consonants, 2 ; of e, 2 ; of o, 2 ; compound, 3. Speech, parts of, 15. Sta, abbreviation of qudsta, 105. St&re, 160, 166: conjugation of, 218; ita compounds, 166, 219 ; Italianisms with, 167 ; conjunctive pronouns and, 219. Stra, as particle, 73. Su, with article, 22, 24 ; contraction of, 24 ; preposition, 122 ; sdpra used for, 24. Subjunctive mood, 153; when used, 154; tenses of, 156 ; irregular verbs and, 214 ; conjunctions and, 156. Substantives. (See "Nouns.") "Such," 62, 106, 110,112, Superiority, comparative of, 67. Superlatives of adjectives, 73; of adverbs, 172 ; of interjections, 183. Syllables, 4; termination of, 4 ; exceptions, 4 ; union of, 55, 57 ; suppression of, 63. Synoptical table of regular verbs, 202. Syntax, 1 ; of verbs, 146. T. Table, synoptical, of regular verbs, 202 : of irregular verbs, 242. (See "Verbs "j Tale, 36, 62, 106, 110, 112. Tanto, 69, 110. Tenses of dependent verbs in a compound sentence, 155. " Than," rendered by di and che, etc., 68 ; by come and cosi, 69. Third conjugation, 196 ; division into three classes, 196 ; first class, 196 ; second, 198 ; third. 201 ; irregular verbs, 234- 241 ; list of, 234. Titles, 19, 56, 99. " To be hungry," " thirsty," etc., 143. Tutto, 110, 149 ; its agreement with the noun, 111 ; as an Italianism, 112. U. TJ6mini, 36. tJnipersonal verbs, 210. (See " Impersonal Verbs.") Vho, un, -ana, 16, 43, 85, 110 ; when sup- pressed, 85; elision of, 85. Vscire, 42, 125 ; conjugation of, 240 Variations of regular verbs, 202. Venire, 125, 142, 148, 160 ; conjugation of, 241. Verbs, 141 ; syntax of, 146 ; general rules, 147 ; irregularities of, 214 ; moods of (see ''Infinitive," "Indicative," "Im- perative," and "Subjunctive Moods" ); tenses of (see "Imperfect," "Perfect Definite," and " Future Tenses ") ; par- ticiples of ( see " Participles " ). Place of the" verb, 149, 160 ; terminations of, 147 Article and verbs, 20, 147. Noun«» * Se (himself) was formerly written with an accent, — ae\ INDEX. 279 and verbs, 20, 147, 159, 160. Pro* nouns and verbs, 49, 51, 57, 91, 148. Union with diminutives, 79. Auxiliary verbs, 141, 186 ; conjugation of avdre, 186 (see "Avert"); of dssere, 187 (see ltssere " ). Regular verbs, 188. Active verbs, 188 (see " Active Verbs " ). First conjugation, 188 ; conjugation of amare, 188 ; of cercdre, 190 ; of pregare, 191. Second conjugation, 192 ; conjugation of temdre, 192 ; of tessere, 194. Third con- jugation, 196 ; conjugation of sent'tre, 196; of eriMre, 198 J of cucire, 200; of abborrire, 201. Synopsis of the varia- tions of regular verbs, 202. Passive verbs, 204 (see " Passive Verbs ") ; con- jugation of cssere amato, 204. Neuter verbs, 206 (see " Neuter Verbs ") ; con- jugation of partire, 206. Pronominal or reflective verbs, 208 (see "Pronominal Verbs) ; conjugation of pentirsi, 208. Unipersonal verbs, 210 (see " Imperson- al Verbs) ; conjugation of pidvere, 210 ; of dssere (unipersonally used), 212. Ir- regular verbs, 214 (see "Irregular Verbs "). First conjugation, 214 ; con- jugation of andare, 215 ; of dare, 216 ; of /drft, 217; of stare, 218 (see "Andare," "jDrire," "Fare," "Stare"). Second con- jugation, 219; conjugation of carfare, 220; of dissuaddre, 220 ; of doldre, 221; ofrfo- vdre, 222 {see "Dovere ") ; of giacdre, 223 ; otpardre, persuaddre, piaedre, 224 ; of potere, 225 ; of rhnandre, 226 ; of sapere, 227 ; of sedere, 228 ; of tacdre, 229; of tendre, 230; of valdre, 231; of ved&re, 232; of volere (see "Volere"), 233. Third conjugation, 234 ; conjuga- tion of dire, 234 ; of morire, 236 ; of satire, 237 ; ~bf seguhre, 238 ; of udire, 239 ; of uscire (see *« Uscirs "), 240 ; of venire (see "Venire"), 241. Table of irregular verbs, 242. Defective verbs, 246; conjugation of caldre, 247; of coldre or cdlere, lecdre- and licdre or idcere and licere, pavdre, stiere, 248 ; of soldre^ stupdre, algere, 249 ; of angere* arr6gere i capdre, 250 ; of chdrere, conveUdre, 251 ; ofjhddere, 252; of Mbcere, molcere, 253; of riddere, sdrpere, 254 ; of so.fdlcere or soffdlgere, tangere, tdilere, 255 ; of tdr- pete, Hirgere, vigere, 256 ; of gth, 257 ; of ire and olire, 258. "Very," before participles, 73. Vi, ci. (See "7?.") Via, 85, 147, 149. Vocabulary, Italian-English, 266 ; English- Italian, 270 ; of exercises, 45, 54, 60, 66, 71, 75, 88, 95, 102, 108, 114, 120, 128, 134, 139, 144, 151, 157, 165, 170, 178, 185. Volere, 148 ; with ci and «', 148 ; conjuga- gation of, 233. Vosigndria, 56. Vowels, 1, 4 ; sounds of, 2. TV. " Who." *' which," " what," etc., 90, 91 "Words, anion of, 21, 55, 57* EXERCISES ADAPTED TO CUORE'S ITALIAN COURSE, AND OTHER GRAMMARS. Boston: S. R. Ukbino. NEW TOKK: LEYPOLDT & HOLT, 451, BROOME STREET. , F. W. CHRISTERN, 863, BROADWAY. 1868. 6 EXERCISES FOE TRANSLATION. Exercise I. The Article. The father and mother. The uncle and his son. The brother has the pens. I have the books. Who has the house ? What has he ? He has the wine. She has not the book. The servant has the apples. What has the shoemaker ? The shoemaker has the shoes. Hast thou the penknife? Which seal has she? Who has the peach ? I have not the peach. I have the bread and the meat. He has the herbs. The man has a fig. The scholar has a book. Thou hast a pear. Have I a mirror? Who has a house ? Has he a memory ? She has a guide. The tailor has money. What has the domestic ? The domestic has the linen. Who has a friend ? My uncle has a friend. The mistress has no time. 1. There are seven primitive colors, — red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and violet. 2. See the churches, the palaces, the amphitheatres, and the arches, which have outlived so many generations of men ! 3. Annina looked at her weeping sister, at her dear old father, and then expired. 4. Vasco di Gama pre- sented to the King of Malabar the gifts, and the letters written, one in Arabic, and the other in Portuguese. 5. The ant is the emblem of industry. 6. Exercise and temperance strengthen the constitution. 7. Iron and steel are more useful than gold and silver. 8. Secrecy is the key of prudence. 9. Avarice is despicable. 10. The end crowns the work. 11. Walking i* [5] 6 EXERCISES FOE TRANSLATION. increases the appetite. 12. The gentle answer appeases anger. 13. Errors and wickednesses draw ridicule upon us. 14. Na- tions ought to love peace, and avoid war. 15. Employ your time well ; cultivate your mind ; love order. 1 6. Beading forms the heart, and enlightens the mind. 17. Health is the first condition of a happy life. 18. Gratitude produces all the other virtues. 19. At the age of eighteen, Romulus laid the founda- tion of a city which gave laws to the world. Exercise It. , Union of the Articles and Prepositions. The gardens of the brother. We are in the room. The knife is upon the table. The friends are in the garden. I have the handkerchiefs in my pocket. Tou are his friend. The voice of the man. The shoes are in the room. The wine is upon the table. I am not in the house. They are not in the city. The girl has no spectacles. She has no gold. Who is in the street ? Has he the neighbor's book (the book of the neighbor) ? Who has the father's stick ? Is she in the house ? No ; she is in the garden, under a tree. Has the tailor my brother's horse ? Who has your mother's pocket-handkerchief? I have it in the pocket of my coat. Is the key in the door, or under the table ? The man has bread and wine for his dinner. In the streets of the city. He has the roses from his friend. He writes with a pen. 1. Give me some bread, wine, butter, cheese, boiled meat, mutton, veal, pie, mustard, and salt. 2. The power of speech is a faculty peculiar to man. 3. The bird is known by his song. 4. Flowers are the ornament of gardens. 5. Riches are often fhe tariff of esteem. 6. They say that our honor is in the opin-i ion of others. 7. The eyes are the mirror of the soul. 8. The value of things is founded upon wants. 9. Climate influences the character of men. 10. We prove gold and silver with the touchstone, and the heart of men with gold and silver. 11. The EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 7 • law of necessity is always the first law. 12. The miser allows himself to die of hunger in the lap of plenty. 13. Poverty and misfortune bring about equality. 14. Best is the enemy of good. 15. Fortune has the first place in the things of the world. 16. Abundance of words is not always an (the) indication of the perfection of language. 17. History is the picture of times and of men. 18. The lamb and the dove ^re the emblems of meek- ness and humility. 19. True merit is always accompanied by modesty. 20. Clouds and fogs are formed by the vapors which come out of the earth. 21. He who opens his heart to ambition shuts it to repose. 22. The wise man prefers the useful to the agreeable, and the necessary to the useful. 23. Poverty and ignorance are the followers of negligence and sloth. 24. The road from virtue to vice is much shorter than from vice to virtue. 25. Health is the daughter of exercise and temperance. 26. A salutation, a word of love to the unhappy, is a great kindness. Exercise in. The Noun. My brother is a dentist. Tour father is my neighbor. My mother is your neighbor. "We have a horse and a mare. They have a peach-tree and an apple-tree in their garden. This woman has flowers in her garden. Have you seen the king? Is the soup cold ? This is a hare. Is study a pleasure ? They have seen the Pope of Rome. I have an apple in my hand. Have you a fig and an orange ? Give some fruit to my brother. The man has a cow and an ox. Iron is a metal. Silver is also a metal. We are in the path. My uncle has a crane. Is this your daughter ? Am I your friend (f) ? Who is a philosopher ? Is your neighbor poor or rich ? Who has gold ? This man has gold ; but he has no heart. The cathedral of this city is rich ; but the people are poor. I am a neighbor to a poor woman. The frog is in the hedge. In the morning. The basket of fruit is on the table. Eggs are good for breakfast. 8 EXERCISES FOE TRANSLATION. • Give me some bread and butter with my good eggs. My brother has a basket of good fruit. The cat is in the yard. Is the meat in the kitchen? The child has a dove. This woman has some currants. 1. Paper, pencils, inkstand, ink, sponge, chalk, sand, &c, are used in school. 2. The bench, chair, desk, table, arm-chair, and sofa, are articles of furniture. 3. Among instruments, we have the hammer, the awl, the axe, the mallet, the saw, the needle, the file, and the screw. 4. For table-ware, there are the table- cloth, the napkin, the plate, the salt-cellar, the porringer, the knife, the fork, the fruit-dish, basket, &c. 5. The mason, the builder, the tailor, the shoemaker, the weaver, the baker, the car- penter, the farrier, the wheelwright, the barber, the butcher, the hatter, are all artisans. 6. Affected behavior is the mask of ignorance. 7. We should never judge of the good or bad character of persons by the expression of their face. 8. The only rose without thorns is the Alpine rose. 9. Tobacco is an American plant. 10. A good conscience is a good pillow. 11. The moth which flies about the lamp finally burns his wings. 12. We obtain love and friendship by modesty and humility. 13. The eye delights in the verdure of the earth and the beauty of the sky. 1.4. In that valley, I saw a little village, an old castle in ruins, and a. convent. Exercise. IV. The Plural of Nouns and Adjectives. The good sisters. Celebrated men. Gray coats. The men are good, and the women are good. The girl has handsome hands. My shoes are narrow. The kings are in the city. You are not unhappy. The tailor has a pair of boots. Her sleeves are narrow. This baker has good bread. Give me some of his bread and cheese. Is the king in his palace. I have a cow and two oxen. The physicians are in a hotel. We have asparagus upon the table. I have seen mice upon the table. EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 9 She has rings on her fingers. Give me two bushels of oranges. Who has two wives ? The Romans have good oxen. We have good horses and cows. Children are not fools. Your sisters have no sweetmeats for supper. I have seen the bones and the claws of the crane. Has your sister seen the beautiful houses of the rich ladies ? No ; but she has seen their beautiful lakes and woods. 1. The merchants sell tea and chocolate. 2. The shoemaker makes boots and shoes. 3. There are many ancient temples in Italy. 4 The scholars have neither ink, writing-paper, nor pens. 5. The stone urns in the garden came from Naples. 6. I have sent a dozen handkerchiefs to the washerwoman. 7. The tailor makes cloaks and overcoats. 8. Oxen and horses are useful animals. 9. There are birds upon the flowers and upon the trees. 10. The strangers have bought coats. 11. There are diamonds, pearls, emeralds, and other precious stones. 12. The streets of B. are narrow. 13. The country bakers are not friends of the city bakers. 14 All workmen and work- women are employed at this season. 15. God is the father of man, and the preserver of all creatures. 16. The inhabitants of Gadara honored poverty with a peculiar worship ; they consid- ered it as the mother of industry and the arts. 17. The man who does not see good in others is not good himself. 18. Misers resemble the horses who carry wine and drink water, and the asses who carry gold and eat thistles. 19. The rivers of Nigrizia and Guinea do not flow through plains and valleys, but rush from cataract to cataract. 20. It has been said, that a fine city without monuments is like a beautiful woman without a souL 21. Ribbons, flowers, and lights make incredible meta- morphosis. 22. The variety of trees and precious shrubs of landscape gardening were things unknown to the ancients. 23. The verdant, rich, and luxurious., plains which are found in Piedmont are the best-cultivated lands of all Europe. 24 The order and beauty of the world are manifest proofs of the exist- ence of a Supreme Being. 25. We know good fountains in dry 10 EXERCISES FOE TRANSLATION'. weather, and friends in adversity. 26. The grass grows to the height of twelve feet in the vast plains of Africa ; and, under this gigantic grass, wander panthers, lions, and the enormous reptile boa. 27. When Orpheus was playing on the lyre, tigers, bears, and lions came to fawn upon him and lick his feet. 28. The muses were goddesses of science and art. 29. Men kill oxen, sheep, deer, and even birds and fish, to feed upon them. Exercise. V. Cases of Nouns. I have no good letter-paper. I wish to write letters to Paris. Have you a pocket-dictionary ? Is it not time to dine ? Give me the silver spoons. My brother has a cask of good wine. The children are in the yard. Have you not seen the flowers on the walls ? Here are your father's books. "We see with our eyes, and hear with our ears. The cows are in the water. The eggs are in the nests of the birds. My father has a saddle- horse and two hunting-dogs. Have you my brother's pens? Who gave me this book? Have you seen the gunpowder? Have you dined to-day ? Yes ; I have dined with some rela- tions. What have you for breakfast ? I have bread alone for breakfast. What does he sell? He sells tobacco and gun- powder. Let us go to buy some ink. Send Luigi to the post. Whose hat is this ? It is not my friend's hat. To whom do you write? Write to your sister. I write to my friends. Whom do you see ? I see some girls in the street. Have you money ? No ; but I have good friends. Is this a hunting-dog ? 1. In the city, there are tailors and tailoresses, men-shoemakers and women-shoemakers. 2. The sun shines by day, and the moon by night. 3. No one is sheltered from calumny. 4. The language of a modest man gives lustre to truth. 5. A babbler is troublesome to society. 6. A foolish man doubts nothing. 7. Abundance of riches do not make us happy. 8. Adonis was a youth of extreme beauty. 9. Hope leads us by an agreeable EXEECISES FOR TRANSLATION. 11 road to the end of life. 10. The goods which the merchant consigned to his sons have arrived. 11. The soldiers have ccme from Georgia. 12. The rules of this Grammar are easy. 13. Patriarchs are monarchs of the Church. 14. Mr. A. has received the catalogues from the library. 15. Success is for. him who seizes upon it. 16. Fanaticism is, to superstition, what excitement is to fever ; what rage is to anger. 17. Woe to the man whose only ambition is to please mean men ! 18. The religious fanaticism of the Puritans was the promoter and' the support of the revolution in England. Exercise VI and VII. Pronouns. "Who are you ? I am your friend. What do you wish of me ? Have you money ? I have need of money. He has written a letter. What have you said to me? A daughter is born to him. Does it rain ? No ; it snows. They are with her in my father's house. Tell him and her that I love them. I wrote a letter to her. They are writing to you. I shall go to the post myself. Do you think of me? I think of you. Give me a good stick. Think no more of them. What has he said to you of them? Let him do it. I do not wish to do as you do. Who is there ? It is I. It is he. He speaks of us. I give you this ring because I love you. Will you send this letter to him ? He loves his friend. I love you, arid you love me. I will go with you. She speaks of you. Think no more of him. Go with them. I wish to see you. She can speak to him of it. Do not ask it of her. Behold him. Behold her. Behold us. He gives it to us. We lend them to you. He will give the flowers to her. I will give them to him. She does not deny it. Give it to her. She gives it to her neighbor. I do not wish to see them. Tell them so (it). 1. Silvio Pellico says, " We read, or meditate in silence, a great part of the day." 2. " I wrote the tragedy of ' Leoniero da 12 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. Dertona,' and many other things." 3. " From my heart, I pardon my enemies." 4. " Although Mr. M. was in a deplorable state, he sang, he conversed, and did every thing to conceal a part of his sufferings from me.'' 5. If you do not embrace fortune when she presents herself, you may hope for her in vain when she has turned her shoulders upon you. 6. Do not disturb opinions which render a man happy, unless you can give him better ones. 7. If we wish to know what any one says of us when we are absent, let us only observe what they say of others in our pres- ence. 8. Some one asked Diogenes what was the best method of vindicating himself from his enemy. " You will succeed," said Diogenes, " by showing yourself an honest man." 9. A vag- abond dog went into a forest, and, finding a lion, he said to him, " You go wandering through the woods ; you suffer from hunger and the inclemencies of the season. See me : I live, and enjoy much, without any trouble. Does my life please you ? Will you come with me ? You know it will be for your good." The proud and generous lion answered, " You eat ; you are sheltered ; you take pleasure, and have no trouble, it is true : but you are a servant, and I am free, and will never serve upon any terms-.'' 10. It is not the abundance of riches we possess which can make us happy, but the use we make of them. 11. Behold! it is Rome which presents herself to your view ; it is Rome, the eternal city, the city of wonders. 12. Misfortunes shake hands; they seldom come alone. 13. The joys of friendship make us almost forget our misfortunes. 14. The prisoner said to the chief keeper, " What is your name ? " To which he answered, " Fortune, sir, made fun of me, giving me the name of a great man. My name is Schiller." 15. All the most amiable gifts of mind and heart are united in Raphael to render him dear to me. 16. Every one complains of his memory, and no one of his judgment. 17. The soul of Bice was worthy of the heaven which now possesses it ; and her example sustains me in the fear which often oppresses me since her death. 18. I heard Ellen praying ; and, kneeling down without interrupting her, I EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 13 followed her words, with my eyes filled with tears. 19. A bad poet had a satire printed against Benedict XIV. The pontiff examined, corrected, and returned it to the author ; informing him, that it would sell better thus corrected. 20. Great men recognize, fraternize, and embrace each other, through the lapse of ages. 21. A crow dressed himself with the fallen feathers of a peacock, and, despising his companions, went among the pea- cocks, who, recognizing him, stripped him of his false plumes, and drove him away. Then he returned in confusion to his com- panions, seeking to unite with them again ; but they made fun of and refused to receive him. Let the misfortune of the crow be a lesson to us. Exekcise VOT. Adjectives. The honest man. The diligent scholar. A sweet apple. Good books. Are you idle ? She is generous. They are obe- dient. We are merry. "Who are weak? He is not strong. I am tired. Life is short. Who is ready ? That boy is a good scholar. The little girl has a new dress. We are poor. Mrs. S. is modest and amiable. Tour friend (f ) is generous. I am not strong. Give him half a bottle of good wine. Have you seen the beautiful flowers in the king's garden ? Those strangers are not innocent of the great crime. We are in a small house. There are beautiful trees in this garden. That lady has fine eyes. I have many apples and few pears. Have you many friends? Is he deaf, or is he dumb? My dog is faithful. The poor woman was lame. Your coat is not blue ; it is black. Her hat is white, and mine is yellow. That girl is not ill ; she is obstinate and ungrateful. Who is that proud young man? The lady is very polite. The streets of Boston are not large. What useless work ! Is she inquisitive ? This writing-paper is not good. They are imprudent. The men who are in that large white house are honest and wise. 14 EXEKCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 1. Milton's "Paradise Lost" is a fine poem. 2. The Queen of England is a kind lady ; she loves the good and industrious. 3. The German lady is very generous ; she always thinks of the poor, and takes care of many orphans. 4. There are large forests in France and Germany. 5. A constant, sincere, and disinterested friend is rare. 6. The short dress, the close black- velvet waist, and the coarse red handkerchief which partly covered her face, clearly showed her to be an Alpine girl (to have come from the Alps). 7. Doctor S. had great love for justice, great tolerance, great faith in human virtue and in the help of Provi- dence, and a vivid sentiment of the beautiful in art. 8. All social posts can be occupied by honest men. 9. The moral and political vicissitudes of nations transform a people of heroes into a horde of slaves. 10. Why are there upon the earth so much beauty and so many imperfections ? why, in man, so much gran- deur and so much misery? 11. Aosta, a Roman city, is full of beautiful ruins of the time of Augustus. 12. Columbus said, " My thoughts are such as please few (persons) : they are, as I think, wise, certain, reasonable, meditative ; but yet, to most men, they would appear vain, foolish, adventurous, and frivo- lous.'' 13. I love Torino : I love its beautiful squares, its large and clean streets ; and I love, more than all, its slow, but indus- trious, silent, and progressive life. 14. Crescenzio, of illustrious birth and fine person, was rich, and brave in arms. 15. The Dutch are generally a patient, laborious, neat, sober, frugal, and , industrious people. 16. Death spares neither rich nor poor. 17. The diligent hand conquers want ; and prosperity and suc- cess accompany the industrious. 18. The tongue is a little member; but it says great things. 19. A mild, polite, and affable person is esteemed by everybody. EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 15 EXEKCISE IX. Adjectives in the Comparative. Charles is more inquisitive than his sister. Maria is hand- somer than her mother. These pears are sweet ; but the plums are sweeter. The dog is more faithful than the cat. "We are more tired than unhappy. He is happier than his brothers. You are more wicked than I. He is as dexterous as generous. You are happy ; but we are happier. Mr. L. is richer than his neighbor. In summer the days are longer than in winter. Gold is more valuable than silver. The girls are more discreet than the boys. Rafaello is handsomer than his brothers. Her cheeks are red as roses. White as milk. 1. The richer man is, the more avaricious he is. 2. The more Napoleon conquered, the more he wished to conquer. 3. The term of life is short; that of beauty is still shorter. 4. The stork has a longer neck than the goose. 5. In summer the days are longer than they are in winter. 6. Brass is more useful than lead. 7. The General was less t successful than skilful. 8. Charles fell into an indifference, which was worse than doubt. 9. There is more true glory in forgiveness than in re- venge. 10. Antonio was perhaps as great a man as Augustus ; but he was less fortunate. 11. The Savoyards have more active blood than we have : they have more of the impetuous temper of the French; we, more of the blessed "far niente" of the Ital- ians. 12. Nothing is so contagious as example. 13. Generally, the more populous a country, the richer it is. 14. Few peo- ple have a more celebrated, and, at the same time, a more mis- erable country. 15. It is in thy own power, man! to be less unhappy. Arm thyself with firmness against present ills, and forget the happier days which are passed. 16. Women produce much stronger sentiments in the heart of man by their wit than by their beauty. 17. A philosopher said, that it was better to consult women than learned men in doubts concerning language ; 16 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. because the latter do not speak so well or so easily as the former, who study less. 18. There are as many kinds of hypoc- risy as there are of virtue. 19. Alphonso, King of Spain, said, " I am more afraid of the tears of my people, than the strength of my enemies." Exercise X. Adjectives: their Superlatives. How do you feel to-day ? I feel very well ; I have no pain in my head ; I am very strong. They have little bread, and less meat. Your house is convenient, ours is more so ; but that of Mrs. S. is the most convenient of all. That is the finest tree in the country. We have the best water in town. Tour well is the deepest I ever saw. Her hat is more fashionable than hand- some, and very large. It is better to have too much than too little. Maria is more industrious than Sara ; she is the most industrious person in the house. 1. The Campidoglio was the most celebrated edifice of Rome. 2. Nestor was the oldest and the wisest of all the Greeks who were at the siege of Troy. 3. It is a most bitter thing to be forever separated from our friends. 4. There are very valiant men upon the American battle-field. 5. Princes are often more unhappy than the greatest part of their subjects. 6. Self-love is the most cunning of all flatterers. 7. The most pernicious of all sins is calumny : it very often ruins the reputation of the most honest people, makes discord among the most intimate friends ; in fact, it is the most abominable sin in the world. 8. The most agreeable quality that a man can have, is to be civil and courteous. 9. He who is difficult in selecting, often chooses the worst. 10. A philosopher says, that the grandest object in the world is a good man struggling against adversity. 11. Intemperance and idleness are our most dangerous enemies. 12. It is said that there was a Tery happy and a very rare exuberance of loy- alty, in C. Balbo, which commanded love and respect. 13. " The Life of Dante "is a work about which history and literatuie EXERCISES FOE TRANSLATION. 17 dispute, as to which shall enumerate it among the best in their respective categories. 14. Naples and Florence are among the most ancient and most beautiful cities. 15. We call that medium ■ distance, which holds the middle place between the longest and the shortest. 16. The most noted States are not those which possess the most fertile country, but those which give themselves up with the greatest activity to arts and trade. 17. The dis- covery by Columbus was the fruit of a most vivid intellect, exalted by a very warm imagination, and sustained by an iron and indomitable nature. 18. Fidelity, which comprehends in itself almost all virtues, has no merit, is almost no virtue, when it can be inculcated by fear; but it is one of the sublimest vir- tues when it is inspired by love. Exercise XL Numerals. My sister has five books, and I have but two. Your brother has a new cane. The farmer has 54 apple and 10 pear-trees in his little orchard. I have two horses', three cows, one dog,, and 50 hens. There are four weeks in a month. February has 28 days. A year has 12 months, 52 weeks, or 365 days. He is 25 years old ; he was born in the year 1840. Is your father 60 years old ? No, he was born in 1810. I have bought three bottles of wine, and six bottles of cider. Give me 22 rolls for, 20 cents. In Boston there are 104 churches, 19,500 houses, and nearly 185,000 -inhabitants. How much is 5 times 25? 9 times 72? 40 and 50 make 90. 65 and 70 make 135. We sailed for Europe on 1st of June, ,1820, and returned Oct. 17, 1827. The first day qf the week. The third month of the year. We have had sixteen bottles of wine, and this is the seventeenth. My son is three years and a half old. Lula is the third in her class. Give me five different kinds of fruit. We are in the nineteenth century. This is the sixth bird I have seen. to-day. He has spent three dollars and 'three-quarters for trifles. Tell 2* 18 EXERCISES FOE TRANSLATION. us what o'clock it is. It is a quarter past five, And almost time for supper. Fifteen gentlemen and ten ladies. Twenty- boys and three girls. Twenty-one dollars and seventy-five cents. The poor old woman said she was eighty-one years old. 1. In our times, it is not rare to see decrepit people of twenty- five years. 2. Caesar conquered more than eight hundred cities in less than ten years. 3. Sophocles and Euripides, two famous tragedians, were both Athenians. 4. The exhibition which Titus gave to the Roman people, at one time, cost him eighty millions. 5. Lewis Fourteenth was said to be one of the greatest kings in the world. 6. Where do we see men of the stamp of those depicted by Dante in the fifteenth and sixteenth canto of his Paradise ? 7. Herodotus relates of the ancient Persians, that, from the age of five years to twenty, they taught their chil- dren only three things, — to manage a horse, to use the bow, and to tell the truth. 8. About the year one thousand, St. Bernard, a Savoyard, founded the useful and famous monastery on one of the highest summits of the Alps, which still flourishes. 9. A fool- ish young man asked an old lady how old she was. " I do not know exactly," she replied ; " but I have always heard, that an ass is older at twenty years than a woman at seventy." 10. Ma- sinissa, King of Numidia, died at the age of ninety-seven years, leaving forty-four children ; he had been an ally of Rome nearly seventy years. 11. Hospitality is one of the first duties of man. 12. The Venetians imposed a singular tribute upon the Patriarch of Aquila, in the year' one thousand one hundred and seventy-three : every year, on Shrove-Tuesday, he was obliged to send a bull and a dozen pigs to Venice ; they represented the Patriarch and his twelve canons. They were led through the city in pomp, and then killed. 13. Henry Dandolo, whose eyes had been put out by order of the Emperor Manuel Comnene, was, however, elected Doge of Venice, in the year one thousand one hundred ninety-two, at the age of eighty-four years. Soon after, he took command of the Venetian fleet of five hundred vessels, and succeeded in taking possession of Constantinople in EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 19 the year one thousand two hundred and four. After this con- quest, he added to his other titles- that of Lord of the Fourth and Eighth of the Roman Empire. 14. The activity of the Savoyards is shown by two classes ; for it not only sends street-sweeps and servants into France, but soldiers also, fifteen or eighteen Savo- yard generals having been in the French army. 15. Count Cassar Balbo expired on the evening of the third of June, one thousand eight hundred fifty-three, after a few days of acute suffering. Exercise XII. Relative Pronouns. "Who are you? What is that? Which is it? What have you for me ? To whom did you give the chocolate ? Whose coat is that ? What does he say ? Whose children are they ? Which of these oranges is the sweetest ? A man eats what he likes. He will give this book to her whom he likes best. The shoes which you bought are not good. Which flowers are the handsomest ? Of whom have you bought this linen ? What have you given for it ? To whom does she write ? For what do you study? What is good for you? What have you seen? That is the lady of whom I spoke. He who is rich is not always happy. Upon what does he live ? What a beautiful tree ! What beautiful flowers ! He who is speaking is the teacher. The lady for whom she works has much business. Which of these two pears do you wish ? What is the (f ) domestic doing ? Who is going with you ? The boy whom you have seen with me. Whose horse is that? It is mine, which I bought of your father's friend. What is the use of appetite without food ? That of which you think the least is to amuse yourself. 1. Cleopatra wore two pearls in her ears, each of which cost more than a million. 2. Tell me whose company you keep, and I will tell you who you are. 3. There are faces in which the character of goodness is well expressed. 4. He who "acts con- scientiously may err ; but he is pure in the sight of God. 5. What 20 EXERCISES FOE TRANSLATION. is learned in youth is easily impressed upon the mind. 6. Happy are those who can content themselves with the necessaries of life. 7. He who does not love his brother does not deserve to live. 8. Modesty is to merit what a gauze veil is to beauty : it diminishes its splendor, but augments its value. 9. That which is most delicate in a work is lost by translating it into another language. 10. There is a certain art in conversation which gives grace to the simplest thing. 11. Contact with other men is necessary for him who has to write history. 12. The cocoa- nut-tree is of medium size ; the leaves of which fall and shoot forth alternately, so that it is always covered with foliage. , 13. Venice is a city unique to the world by its situation ; it is precisely like an immense ship, which tranquilly reposes upon the water, and which no one can reach, but by means of boats. 14. There is nothing, however mean it may be, that is not useful for something. 15. Charles Bonnet, who was almost perfect in heart and mind, tells us that after death all the species mount one ladder of the scale which leads to perfection. 1 6. At the commencement of a feast, the Romans used to present a list of the viands which were to appear . upon the table to the guests, in order that each one might reserve his appetite for that which most pleased him. 17. A preacher had annoyed all his audience preaching upon the beatitudes. After the sermon, a lady told him that he had forgotten one. " Which ? " asked the preacher. " That," answered the lady, " blessed is he who did not hear your sermon." 18. Listlessness is a disease, the only remedy for which is labor. 19. That which is called Eldorado is only a sandy desert, which will not offer you a drop of water if you are thirsty, nor the shade of a tree if you are weary. Exercise XIII. Possessive Adjective Pronouns. Is this your brother's pen ? No, it is mine. All that I have is hers. His book is very good. Our relations are not poor. EXERCISES FOE TRANSLATION. 21 The daughter loves her father and mother. The son loves his mother and sister. I love you and your children. Do not speak against my relations. It is one of my sisters. She is in the kitchen with her aunt. To-day she will put on her best white hat, and her new shoes. Go in her stead. He spoke continually of his father, mother, and sister. Their female friends are not in the city. Is that your glove ? No, it is not mine ; it is yours. Their good dog is not in our yard. Look at your watch. * Give me my property. Go to his store. These are your apples, his pears, and my cherries. Who has her nice ribbons ? Where is my lace ? Give my aunt her money. My dear friend, I have nothing to give him. They were her people. Her neighbor was left to guard her house and her cows. She and her mother. My dear children. Put it in your pocket. She put it upon her head. He did it with his hands. 1. England owes her wealth to the protection which she accords to her commerce. 2. Oh, what a longing a prisoner has to see his fellow-creatures ! 3. There is no doubt, that every human condition has its peculiar duties. 4. Nothing serves better to confound our enemies, than not to notice their offence. 5. Every condition has its pleasures and its pains. 6. The great wisdom of man consists in knowing his folly. 7. Our friends forsake us when fortune ceases to favor us. 8. A wise man often doubts : a foolish man never ; he knows every thing but his own ignorance. 9. Euripides complained to one of his friends, that he had been three days making a few verses. 10. Conscience is a just judge of our actions. 11. A sick man almost always says to his physician, My head and all my body pains me. 12. Hannibal distinguished himself from his equals not by the magnificence of his dress, but by the beauty of his horse and his arms. 13. Self-love is our prime mover. 14. "And he also, when he saw me, arose, and, throwing his arms about my neck, embraced me." 15. A simpleton joked a man of wit about his large ears. " I acknowledge having them too large for a man," he answered ; " but you must at the same 22 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. time agree, that yours are too small for an ass." 16. If you at- tempt to enter into conversation with an Englishman who does not know you, he will certainly take you for a knave. He will button up his vest, put his handkerchief well into his pocket, see that his watch is safe, and look crabbedly at you. Notice his face : it says to you, ''- Leave me alone." Yet this same person is perhaps the most friendly of mortals ; he only wishes to protect his own independence. 17. A fox seeing a crow, which had a piece of cheese in her beak, upon a tree, began to praise her very much. " What fine feathers ! " he said ; " what a beautiful body ! If you knew how to sing, upon my word there could be no finer bird." The foolish bird, to allow her voice to be heard, opened her beak, and let the cheese fall ; and the fox, seizing it, carried it away. But the fox soon paid for his fraud ; for the shepherd came, and killed him for his skin. Exercise XIV. Demonstrative Adjective Pronouns. This is my penknife ; that is yours. These are her pens. Is that ink good ? Who is he ? Who is she ? Who are they ? This house no longer belongs to me. What have you in that trunk ? Who are those men ? What did your father buy to day ? Who has given me this beautiful bouquet ? What is in that closet ? She will do what the master tells her. We shall go and take a little walk this evening. In the meantime you can go to our neighbors. Take this inkstand, and give me that. That is the lady of whom I was speaking. This rich man is sick. Those poor women are well. That poor child is hand- some and good. Give those gloves to- that man. To this or to that? This man was learned, that was ignorant. That axe was lost. I have found this gold axe. Is this your axe, sir? This morning I worked in the garden. He planted those seeds which you gave him. This book is incorrect. That grammar is much used. He loves those dear children. Where have I EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 23 seen those faces? To whom have you given those plums? Have you written to that lady? What did she say to that news ? I prefer this table to that. This hat is very becoming to your daughter. She likes these red ribbons, not those yellow ones. Give me that small piece of cheese. 1. Happy are those who love to read. 2. "We love those who admire us ; but we do not always love those whom we admire. 3. Those wiio believe that happiness consists in riches deceive themselves. 4. We often forgive those who annoy us, but rarely those whom we annoy. 5. Ariosto is the poet of the imagination, Tasso that of the intellect. 6. James I. was one of those kings who are discontented with their state, and envious of others' glory. 7. Plato banished music from his republic. 8. All the works of nature merit our admiration. 9. The words of a sincere man are the thoughts of his heart. 10. " His eyes were closed by his physician, his friend from infancy, and a man all religion and charity.'' 11. "I have never known a more noble spirit than his, and few similar to his." 12. True grief weeps little ; the tear of the soul is much more bitter than that shed from the eye. 13. Those who natter the great, ruin them. 14. We must do what God sets us to do, and take what he sends us. 15. There are human beings to whom nature shows herself a real step-mother ; poor Joanne was one of these unhappy creatures. 16. The hour of twilight exercises a mysterious influence upon weak minds ; that light and those shadows which seem to meet only to take leave of each other (to give an adieu) awaken a thousand delicate and affectionate thoughts. 17. From time to time, conscience wars against pride, and attempts to conquer its bad reasonings (the bad reasonings of this) by bearing witness to the truth. 18. That sky, that country, that distant motion of creatures in the valley, those voices of the villagers, those laughs, those songs, exhilera- ted us very much. 19. Wounds of body are nothing in compari- son to those of the mind. 24 EXEBCISES FOE TRANSLATION. 1 EXERCISE XV. Indefinite Adjective Pronouns. They have spoken of nobody. She gave it to somebody. I had nothing for dinner. The children love each other. One goes, and another comes. Both are in the city. Give him all you have. Tell me all you know. The woman knows every- body. T ne good man loves everybody. Has any one been here ? It is said that Celia will go to France. No one is with- out faults. Some are good, others. are bad. I hear somebody's voice. They are not going into Washington Street. They say it was a long procession. Is there any thing new to-day ? 1. Every man is exposed to criticism. 2. All men are subject to death. 3. Every one has his faults. 4. Take those books, and put them each in its place. 5. Justice includes all other virtues. 6. Scipio displayed grandeur in all his actions. 7. All nations appear to desire to obtain merit from the splendor of their origin. 8. "We must have patience, and every thing will come right in time. 9. People judge others' things in a different manner from that in which they would judge their own. 10. People drink good wine in France, and eat good meat in England. 11. Every period of life has pleasures proper and natural to it. 12. Whatever reasons one may have for being absent from his country, there can be none sufficiently strong to make him forget it. 13. Vice disunites men, keeping them on guard, one against the other. 14. That which thou desirest others to keep silent, keep thou silent. 15. Other times, other customs. 16. It is foolish not to wish to know any thing. 17. No language is perfect in itself. 18. It is easier to be wise for others than for ourselves. 16. Every body seeks happiness, few find it. 20. A preacher, who had not been invited to dine with any one through Lent, said, in his last sermon, that he had preached against all sins except that of gluttony, because it had not appeared to him that such a vice EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 25 ruled in the country. 21. Some one asked an American, why there had not been a monument erected to Christopher Colum- bus. 22. Every beginning is difficult. Exercise XVI. Indefinite Adjective Pronouns Continued. "What is the best news? What is the talk about town? There is no news. I have read no paper to-day. Do they still speak of war? No, they speak only of peace. Every flower has its beauty. Every man has his virtues. Our friends will remain in France some weeks. She spends her time in some useful occupation. They have some good books. One sees that he is only a child. No servant was ever more faithful. We shall remain in the city all summer. He goes somewhere every season. Every one is her friend, because she is good. One can do much. Every little helps. It is not well to do nothing. Some make money, others lose it. The girls were jealous of one another. One has a fine face, the other a handsome hand. Both mother and child were here. 1. Any loss is more honorable than to lie. 5. All the laws and the prophets, all the collection of sacred books, is reduced to the precept of loving God and man. 3. The pleas- ure derived from things, in appearance almost nothing, when we wish well to some one, is indescribable. 4. Speaking with one and another is a pleasant recreation for every one. 5. No friendship, however intimate it may be, can authorize the vio- lation of a secret. 6. God knows how much more pleasant the name of Naples, the city of my fathers, is to me than that of any other name of Italian country. 7. Nothing is durable here below. 8. Every thing has its time; and the usages of war, perhaps, more than any other thing. 9. In plains we wish for hills, and on hills we naturally wish to walk on plains. 10. There is almost no great capital in Europe where they do not 8 26 EXERCISES FOE TRANSLATION. seek servants from some remote, hidden province, and for the most part from the mountains. Exercise XVII, Prepositions di, a, da. Have you come to find me ? Do not go near the bed. That boy has fallen from the tree. Give the boy milk to drink, and some bread to eat. Have you good writing-paper ? My sister has a good saddlehorse to sell. They say that our enemy is out of danger. Whilst the child is starving at home, the mother goes to church to pray. Give that man something to do. Do not say it in jest. That domestic is -not fit for many things. The little boy plays the teacher, and the little girl the mistress of the house. He lives out of the town, and keeps arms for defence in his house. Why have you not something to do ? I have been sick since last year. Those girls depend upon their aunt. Have you learned your lesson by heart ? 1. We must be careful not to expose ourselves to danger. 2. Cassar said to some one who was reading in his presence, " Are you reading, or are you singing? If you are singing, you sing very badly." 3. When the gods love princes, says an ancient philosopher, they pour a mixture of good and evil into their cup of fate, so that they may never forget that they are men. 4. There is no true friendship without virtue. 5. Riches and poverty have great influence upon men. 6. The city of Florence enjoyed tranquillity and abundance under the government of the Medici. 7. Have three things open to your friend, — your face, your purse, and your heart. 8. Charlemagne sealed treaties with the hilt of his sword. 9. " Dying, we find an asylum against the misfortunes of life," said Seneca. 10. We ought to learn more from observation than from books. 11. "The eternal God has poured out happiness ; and I, I alone, am without help, with- out friends, without company." 12. God save you from living alone, by force (being forced to live alone) ! 13. It was ordered EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 27 by Providence, that, when man is struck with calamity, woman shall be his support and consolation. 14. The last of the Vallesa was one of the best and most noble — noble in actions — among the ministers of our good and popular king. 15. It is not pos- sible not to find some enchantment in the presence, in the looks, and in the conversation, of a good, vivacious, and affectionate old lady. 16. It is said that the suffering of man upon earth is for the good of mankind. * Exercise XVIII. Prepositions in, con, per. From this time forward. From that time forward. My house is in one of the principal streets of the city. Are you angry ? Where is the bunch of grapes which your uncle had for me? Go to the tailor's for your father's coat. With whom do you study music? We study with the schoolmaster. Are you going to Mrs. G.'s to-day ? How did the boys go into the church ? They went four-by-four. The lady saw a little girl pass over (through) the meadow with a faggot of wood upon her head. I only wish to-speak with you. We earn our bread by labor. Money is to pay the house- rent. What do you do to earn your food ? Will you come with me ? The hostess led us into a clean room. The father returned with the clothes which he had bought in the village. A dog was sleeping at his ease in a manger full of hay. An ox came to the manger to eat. The envious dog barked, and would not allow the ox to approach the hay. The poor hungry animal was angry at such an overbearing act, and said to the ribald dog, " May God reward you according to your deserts, uncharitable villain ! You do not eat the hay yourself, nor per- mit others to enjoy it. Make use of the good things given you by Heaven, and permit others to enjoy theirs." 28 EXERCISES FOB TRANSLATION. Exercise XIX. Prepositions. She will be here in ten days. It is said there is nothing new under the sun. We will go together after dinner. They praise her to the skies. Until now I have been your friend. He is beloved even by his enemies. Do not hesitate. I shall have finished this book shortly. He has been in France nearly three years. There are nearly, one thousand souls in this town. I can do nothing without you. Poor women ! They appear to be friendless; The good man could not see my husband without speaking to him. There is no entrance for any one. Mary set out for the city with her mamma. She had a little bed at the side of the lady's bed. 1. Before publishing his poem, Tasso wished to submit it to the criticisms of the bravest men of his times. 2. The poet was presented to the king by the generous duke. 3. To that unfor- tunate woman, Rome alone appeared to be a secure asylum. 4. The soldier has every proof of esteem from the most cele- brated men who live here. 5. Mrs. U. presents her compli- ments to Mr. M. She cannot have the pleasure of seeing him to-day, and begs him to excuse her. 6. Mrs. TJ. presents her compliments to Mrs. M., and requests the favor of her company on Tuesday evening next. 7. If you do not call upon me in the morning, I shall certainly wait on you in the evening. 8. The country is submerged from time to time, and once Charles was up to his head in water. 9. Who lives according to the laws of health, in this city? 10. Caroline has found some strawberries between the two stones at the side of the wall. 11. Mr. L. was silent ; and sadly he fixed his eyes upon Peter, who cast his down to the earth. 12. Captain S. yields to civil orders, is a sincere lover of peace, and aspires to no other dignity than that of being able to be useful to his beloved country. 13. The cap- tain was named Schiller ; he was a Swiss, of a peasant family ; EXERCISES FOE TRANSLATION-. 29 he had served against the Turks under General Landon in the times of Joseph II. ; then in all the wars of Austria against France, until the fall of Napoleon. 14. The hospitality of the French is the most complete in the actual state of society. 15. Among the Sybarites, women invited to feasts and public dinners were notified a year previous, that they might have time to appear with all the pomp of beauty and dress. Exeecise XX. The Verbs essere and avere. We are poor and sick. Are you not rich enough? Were they all here ? Have you had time to go to Rome ? I shall be at home next week. There is no time to lose. Why are you in such a hurry ? Be quiet, and you shall have some figs. Be so kind as to to give that old man a glass of wine. There are many people who do not love to work. We have no meat for dinner. I am ill, and have no appetite. The physician is charmed with the progress of his patient. They have a cold. The parents of those children have been too indulgent. He has been to the tailor's ; but the coat was not finished. I shall be happy to see her in my new house. They have been very polite to us. She is about to marry. I will come to your house to-morrow. It may be that I shall not be at home. Her things are all in a good way now. I look upon thee as a good friend. There is no hope left. Mr. R. is a rich man, or a man of great wealth. The rich are not always happy. Good health is bet- ter than wealth. What is the matter with you ? I am no longer hungry. That would be useless. Is his bird tame? Have they green worsted ? Give her needle, thread, and cotton. 1. The city of Brunn is the capital of Moravia. 2. To be a slave to the judgment of others, when you are persuaded that it is false, is the height of villany. 3. Happy are those who hate violent pleasures, and know how to be contented with an innocent life. 4. Whoever is capable of lying, is unworthy of being enu- a* 30 EXERCISES FOE TRANSLATION. merated among men. 5. It was a sweet pleasure to hear those songs and the organ which accompanied them. 6. It is easy to give advice, but very difficult to follow it. 7. Albert E. had changed his hope of being one of the great of Europe, into that of being one of the first of his own little province. 8. Arduino, Marquis of Ivrea, was the last Italian king of Italy. 9. It is curious that Piedmont, one of the most picturesque countries perhaps in the world, was nevertheless one of the last to admit picturesque gardening. 10. The city of Tyre is refreshed by the north wind which comes from the sea. 11. The greater the nunaber of men there are in a country, provided they are indus- trious, the more abundance they enjoy. 12. The ambition and avarice of men are the sole origin of all their misfortunes. 13. The most unhappy of all men is he who believes himself to be so. 14. The most free of all men, is he .who can be free even in slavery. 15. Misfortune is the school of great intellects. 16. Friendship and religion are two inestimable advantages (goods). 17. Not to remember happy days is a great diminu- tion of misery, particularly when we are young. 18. General B. said, " I have always believed that the education of war is the best education that a man can have." Exercise XXI. The Verbs and their Syntax. Have you seen the violets ? There are beautiful tulips in your cousin's garden. How fresh every thing looks ! Every thing looks alive. The rain has done a great deal of good. This is the warmest summer I can remember. I think we shall have more rain. I have a little business to do. I have had a very pleasant journey. You never will do like others. You wait for nobody. I will not stay a moment longer. I wish for a steel pen and a sheet of paper. Tell me to whom you write. I write to the dear friend whom you have seen at my house. "What noise do I hear ? You said it. I thought you were mis- EXERCISES FOE TRANSLATION. 31 taken. Come home before it grows dark. Take away those things. Never speak without thinking. They say that he has never enjoyed a moment's happiness. Do not go out ; it rains. She was about writing a letter when you entered. It is Henry's turn to go to the city. To-morrow I shall play the cook : will you come to dine with me ? "We shall have maccaroni with cheese for dinner. Now they ring the bell for supper, and we are not all ready to go. Let us wait a little. See, my suit of clothes is finished. How well he plays the violin ! it is a pleas- ure to hear him. 1. The music of Bellini says sadly, as he who hopes for noth- ing here below, " Weep and pray." 2. Let us remember that suffering is the common heritage of the sons of man ; that earth without heaven would be too hard an exile ; and that life without God is an insoluble enigma ! 3. " Heaven be thanked, that I can remember my good mother without the least remorse ! " said R. 4. The will of God be done. 5. It is a shame to the human race, that war is inevitable at certain times, or on certain occasions. 6. Labor and cares do not frighten the wise man ; they are the exercise of his mind, which they keep in vigor and health. 7. Those disasters which cast down, discourage, and mortify the spirits of a man, seem to rouse up the energies of the softer sex. 8. We should foresee danger, and shun it ; but, when it comes upon us, we have only to despise it. 9. In war, fortune is capricious and inconstant. 10. Men wish to have every thing, and make themselves miserable with the desire for super- fluity. 11. Great conquerors, like those rivers which overflow their banks, appear majestic, but lay waste all those fertile coun- tries which they should only water. 12. Everybody says what comes into his mind. 13. When the heart of a man is exercised and strengthened in virtue, he ought easily to console himself for the wrinkles which come upon his face. 14. Justice, modera- tion, and good faith are the securest defence of a State. 15. Mis- fortune fraternizes souls, stifles bad passions, and binds around us ties of love. 16. St. Cecilia is a popular institution which 32 EXERCISES FOE TRANSLATION. appears to be transmitted from the middle ages. 17. Letters ! are they not the children of heaven, descended to earth to console us in grief? 18. Ah! there is much comfort in the alternations of care and hope for a person who is all that is left to us. 19. Who, in the noise of our streets, with railways, the smoke of the engines, and the monotonous rolling of the omni- buses, would not sometimes sigh for the quiet of a country life ? Exercise XXII. Subjunctive Mood. The mistress of the house ordered her to go. I fear that you will be late to school. Tell her that she cannot do as she likes. He does not know if he ought to buy it of him. If he knew it, he would not tell it to me. We are assured that your friend (f ) has come. If you had studied, you would be more learned. It seems that she will not give the cake to her son. It is possible that she may give it to him to-morrow. I want to be home in good time. I am afraid the roads are very dusty. I think we shall have some rain. Do you not think that it is very warm for the season ? I want something good to eat. Here is a piece of toast, which I think will please you. Make yourself at home. What fruit do you like best? It does not appear to me that there is much difference. You say so, that you may not blame me. She seems to be growing homelier. The master asked me who I was, and where I went to school. What does he think that I know ? I wish to give her the flowers which please her. She appeared to me more beautiful than ever. More beautiful than any other lady in Boston. If I had such a house. He wishes to know who she is. I wish that you would write to my mother. Let me feel your pulse. Is there any thing I can do for you ? It seems to me to be very late. Now I must see your flower-garden and your kitchen-garden. Although it is difficult, I will do it. If he knew how much he was beloved ! I must go. I am afraid that I shall not be able to go there. I EXERCISES EOR TRANSLATION. 33 cannot believe any such thing. What is it to you if he comes or not ? 1. The preacher said to his hearers, "If I offered you only promises, you would be excused for not believing me ; but I offer you certain and present things." 2 " Let us see if you now have the courage to do better, and to allow yourself to be humil- iated by the truth which condemns your weakness." 3. Do not say things which are not true. 4. Do not go in search of perils, when necessity does not require it. 5. We must found public schools, where we can teach our youth to prefer honor to pleas- ure. 6. Very soon James and Charles had the same confidence as if they had passed their lives together, athough they had never seen each other before. 7. People generally pray that God would reward them for every good action. 8. If we do not flatter ourselves, the flattery of others will never hurt us. 9. " Alas ! " cried Mrs. P., " I fear that my son is dead ; and I know not what I shall do." 10. Whatever may have been Louisa's intentions, she has not done as well as she might. 11. The larger a kingdom is, the more officers are required to do what the chief magistrate could not accomplish by himself. 12. What a shame it is, that the most elevated men make their grandeur consist in their money-bags. 13. Who has not need of a friend who loves the truth only, and who will tell you the truth in spite of yourself? 14. The statue of Zenobia was in so life like a posture, that one could almost believe that she would walk. 15. How many exiles have exclaimed, "Would to God that I had never left my country ! " 16. When a good general is killed, all the camp is like a disconsolate .family which has lost the father, who was the cherished hope of his tender little ones. 17. It was only with the good parent, that the discreet child did not use circumspection in manifesting all the secrets of his heart. 34 EXERCISES FOE TRANSLATION. Exercise XXIII. Infinitive and Participles. We are beloved by all our friends. I have been out of town all winter. They have arrived in- England. When he arrived at the church door, he found it shut. She is very acute at rail- lery. They have not found the dog which was lost. I have seen a green worm on the rose-bush. It is not all in commenc- ing. The fire is spread throughout the city. Do not fear that I go away ; your manners please me too much. She has had time to repent of it. Who can say much in few words ? Seeing her going away. It seemed to him that he saw his lady. When I had said thus. Who can have done that ? She must go very soon. I have always loved good old people. He has been very kind to us. She has given two dresses to her servant. Having rested his weary body, he got up. On his departure, he gave each child a dollar. I believe that you are all asleep. Who has told all these things to our father ? Where has he bought that fine horse ? I have paid more for my feathers than they are worth. If I could have some pretty ribbon to trim my dress. That man has gained much money. Your son has spent more than you can ever earn. He has not rendered an exact ac- count of every thing. Never speak at random. When the night was spent. He is spent with cares. To be master of a thing. He has been the Lord Mayor of London. They have spent about twenty crowns. I walked about ten miles. To condemn one without hearing. My friend is about to marry a fortune. Have you fed that little white dog of yours ? Mr. S. has brought you a gold ring from the city. I have eaten so much that I cannot go. Who would have believed it? How can that be ? It looks so very nice. Will you have the good- ness to ring the bell ? My brother has taken three cups of tea, and asks for more. 1. The providence of God keeps us from perishing ; the power EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 35 of God prevents us doing those things which displease him ; and the goodness of God preserves us from suffering. 2. There are but few people who are satisfied with their, lot. 3. It is easy to give advice, but difficult to follow it. 4. Signor Domenico, believing himself a learned and wise man, but not knowing what to with his knowledge, made a physician of himself, without ever having studied medicine. 5. Even in prison, there are persons afflicted to console, sick to cure, weak to comfort, and strong to confirm. 6. We are obliged to confess that our soul, mind, heart, and all our affections, have too restricted limits. 7. Many cities have desired to become the capital of a great empire. 8. The lack of maritime power is a great injury to a nation. 9. "We are machines moved by habit. 10. Let us write from the dictation of our heart, provided it is free and uncorrupt. 11. We see ruined churches, castles, and convents of the middle ages throughout all Europe ; the surface of Italy is covered with them. 12. " I stood at that window palpitating, shuddering, and staring about until morning, when I descended oppressed with a mortal sadness, and imagining myself much more injured than I really was." 13. It is always sad to be obliged to leave one's country through misfortune ; but to leave it in chains, and be carried into horrible climates, is so afflicting that no terms can express it ! 14. Saint Nilo, moved to pity by the cruel treat- ment inflicted on his countryman Filigato, went to the young emperor Otto, and, supplicating and weeping, demanded mercy for the prisoner. 15. The twins Komulus and Remus, being exposed by order of the king, were found and secretly educated by a shepherd named Faustolo. Exercise XXIV. The Verbs andare, fare, stare, and dare. The sun sets. I have much to do. Three months ago* I have never harmed any one. He will go at daybreak. He did his best. He will set sail at three o'clock. We live a regular 36 EXERCISES FOE TBANSLATICttir. life. He did not know how to wish a happy new year. He has just published my new work. That parrot has disturbed me very much. She pretended not to hear what the beggar said. I beg you to come to live with us. We are accustomed to take breakfast at seven o'clock. Can you not keep still ? Tell her, that I say she may do as she likes. How she stands like a marble statue ! How is it that this man is your husband ? Go for the doctor. Mr. Lewis has given me a beautiful white hen. I am on the point of leaving for Europe. Where do you live ? How do you do ? How is your mother ? Are your sisters well ? When I was standing at the window, I saw the soldiers pass by. Be quiet, child ! This is the question. Stay as long as you please. Where does she live ? This city stands in a plain. He is obliged to live on bread and water. These clothes cost me twenty crowns. Why are you so thoughtful ? I am read- ing. I love to live friendly with everybody. When the worst comes to the worst, he will sell the house. You must welcome them. Give me good fruit, bread, and wine, and I shall be satisfied. 1. True dignity is not in pride. 2. So goes the world. 3. Minerva gave the olive, fruit of a tree planted by her, to the inhabitants of proud Athens. 4. Wild beasts are not so cruel as men : lions do not wage war upon lions, nor tigers upon tigers : yet man alone, despite his reason, does that which animals without reason never do. 5. Is there not land enough to give to all men more than they can cultivate ? 6. If we eat more food than is necessary, it poisons instead of nourishing us. 7. Hasten, O young man ! to go where destiny calls : go unhesitatingly to the field of battle. 8. As represented, the frightful Pluto was seated upon a throne of ebony. 9. Virtue is the greatest gift which the good God can give us. 10. We must not take the life of one man into account, when the safety of the nation is at stake. 11. " Go, good mother, go to heaven, and find your child." 12. When misfortunes commence in a house, it often happens that even indifferent people fear for themselves. 13. " Then I EXEECISES FOB, TRANSLATION. 37 saw how things came, how they went, and how they would go." 14. " This silence is not to my taste," said the captain ; " it pre- sages no good." 15. The country of Phoenecia is at the foot of the Lebanon Mountains, whose tops pierce the clouds, and go to touch the stars. 16. The unhappy father does not know where he is, what he is doing, or what he ought to do, and goes calling his lost son. 17. True praise is that which is given in the absence of the person praised. 18. Whilst we are in the midst of delights, we do not wish to see or hear any thing which can interrupt their enjoyment. Exercise 32LV. Adverbs. Where are you going ? Where is your stick ? They are often unhappy. My aunt is seldom satisfied. Henceforth I shall do nothing for that family. They have treated me most ungenerously. Bravo my friend ! you have spoken very well. I am afraid it will be too late to do good. We will go directly. Have you finished already ? Tou read newspapers continually. I shall finish in the twinkling of an eye. The young man came unexpectedly. We seldom go out. I am always in a hurry. How quickly he moves ! They must go very soon. I heard of it a short time ago. They were seen near the house. The men whom you wish to see are not here. ' The good general is wel- come everywhere. I am better to-day than I was yesterday. Now-a-days she is seldom at home. They are constantly coming here. I am almost asleep. I have waited a long time, and she does not come. In general, he is very proud to his inferiors. When he leaves, I shall leave also. Tou are advised to go immediately. At what o'clock does the packet start ? Let us walk faster. Write to me immediately. Without fail. They can sleep here. Tour rooms are ready. How much are we indebted to you? It is very disagreeable to travel alone. I 4 38 EXERCISES FOE TRANSLATION. have travelled this way several times. With best wishes, yours truly. Do not wait longer. 1. Sextus V., when he was cardinal, pretended to be extenu- ated by years and infirmities, and went very stooping. 2. It often happens that men reap/ more advantage from some mistakes, than from the good deeds they have done. 3. Happy are those who have never wandered from the straight road of virtue ! 4. People are continually talking of virtue and of merit, without knowing what they are. 5. The wise man loves truth, and never tells a lie. 6. We never repent of speaking too little, but often of speaking too much. 7. Cato the censor never ceased to repre- sent to the Senate the sad consequences of luxury. 8. Perhaps there is no greater absurdity than that so often repeated, of the peace of mind of the just. 9. At any rate, Napoleon was cer- tainly, in a military point of view, greater than Charlemagne, or any other ; and particularly so in the conception of the wonderful campaign of 1800. 10. Good-luck, like ill-luck, never comes alone. 11. Behold me, then, in a sort of society, when I was prepared for more solitude than ever. 12. The secretary was very humane, and spoke of religion with affection and dignity. 13. In Germany, priests are accustomed to dress like laymen. 14. True dignity consists in being ashamed only of mean actions. Exercise XXVI. Promiscuous Exercises. Go! what nonsense (childishness)! And so! What is it? Speak, then. The man is never satisfied. Will you never have done ? The sky is as fine now as it ever was. He was near his end. Oh, how happy I am ! He is so-so. Such like. Whilst you read, I write. Come with me, and show me where I may go. He goes willingly. I am very well. It would go ill with us if I had nothing else to live upon. 1. Alas, how full of contradictions is man ! 2. Oh, how pleasant is the sympathy of our fellow-creatures ! 3. Oh, how EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 39 unjust are men, judging by appearances, and according to their own superb prejudices ! 4. O Italy, Italy ! when shall I have the pleasure of seeing you again? 5. Oh! if I could do it, I would do it willingly. 6. He loves me because I merit it. 7. Oh, so ! let us speak of something else. 8. There is no honor- able retreat for a good and wise man, except in company of the Muses. 9. We should never be prejudiced against a man because he has a fierce aspect. 10. The rich, who have never experienced want nor the necessity of considering or paying for the comforts of life, know nothing of the pleasure of economy. 11. Have you made all your preparations for departure ? 12. Every thing is ready. 13. Send for a porter to carry my luggage. 14. I shall take the railway omnibus, and start in five minutes. 15. It seems to me to be very late. 16. How soon shall we be at the terminus ? 17. I am afraid of being too late for the nine o'clock train. 18. Here we are at the terminus : we are never too late. 19. The train will start in five minutes. 20. Make haste and take your ticket. 21. What luggage have you ? 22. I have two trunks, three carpet-bags, and one hat-box. 23. Here is the locomotive engine that is to draw us. 24. Have we two engines ? 25. It requires a very great force to draw a train of twenty-five carriages. 26. What is the power of those engines ? 27. They are each of twenty-horse power. 28. Are you going by the express train ? 29. No, this is the accommo- dation train. 30. At what o'clock does the baggage train start ? 31. There are two a day : one starts at ten o'clock in the morn- ing, and the other at three in the afternoon. 32. Does your father come with us ? 33. No : he goes in the express train. 34. Make haste : the train is just going to start. 35. That is the signal for starting. We are off". 36. We are already far from the terminus. 37. We have already gone four or five leagues. 38. We have gone just six miles. 39. We went the last mile in two minutes. 40. We go a mile and a half in a minute. 41. This is quick travelling. 42. But for your assistance, I should have lost all. 43. Should you have undertaken it, if you 40 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. had thought it so difficult ? . 44. Persevere, and you will succeed. 45. I heard them firing all the morning. 46. I felt her hand trembling in mine. 47. He saw his dog torn in pieces at his feet. 48. It would be necessary for him to see her. '49. I want some sealing-wax. 50. Do you want any thing else? 51. "We often lose more time in idly regretting an evil than would be necessary to remedy it. 52. I would certainly do it, if it were necessary. 53. Tou might have broken your neck. 54. Tou might have forwarded your letter by his servant. 55. He would answer though he had been advised not to speak. 56. It must not be told to any one. 57. I would not have acted thus. 58. They would have neither roast beef nor pie. 59. His sister is ill : he ought to go and see her. 60. The design was to have been executed an hour after nightfall. 61. He owes me now a thousand pounds ; last year he owed me twelve hundred. 62. Always carry an umbrella when it is fine. 63. Is not friendship the greatest of earthly blessings? 64. Have you not been to see the crater of Mount Vesuvius ? 65. Did you not go as far as Turin by the railroad ? 66. Is your uncle's agent yet arrived ? 67. Should you be displeased, if I gave you any more examples ? 68. Do you write to her sister to-day ? 69. He is so silly and so tiresome that I cannot" bear him. 70. He has so much wealth that he does not know what to do with it. 71. I like neither his person, his family, nor his fortune. 72. In the sweat of thy brow shalt thou eat bread till thou return to the ground from whence thou wast taken ; for dust thou art, and to dust thou shalt return. 73. Tou shall not speak English : you shall speak Italian, nothing but Italian, with your teacher. 74. Do not go into the current : you will be drowned, as you cannot swim. 75. I shall die in a land of strangers, and not a tear will be shed upon my grave. 76. Tes ; and your death will be just as much felt in the world as that of a worm or a fly. 77. True ; but it will not be the less a matter of infinite moment to me. 78. Speak well of your friend ; of your enemy, neither well nor ill. 79. The truly virtuous man EXERCISES FOE TRANSLATION. 41 fears neither poverty, afflictions, nor death. 80. The poor man has neither relatives, acquaintances, nor friends. 81; Either say nothing of the ahsent, or speak like a friend. 82. The good man possesses a happiness which the world can neither give nor take away. 83. On the fifteenth of next month, when I have won the capital prize. 84. Chaucer, the father of English poetry, was born in thirteen hundred and twenty-eight, and died in fourteen hundred, in the seventy-second year of his age. He had thus lived in the reigns of Edward the Third, Richard the Second, and Henry the Fourth. 85. Swans are an ornament to lakes and rivers. The swans of Australia are black. 86. Knowledge is the eye of youth, and the staff of age. 87. I flatter my- self you will be satisfied with your daughter's pronunciation. 88. One should avail one's self of every opportunity to acquire knowledge. 89. Mr. B. thinks himself a great man; but he deceives himself. 90. The horseman and horse that fell down the precipice are both dead. 91. Is this the lady from whom you received the letter which you mentioned? 92. That is the goldsmith by whom this ring was made. 93. The fruit of that forbidden tree, whose mortal taste brought death into the world. 94. The lightning has blasted that- beautiful tree, the fruit of which was so delicious. 95. Never defer till to-morrow what you can do to-day. 96. Shun poverty: whatever be your in- come, spend less. 97. This is bad ; that is worse : these are so-so ; those are the worst of all. 98. There is but one lasting afflic- tion, — that which is caused by the loss of self-esteem. 99. Share this melon with your play-fellows ; give each of them a slice. 100. My brothers are both returned from college; each has obtained a prize. 101. All fools are not knaves ; but all knaves are fools. 102. Mr. A. has failed: shall you lose the money he owes you? 103. I shall have published the second edition of my Dictionary before the end of the year. 104. When you have studied Italian two years, you will understand what you read. 105. He will have spent half his fortune before inheriting it. 106. He who listens through a hole may hear what will not 42 EXERCISES FOE TRANSLATION. please him. 107. " Doctor, may ma eat oysters for supper?" " Yes : she may eat shells and all, if she likes." 108. My brother might have made a fortune by his trade. 109. Before you say or do any thing, reflect what the consequences may be. 110. If I went by the steamer, I should be sea-sick. 111. You would arrive sooner if you went by the mail. 112. While you are passing through the Tunnel under the Thames, hundreds of large ships are sailing over your head. 113. Since habit is a second nature, let us early form good ones. 114. The universe is com- posed of two things only, — mind and matter. 115. In educating the mind, we should not forget to educate the heart. 116. In Italy the eye sees much, but the memory more. 117. Victoria the First, Queen of the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, is the grand-daughter of George the Third, and the neice of King William the Fourth. 118. The Arabs call the camel the ship of the desert. 119. Egypt was the cradle of arts and sciences. 120. There are, in your exercise, as many errors as words. 121. The prospect brightens as you ascend. 122. Beauty is potent, but money is omnipotent. 123. Though I had written the letter, I had not forwarded it. 124. He is still rich, notwithstanding his losses. 125. He has acted an unworthy part: nevertheless I will assist him. 126. I forgive him, on con- dition that I never see him more. 127. Tell the truth : other- wise you will be despised by every one. 128. She was both young and lovely, and rich also. 129. The earth is divided into five parts ; namely, Europe, Asia, etc. 130. You might learn a great many things : as, for instance, music, painting, etc. 131. It has happened just as I expected. 132. Whence comes it that you are so melancholy? 133. You are young and inexperi- enced : therefore you ought to be guided by the advice of your elders. 134. You have promised: then you must perform. 135. Since she has written to you, you must reply. EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 43 The pagan gods chose various trees. The oak pleased Jupitep ; the ash, Mars ; the pine, Cybele ; the poplar-tree, Hercules ; gild the laurel, Apollo. Minerva and Pallas asked why they ■!^ok unfruitful trees. Jupiter replied, " On account of the honor^' " Say what you will," added Pallas, " I like the olive on account^ of its fruit." " You are right, dear daughter," replied Jupiter ; J and immediately they all called her the Goddess of Wisdom, because, if what we do is useless, the honor is vain. The celebrated Venetian painter, Titian, let his pencil fall whilst painting the Emperor Charles V. The emperor picked it up immediately, saying, " A Titian merits to be served by an emperor." There are few fine galleries where pictures of Titian and Correggio are not to be found. Aspasia of Miletus was celebrated in Athens for her wit and her beauty. She was so skilful in eloquence and politics, that Socrates himself took lessons of her. She was the teacher and wife of Pericles, and lived 428 years before the Christian era. Count Mansfield, one of the greatest captains of the age, had certain proofs that an apothecary had received a considerable sum to poison him. He sent for him ; and, when he appeared before him, he said, " My friend, I cannot believe that a person whom I have never injured should wish to take my life. If necessity induces you to commit such a crime, here is money : be honest." Whilst a countryman was sowing his field, a young man passed by, who, trying to be witty, said with rather an insolent air, " Good man, you have to sow, and we reap the fruits of your labors." To which the countryman replied, " It is very prob- able, sir; for I am sowing hemp." 44 EXEECISES FOK TRANSLATION. A young man of distinction, having just returned from mak- ing the tour of Europe, and using the privilege of travellers tij embellish things with the flowers of invention, was telling an Officer, one day, of the magnificent presents which he had received from different reigning princes ; among others, he men- tioned a very superb bridle, which had been given to him by the King of France. " It is so elegantly ornamented with gold and precious stones," said he, " that I cannot persuade myself to put it into my horse's mouth ; what can I do with it ? " — " Put it into your own " (mouth), replied the officer with whom the traveller was speaking. Boston : Printed by John Wilson & Son. TESTIMONIALS. New York, February, 1865. I have used " Otto's French Grammar " since its publication, and consider it the best book on the subject. It is based on the most modern Grammars published in Paris; it is thorough, and full of idiomatical expressions that can be found in no other work. LUCIEN OUDIN, A.M. Instructor of the French. Language, N.Y. Free Academy. I have used " Otto's German Grammar." I consider it a very good book ; its abundant vocabularies, and its fulness in idioms, are especially useful. The appendix, also, is very valuable, con- taining, as it does, some of the most popular and characteristic German Poems which may be turned to many uses. Feb. 1,1865. ADOLPH WERNEB, Professor 6f German, New-York Free Academy, Washington University, St. Louis, Jan. 2, 1866. Mr. S. E. Ubbino. Deab Sir —It gives me great pleasure to inform you that I have introduced ycur edition of " Otto's German Grammar " in my classes in tbis University, and that I regard it as the very best German Grammar, for school purposes, that has thus far come to my notice. Your German editions of the " Immensee," " Vergiss- meinnicht," and " Irrlichter," are great favorites among my pupils; and your " College Series of Modern French Plays," edited by Mr. Ferdinand Bocher of Harvard College, I regard as very useful for the recitation room, and for private reading. Yours very truly, B. L. TAFEL, Ph. D* Professor of Modem Languages and Comparative Philology in Washington University. Dictation Exercises. By E. M. Seweix, author of "Amy Herbert," and by L. B. Urbino. Boston : S. R. Urbino. " We are already deeply indebted to Miss Sewell, and this little book adds one item more to the list of valuable books which she has furnished to us and our children. This is emphatically a school- book with a soul in it, and we think nothing can exceed the skill and ingenuity with which these exercises are drawn up. No teacher can glance at it without at once perceiving its importance to hira ; and in our opinion, in the teaching and spelling, it has. not its equal. ■ — Transcript. Dictation Exercises. By E. M. Seweix and L. B. Ukbino. (pp.174.) Boston : S. R. Urbino. " Bad spelling is so common, in spite of all our schools, that it is worth the wliile even of an accomplished writer like the author of ' Amy Herbert " to prepare a good spelling-book ; for such is the volume before us. " It is arranged, however, on a plan so novel, in English, as to de- serve special attention. The words are arranged in continuous, though rather comical, sentences, which are to be written down, from dictation, by the learner. The lessons are progressive, and cannot fail to interest more than the old columns of disconnected words. ' It is well printed by Mr. Urbino." — Commonwealth. If a child of average capacity, that has been drilled in an ordinary spelling-book, and then subjected to a course of lessons in this book of Dictation Exercises, cannot spell correctly the words of tlie language, it would prove, what I do not believe, that correct spelling cannot be attained by ail pupils, by seasonable study and drill. I believe that every public and private school in America would be greatly benefited by using this valuable treatise. Very truly yours, WILLIAM E. SHELDON. isli-iif